• CA CA Capital Adequacy

    • PART 1: PART 1: Definition of Capital

      • CA-A CA-A Introduction

        • CA-A.1 CA-A.1 Purpose

          • Executive Summary

            • CA-A.1.1

              The purpose of this module is to set out the Central Bank of Bahrain (CBB)'s capital adequacy Rules and provide guidance on the risk measurements for the calculation of capital requirements by Bahraini conventional bank licensees. This requirement is supported by Article 44(c) of the Central Bank of Bahrain and Financial Institutions Law (Decree No. 64 of 2006).

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.2

              Principle 9 of the Principles of Business requires that conventional bank licensees maintain adequate human, financial and other resources, sufficient to run their business in an orderly manner (see Section PB-1.9). In addition, Condition 5 of CBB's Licensing Conditions (Section LR-2.5) requires conventional bank licensees to maintain financial resources in excess of the minimum requirements specified in Module CA (Capital Adequacy).

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.3

              This Module also sets out the minimum leverage requirements which relevant banks (referred to in Section CA-B.1) must meet as a condition of their licensing.

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.4

              The requirements specified in this Module vary according to the inherent risk profile of a licensee, and the volume and type of business undertaken. As one of the principal objectives of the CBB (as outlined in Article 3 of the CBB Law 2006) is the protection of depositors, it is essential to ensure that the capital recognised in regulatory capital measures is readily available for those depositors and to ensure that conventional bank licensees hold sufficient capital to provide some protection against unexpected losses in the normal course of business, and otherwise allow conventional banks to effect an orderly wind-down of their operations. The minimum capital requirements specified here may not be sufficient to absorb all unexpected losses. The CBB therefore may impose more stringent capital requirements than those stated in this Module on certain banks taking into account the riskiness of the activities conducted by the concerned bank (see Paragraph CA-A.1.5A).

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.5

              The CBB requires that conventional bank licensees maintain adequate capital, in accordance with the requirements of this Module, against their risks. In particular, all Bahraini conventional bank licensees are required to maintain capital adequacy ratios or CARs (both on a solo and a consolidated basis where applicable) above the minimum levels set out in Chapters CA-B and CA-2. Failure to remain above these ratios will result in enforcement and other measures as outlined in Section CA-1.2 and Module EN. The detailed methodology for calculating the CARs is set out in the instructions for the form PIR.

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.5A

              All Bahraini conventional bank licensees must maintain their own target capital ratios above the supervisory CARs mentioned in Section CA-B.2 (on a solo and on a consolidated basis). Each concerned licensee must observe individual target ratios as agreed with the CBB on a case-by-case basis subject to a methodology to be disclosed in due course.

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.6

              This module provides support for certain other parts of the Rulebook, mainly:

              (a) Prudential Consolidation and Deduction Requirements;
              (b) Licensing and Authorisation Requirements;
              (c) CBB Reporting Requirements;
              (d) Credit Risk Management;
              (e) Operational Risk Management;
              (f) High Level Controls:
              (g) Relationship with Audit Firms; and
              (h) Enforcement.
              January 2015

          • Legal Basis

            • CA-A.1.7

              This Module contains the CBB's Directive (as amended from time to time) relating to the capital adequacy of conventional bank licensees, and is issued under the powers available to the CBB under Article 38 of the CBB Law. The Directive in this Module is applicable in its entirety to all Bahraini conventional bank licensees.

              January 2015

            • CA-A.1.8

              For an explanation of the CBB's rule-making powers and different regulatory instruments, see Section UG-1.1.

              January 2015

        • CA-A.2 CA-A.2 Module History

          • CA-A.2.1

            This module was first issued in July 2004 as part of the conventional principles volume. Material changes took place in January 2008 to implement Basel II. Other changes that have subsequently been made to this module are annotated with the calendar quarter date in which the changes were made. Chapter UG-3 provides further guidance on Rulebook maintenance and version control.

            January 2015

          • CA-A.2.1A

            The most recent changes are detailed in the Table below.

            Summary of Changes

            Module Ref. Change Date Description of Changes
            CA-A.2 10/07 Change categorising Module as a Directive
            CA-1 to CA-8 01/08 Extensive changes to implement Basel II
            CA-3.4 04/08 Recognition and mapping of grades for Capital Intelligence
            CA-3.2.15-18 01/09 New guidance and rules on SMEs
            CA-A 01/2011 Various minor amendments to ensure consistency in CBB Rulebook.
            CA-A.2.7 01/2011 Clarified legal basis.
            CA-6, CA-8, CA-9, CA-10, CA-14 & CA-16 01/2012 Changes in respect of July 2009 and February 2011 amendments to Basel II.
            CA-3.2.10 and CA-3.2.11A 04/2012 Amendment made for claims on banks dealing with self-liquidating letters of credit.
            CA-2.1.5, CA-2.1.5A and CA-2.1.5B 04/2013 Clarified Rules dealing with subordinated debt issued.
            CA-2.1.5(h) 10/2013 Added Rule to include limited general provision against unidentified future losses as part of Tier 2.
            CA-11.3.7 10/2013 Clarified Rules for excluding positions of a structural nature from the calculation of the net open currency positions.
            Module CA 01/2015 Extensive changes to implement Basel III.
            CA-1.3.3 04/2015 Existing exemptions in respect of PIR review will cease as at 31st December 2014 for all Bahraini conventional bank licensees.
            CA-2.1.2 04/2015 Underlined the term 'financial instruments' so that it is linked to the glossary definition.
            CA-2.3.5 04/2015 Corrected cross reference.
            CA-2.4.2 04/2015 Clarified that intangible assets other than goodwill and mortgage servicing rights are subject to transitional arrangements and are phased out as regulatory adjustments as outlined in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1(d).
            CA-2.4.12 04/2015 Clarified that shares of the bank held as collateral are considered as shares held indirectly and are subject to deduction under regulatory adjustments.
            CA-2.4.23 and CA-3.2.19A 04/2015 Corrected reference to conventional bank licensee.
            CA-2.4.25 04/2015 Clarified the rule on significant investments in commercial entities by adding cross reference to the definition.
            CA-2A.3.3 04/2015 Paragraph deleted as not applicable on the implementation of the capital conservation buffer.
            CA-B.2.1(d) 07/2015 Amendment made to clarify that during the transition period, the remainder not deducted from capital is subject to the risk weights outlined in the October 2014 version of Chapter CA-3.
            CA-2.4.25 and CA-2.4.26 07/2015 Amendment made to reflect the treatment of the risk weighting for exposures below the threshold limits.
            CA-2.1.6 and CA-2.1.10 01/2016 Updated criteria for AT1 and T2 instruments.
            CA-3.2.4, CA-3.2.4A and CA-3.2.4B 04/2016 Updated risk weightings for claims on non-central government public sector entities (PSEs).
            CA-2.4.25 10/2016 Updated reference of CM Module
            CA-B.1.5 and CA-B.1.6 07/2017 Deleted the term 'financial entity'.
            CA-15 10/2018 Added new Section on Leverage Ratio Requirements.
            CA-3.2.19B 07/2019 Added a new Paragraph on exposures to Social Housing Schemes.
            CA-1.1.6 01/2022 Amended Paragraph.
            CA-1.1.6A 01/2022 Added new Paragraph on reverting from standardised approach to basic indicator approach.
            CA-3.2.19B 10/2022 Amended Paragraph on the implementation of social housing schemes.
            CA-15.7 10/2022 Amended Section on Gearing.
            CA-4.5.7A 01/2023 Added a new Paragraph on recognition of credit default guarantees provided by Tamkeen.

          • Evolution of Module

            • CA-A.2.2

              The contents retained from the previous Module (Capital Adequacy — Conventional Banks) are effective from the dates depicted above.

              January 2015

        • CA-A.3 – CA-A.5

          [Sections CA-A.3 to CA-A.5 were deleted in January 2015.]

          Deleted: January 2015

      • CA-B CA-B Scope of Application and Transitional Rules

        • CA-B.1 CA-B.1 Scope

          • CA-B.1.1

            All Bahraini conventional bank licensees are required to measure and apply capital charges with respect to their credit risk, operational risk and market risks capital requirements.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.2

            Rules in this Module are applicable to Bahraini conventional bank licensees on both a solo (i.e. including their foreign branches) and on a consolidated group basis as described below. The applicable ratios and methodology are described in this Chapter and Chapters CA-1 and CA-2 for solo and consolidated CAR calculations.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.2A

            The scope of this Module includes the parent bank and all its banking subsidiaries and any other financial entities such as Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) which are required to be consolidated for regulatory purposes by the CBB. The assets and liabilities of all such subsidiaries must be fully consolidated on a line-by-line basis. In some cases, the assets of foreign banking subsidiaries will be allowed to be included by way of aggregation (see CA-B.1.4 onward). All other financial activities (both regulated and unregulated) must be captured through consolidation where practical to do so. Generally, majority-owned or controlled financial entities must be fully consolidated according to the methodologies outlined in this Module. If any majority-owned financial entities are not consolidated for capital purposes, all equity and other regulatory capital investments in those entities must be deducted and the assets and liabilities as well as third-party capital investments in the entity must be removed from the conventional bank licensee's balance sheet.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.2B

            In addition, this Module applies to conventional bank licensees on a solo basis (also including their foreign branches). This means that the assets and liabilities of subsidiaries referred to in Paragraph CA-B.1.2A must not be included in the balance sheet of the parent bank for the solo capital calculation and all equity and other regulatory capital investments in those entities must be deducted from the applicable components of Total Capital of the parent bank.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.2C

            Where a conventional bank licensee has no subsidiaries as referred to in Paragraph CA-B.1.2A, then the consolidated CAR requirements of this Module apply to the conventional bank licensee on a stand-alone basis.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.2D

            Although consolidation outlined in this Module are prescribed only for computing regulatory minimum capital, the procedures applied for such consolidation are performed in accordance with applicable accounting standards and best practices which may be subject to change from time to time.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.1.3

            If conventional bank licensees have investments in or control over banking or financial entities, including SPVs, they will also need to apply rules set out in Section CA-2.4 for the calculation of their solo and consolidated Capital Adequacy Ratios (CAR).

            January 2015

          • Full Consolidation Versus Aggregation

            • CA-B.1.4

              Generally, wherever possible, the assets and liabilities of banking subsidiaries must be consolidated on a line-by-line basis using the risk-weighting and other rules and guidance in this Module. In some cases, foreign banking subsidiaries are subject to slightly differing rules by their host regulator. In such cases it may be more convenient to add in the risk-weighted assets of the subsidiary as calculated by host rules rather than by adding in the assets of the subsidiary and subjecting them to CBB requirements and risk weights. This process of using host risk-weights instead of CBB risk-weights is termed 'aggregation'. Also host rules may treat some capital items differently to CBB rules. For example, T2 instruments may have different rules in host countries. There may therefore need to be a 'haircut' to such capital instruments, if the amount allowed by the host regulator is different to the amount of the investment by the parent bank.

              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.5

              For the reasons outlined in Paragraphs CA-B.1.2A to CA-B.1.4, banks must agree the proposed regulatory consolidation or aggregation approach for banking subsidiaries with the CBB and their external auditor.

              Amended: July 2017
              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.6

              If a banking subsidiary is to be consolidated by way of aggregation, the capital and risk weighted assets (RWAs) of the non-resident entity must be shown separately. The parent bank is required to aggregate the subsidiary's eligible capital and RWAs (based on the risk weighting of assets reported by the subsidiary to its host central bank) with its own eligible capital and RWAs respectively.

              Amended: July 2017
              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.7

              Appropriate adjustments must be made to eliminate intra-group exposures.

              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.8

              If a conventional bank operates an Islamic window, the assets of such Islamic window will be risk weighted in accordance with CBB's guidelines for conventional banks.

              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.9

              If a bank in Bahrain is a subsidiary of a non-resident parent bank, the capital adequacy of such bank is determined on a standalone basis.

              January 2015

            • CA-B.1.10

              Majority-owned or controlled financial entity subsidiaries must be adequately capitalised to reduce the possibility of future potential losses to the parent bank. The parent bank must monitor actions taken by the subsidiary to correct any capital shortfall and, if it is not corrected in a timely manner, the shortfall must also be deducted from the parent bank's solo and consolidated capital for regulatory capital purposes.

              January 2015

        • CA-B.2 CA-B.2 Transitional Arrangements

          • CA-B.2.1

            The transitional arrangements for implementing the new standards help to ensure that the banking sector can meet the higher capital standards through reasonable earnings retention and capital raising, while still supporting lending to the economy. The transitional arrangements are as follows:

            (a) Implementation of this Module begins on 1 January 2015. As of 1 January 2015, conventional bank licensees are required to meet the following new minimum CAR requirements taking each component of capital as defined in Chapters CA-2 and CA-2A divided by total risk-weighted assets (RWAs) as defined in Paragraph CA-1.1.3:

            Components of Consolidated CARs
              Optional Minimum Ratio Required
            Core Equity Tier 1 (CET 1)   6.5%
            Additional Tier 1 (AT1) 1.5%  
            Tier 1 (T1)   8%
            Tier 2 (T2) 2%  
            Total Capital   10%
            Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) (see below)   2.5%
            CARs including CCB
            CET 1 plus CCB   9%
            Tier 1 plus CCB   10.5%
            Total Capital plus CCB   12.5%

            Components of Solo CARs
              Optional Minimum Ratio Required
            Core Equity Tier 1 (CET1)   4.5%
            Additional Tier 1 (AT1) 1.5%  
            Tier 1 (T1)   6.0%
            Tier 2 (T2) 2%  
            Total Capital   8.0%
            Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) (see below)   0%
            CARs including CCB
            CET 1 plus CCB   N/A
            Tier 1 plus CCB   N/A
            Total Capital plus CCB   N/A
            (b) The difference between the Total Capital plus CCB (Capital Conservation Buffer — see Chapter CA-2A for more details) of 12.5% and the T1 plus CCB requirement (10.5%) for the consolidated CAR can be met with T2 and higher forms of capital;
            (c) The regulatory adjustments (i.e. deductions), including amounts above the aggregate 15% limit for significant investments in financial institutions, mortgage servicing rights, and deferred tax assets from temporary differences, are fully deducted from CET1 by 1 January 2019;
            (d) The regulatory adjustments (refer to Section CA-2.4) begin at 20% of the required adjustments to CET 1 on 1 January 2015, 40% on 1 January 2016, 60% on 1 January 2017, 80% on 1 January 2018, and reach 100% on 1 January 2019. The same transition approach applies to deductions from AT1 and T2 capital. Specifically, the regulatory adjustments to AT1 and T2 capital begin at 20% of the required deductions on 1 January 2015, 40% on 1 January 2016, 60% on 1 January 2017, 80% on 1 January 2018, and reach 100% on 1 January 2019. During the transition period, the remainder of exposures held prior to 1st January 2015 not deducted from capital is subject to the risk weights outlined in the October 2014 version of Chapter CA-3;
            (e) The treatment of capital issued out of subsidiaries and held by third parties (e.g. minority interest) is also phased in. Where such capital is eligible for inclusion in one of the three components of capital according to Paragraphs CA-2.3.1 to CA-2.3.5, it can be included from 1 January 2015. Where such capital is not eligible for inclusion in one of the three components of capital but is included under the existing treatment, 20% of this amount must be excluded from the relevant component of capital on 1 January 2015, 40% on 1 January 2016, 60% on 1 January 2017, 80% on 1 January 2018, and reach 100% on 1 January 2019; and
            (f) Capital instruments that no longer qualify as non-common equity T1 capital or T2 capital are phased out beginning 1 January 2015. Fixing the base at the nominal amount of such instruments outstanding on 1 January 2015, their recognition is capped at 90% from 1 January 2015, with the cap reducing by 10 percentage points in each subsequent year. This cap is applied to AT1 and T2 separately and refers to the total amount of instruments outstanding that no longer meet the relevant entry criteria. To the extent an instrument is redeemed, or its recognition in capital is amortised, after 1 January 2015, the nominal amount serving as the base is not reduced. In addition, instruments with an incentive to be redeemed are treated as follows:
            (i) For an instrument that has a call and a step-up prior to 1 January 2015 (or another incentive to be redeemed), if the instrument is not called at its effective maturity date and on a forward-looking basis meets the new criteria for inclusion in T1 or T2, it continues to be recognised in that tier of capital;
            (ii) For an instrument that has a call and a step-up on or after 1 January 2015 (or another incentive to be redeemed), if the instrument is not called at its effective maturity date and on a forward looking basis meets the new criteria for inclusion in T1 or T2, it continues to be recognised in that tier of capital. Prior to the effective maturity date, the instrument would be considered an "instrument that no longer qualifies as AT1 or T2" and is therefore phased out from 1 January 2015;
            (iii) For an instrument that has a call and a step-up between 12 September 2012 and 1 January 2015 (or another incentive to be redeemed), if the instrument is not called at its effective maturity date and on a forward looking basis does not meet the new criteria for inclusion in T1 or T2, it is fully derecognised in that tier of regulatory capital from 1 January 2015;
            (iv) For an instrument that has a call and a step-up on or after 1 January 2015 (or another incentive to be redeemed), if the instrument is not called at its effective maturity date and on a forward looking basis does not meet the new criteria for inclusion in T1 or T2, it is derecognised in that tier of regulatory capital from the effective maturity date. Prior to the effective maturity date, the instrument would be considered an "instrument that no longer qualifies as AT1 or T2" and is therefore phased out from 1 January 2015; and
            (v) For an instrument that had a call and a step-up on or prior to 12 September 2012 (or another incentive to be redeemed), if the instrument was not called at its effective maturity date and on a forward looking basis does not meet the new criteria for inclusion in T1 or T2, it is considered an "instrument that no longer qualifies as AT1 or T2" and is therefore phased out from 1 January 2015.
            Amended: July 2015
            January 2015

          • CA-B.2.2

            Capital instruments that do not meet the criteria for inclusion in CET1 are excluded from CET1 as of 1 January 2015.

            January 2015

          • CA-B.2.3

            Only those instruments issued before 12 September 2012 qualify for the transition arrangements outlined in Paragraph CA-B.2.1.

            January 2015

      • CA-1 CA-1 General Requirements

        • CA-1.1 CA-1.1 Capital Adequacy Ratio (Definition and Methodology)

          • CA-1.1.1

            A conventional bank licensee's consolidated capital adequacy ratio is calculated by dividing its Consolidated Total Capital by its consolidated risk-weighted assets (RWAs). These items are defined and described in Paragraphs CA-1.1.2 to CA-1.1.8. A diagrammatic description of the formula used to calculate the consolidated CAR is given below.

                              Consolidated Total Capital                 
            RWAs (Credit + Market + Operational Risks)
            January 2015

          • Consolidated Total Capital

            • CA-1.1.2

              Consolidated Total Capital consists of the sum of the following elements:

              (a) T1 (Going-concern):
              (i) CET1 (as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.2);
              (ii) AT1 (as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.4); and
              (b) T2 (Gone-concern) as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.8.
              January 2015

          • Consolidated Risk-Weighted Assets

            • CA-1.1.3

              Consolidated Total RWAs are determined by:

              (a) Multiplying the capital requirements for market risk (see CA-1.1.7) and operational risk (see CA-1.1.6) by 12.5 for the conventional bank licensee and all its consolidated subsidiaries; and
              (b) Adding the resulting figures to the sum of RWAs for credit risk (see CA-1.1.4) and securitisation risk for the conventional bank licensee and all its consolidated subsidiaries (see CA-1.1.5).
              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.4

              For the measurement of their credit risks, conventional bank licensees measure the risks in the standardised approach, applying the measurement framework described in Chapter CA-3 and subject to the credit mitigation techniques outlined in Chapter CA-4 of this Module.

              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.5

              The securitisation framework is set out in Chapter CA-6. Conventional bank licensees must apply the securitisation framework for determining regulatory capital requirements on exposures arising from traditional and synthetic securitisations or similar structures that contain features common to both.

              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.6

              For the measurement of their operational risks, conventional bank licensees have a choice, subject to notification to the CBB, between two broad methodologies:

              (a) The basic indicator approach, by applying the measurement framework described in Chapter CA-7 of this Module; and
              (b) The standardised approach (also in Chapter CA-7) this approach is subject to certain conditions (outlined in Chapter OM-8) and requires the explicit approval of the CBB.
              Amended: January 2022
              Added: January 2015

            • CA-1.1.6A

              For the purpose of Sub-paragraph CA-1.1.6 (b), a licensee must provide appropriate justification and seek CBB’s prior approval, if it wishes to revert from the standardised approach to the basic indicator approach.

               

              Added: January 2022

            • CA-1.1.7

              For the measurement of their market risk, conventional bank licensees have a choice, subject to the written approval of the CBB, between two broad methodologies:

              (a) One alternative is to measure the risks in a standardised approach, applying the measurement frameworks described in Chapters CA-9 to CA-13 of this Module; and
              (b) The second alternative methodology (i.e. the IMM or internal models approach) is set out in detail in Chapter CA-14 including the procedure for obtaining the CBB's approval. This methodology is subject to the fulfilment of certain conditions. The use of this methodology is, therefore, conditional upon the explicit approval of the CBB.
              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.8

              In light of Paragraphs CA-1.1.3 to CA-1.1.7, each conventional bank licensee's overall capital requirement consists of:

              (a) The credit risk requirements laid down in Chapters CA-2 to CA-6, and including the credit counterparty risk on all over-the-counter derivatives whether in the trading or the banking books (see Chapter CA-8);
              (b) The capital charges for operational risk described in Chapter CA-7; and
              (c) The capital charges for market risks:
              (i) Described in Chapters CA-9 to CA-13 summed arithmetically;
              (ii) Derived from the models approach set out in Chapter CA-14; or
              (iii) A mixture of (i) and (ii) summed arithmetically.
              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.9

              All transactions, including forward sales and purchases, must be included in the calculation of capital requirements as from the date on which they were entered into. Although regular reporting takes place quarterly, conventional bank licensees must manage their risks in such a way that the capital and leverage requirements are being met on a continuous basis, i.e. at the close of each business day. Conventional bank licensees must not "window-dress" by showing significantly lower credit or market risk positions on reporting dates. Conventional bank licensees must maintain strict risk management systems to ensure that intra-day exposures are not excessive. If a conventional bank licensee fails to meet the capital requirements of this Module, the bank must take immediate measures to rectify the situation as detailed in Section CA-1.2.

              January 2015

          • Solo Capital Adequacy Ratio

            • CA-1.1.10

              A conventional bank licensee's solo capital adequacy ratio is calculated by dividing its Solo Total Capital by its Solo RWAs as described in Paragraph CA-1.1.11 and CA-1.1.12 without consolidating the assets and liabilities of subsidiaries referred to Paragraph CA-B.1.2A into the balance sheet of the parent bank.

              January 2015

          • Solo Total Capital

            • CA-1.1.11

              Solo Total Capital consists of the sum of the following elements:

              (a) T1 (Going-concern):
              (i) CET1 for the parent bank only (as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.2 but deducting item (c) before applying regulatory adjustments in item (d);
              (ii) AT1 for the parent bank only (as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.4 but deducting item (c) before applying regulatory adjustments in item (d); and
              (b) T2 (Gone-concern) for the parent bank only as defined in Paragraph CA-2.1.8 but deducting item (c) before applying regulatory adjustments in item (d).
              January 2015

          • Solo Risk-Weighted Assets

            • CA-1.1.12

              Solo Total RWAs are determined by:

              (a) Multiplying the capital requirements for market risk (see CA-1.1.7) and operational risk (see CA-1.1.6) by 12.5 for the parent bank alone; and
              (b) Adding the resulting figures to the sum of risk-weighted assets for credit risk (see CA-1.1.4) and securitisation risk for the parent bank alone (see CA-1.1.5).
              January 2015

            • CA-1.1.13

              For the purpose of this Module the solo CAR may be shown diagrammatically as below.

                                          Total Capital                           
              RWAs (Credit + Market + Operational Risks)
              January 2015

        • CA-1.2 CA-1.2 Reporting

          • CA-1.2.1

            Formal reporting to the CBB of capital adequacy must be made in accordance with the requirements set out under Section BR-3.1.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.2.2

            All Bahraini conventional bank licensees must provide the CBB, with immediate written notification (i.e. by no later than the following business day) of any actual breach of the minimum ratios outlined in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1 (a). Where such notification is given, the conventional bank licensee must also:

            (a) Provide the CBB no later than one calendar week after the notification, with a written action plan setting out how the conventional bank licensee proposes to restore the relevant ratios to the required minimum level(s), further, describing how the conventional bank licensee will ensure that a breach of such ratios will not occur again in the future;
            (b) Provide the CBB with weekly reports basis thereafter on the conventional bank licensee's relevant ratios until such ratios have reached the required minimum, level(s) described in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1(a); and
            (c) Take additional note of the Capital Conservation plan requirements in Chapter CA-2A where additional action is required when the Capital Conservation Buffer has been breached.
            January 2015

          • CA-1.2.3

            The conventional bank licensee is required to submit form PIR to the CBB on a weekly basis, until the concerned CARs identified in Paragraph CA-1.2.2 exceed the required minimum ratios.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.2.4

            The CBB will notify conventional bank licensees in writing of any action required of them with regard to the corrective and preventive action (as appropriate) proposed by the conventional bank licensee pursuant to the above, as well as of any other requirement of the CBB in any particular case.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.2.5

            Conventional bank licensees must note that the CBB considers the breach of regulatory CARs to be a very serious matter. Consequently, the CBB may (at its discretion) subject a conventional bank licensee which breaches its CAR(s) to a formal licensing reappraisal. Such reappraisal may be effected either through the CBB's own inspection function or through the use of appointed experts, as appropriate. Following such appraisal, the CBB will notify the conventional bank licensee concerned in writing of its conclusions with regard to the continued licensing of the conventional bank licensee.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.2.6

            The CBB recommends that the conventional bank licensee's compliance officer support and cooperate with the CBB in the monitoring and reporting of the CARs and other regulatory reporting matters. Compliance officers should ensure that their conventional bank licensees have adequate internal systems and controls to comply with these rules.

            January 2015

        • CA-1.3 CA-1.3 Review of Prudential Information Returns

          • CA-1.3.1

            The CBB requires all conventional bank licensees to request their external auditor to conduct a review of the prudential returns on a quarterly basis in accordance with the requirements set out under Section BR-3.1.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.3.2

            If a conventional bank licensee provides prudential returns without any reservation from auditors for two consecutive quarters, it can apply for exemption from such review for a period to be decided by CBB.

            January 2015

          • CA-1.3.3

            For Bahraini conventional bank licensees, all existing exemptions in respect of PIR review as at 31st December 2014 will cease.

            Amended: April 2015
            January 2015

          • CA-1.3.4

            Conventional bank licensees' daily compliance with the capital requirements for credit and market risk must be verified by the independent risk management department and the internal auditor.

            January 2015

      • CA-2 CA-2 Regulatory Capital

        • CA-2.1 CA-2.1 Regulatory Capital

          • Tier 1 (T1)

            • CA-2.1.1

              The predominant form of T1 capital must be common shares and retained earnings (hereafter referred to as CET1). Deductions from capital and prudential filters are applied at the level of CET1 (see CA-2.1 to CA-2.4 for a more detailed explanation). The remainder of the T1 capital base must be comprised of instruments that are subordinated, have fully discretionary non-cumulative dividends or coupons and have neither a maturity date nor an incentive to redeem.

              January 2015

          • Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1)

            • CA-2.1.2

              CET1 capital consists of the sum of the following items (a) to (d) below:

              (a) Issued and fully paid common shares that meet the criteria for classification as common shares for regulatory purposes (see Paragraph CA-2.1.3);
              (b) Disclosed reserves including:
              (i) General reserves;
              (ii) Legal / statutory reserves;
              (iii) Share premium;
              (iv) Fair value reserves arising from fair valuing financial instruments; and
              (v) Retained earnings or losses (including net profit and loss for the reporting period, whether reviewed or audited);
              (c) Common shares issued by consolidated banking subsidiaries of the conventional bank licensee and held by third parties (i.e. minority interest) that meet the criteria for inclusion in CET1. See Section CA-2.3 for the relevant criteria; and
              (d) Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of CET1 (see Section CA-2.4).
              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.2A

              For unrealised fair value reserves relating to financial instruments to be included in CET1 Capital, conventional bank licensees and their auditor must only recognise such gains or losses that are prudently valued and independently verifiable (e.g. by reference to market prices). The CBB will closely review the components and extent of unrealised gains and losses and will exclude any that do not have reference to independent valuations (i.e. those made by bank management alone will not be included) or which are not deemed to be made on a prudent basis. As such, the prudent valuations, and the independent verification thereof, are mandatory. Unrealised gains and losses that have resulted from changes in the fair value of liabilities that are due to changes in the bank's own credit risk must be derecognised in the calculation of CET1.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.3

              For a common share to be included in CET1, it must meet the following criteria:

              (a) It is directly issued to shareholders and fully paid in;
              (b) It is non-cumulative;
              (c) It is able to absorb losses within the conventional bank licensee on a going-concern basis;
              (d) It is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or a related entity or any other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim vis-à-vis bank creditors;
              (e) It represents the most subordinated claim in liquidation of the conventional bank licensee (i.e. it is junior to depositors, general creditors, and subordinated debt of the bank);
              (f) It is entitled to a claim on the residual assets that is proportional with its share of issued capital, after all senior claims have been repaid in liquidation (i.e. it has an unlimited and variable claim, not a fixed or capped claim);
              (g) Its principal is perpetual and never repaid outside of liquidation;
              (h) The conventional bank licensee does nothing to create an expectation at issuance that the instrument will be bought back, redeemed or cancelled nor do the statutory or contractual terms provide any feature which might give rise to such an expectation;
              (i) Distributions are paid out of distributable items (retained earnings included). The level of distributions is not in any way tied or linked to the amount paid in at issuance and is not subject to a contractual cap (except to the extent that a bank is unable to pay distributions that exceed the level of distributable items);
              (j) There are no circumstances under which the distributions are obligatory. Non-payment is therefore not an event of default;
              (k) Distributions are paid only after all legal and contractual obligations have been met and payments on more senior capital instruments have been made. This means that there are no preferential distributions;
              (l) It is the issued capital that takes the first and proportionately greatest share of any losses as they occur;
              (m) The paid in amount is recognised as equity capital (i.e. it is not recognised as a liability) for determining balance sheet insolvency;
              (n) The paid in amount is classified as equity under IFRS and disclosed separately in the financial statements;
              (o) The conventional bank licensee cannot directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument (i.e. treasury shares and shares purchased or funded by the conventional bank licensee for employee share purchase schemes must be deducted from CET1, and are subject to the 10% limit under the Commercial Companies' Law. Any of the conventional bank licensee's own shares used as collateral for the advance of funds to its customers must be deducted from CET1 and are also subject to the above 10% limit); and
              (p) It is only issued with the approval of the shareholders of the issuing conventional bank licensee.
              January 2015

          • Additional Tier 1 Capital (AT1)

            • CA-2.1.4

              AT1 capital consists of the sum of the items (a ) to (d):

              (a) Instruments issued by the bank that meet the criteria for inclusion in AT1 outlined in Paragraph CA-2.1.6;
              (b) Stock surplus (share premium) resulting from the issue of instruments included in AT1;
              (c) Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and held by third parties that meet the criteria for inclusion in AT1 and are not included in CET1. See section CA-2.3 for the relevant criteria; and
              (d) Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of AT1 (see CA-2.4).
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.5

              [This paragraph has been left blank.]

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.6

              For an instrument to be included in AT1, it must meet or exceed all the criteria below:

              (a) It is issued and paid-in;
              (b) It is subordinated to depositors, general creditors and subordinated debt of the conventional bank licensee;
              (c) It is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or related entity or other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim vis-à-vis conventional bank licensee creditors;
              (d) It is perpetual, i.e. there is no maturity date and there are no step-ups or other incentives to redeem;
              (e) It may be callable at the initiative of the issuer only after a minimum of five years and a conventional bank licensee must not do anything which creates an expectation that the call will be exercised. A conventional bank licensee may not exercise such a call option without receiving prior written approval of the CBB and the called instrument is replaced with capital of the same or better quality; or the conventional bank licensee demonstrates that its capital position is well above the minimum capital requirements after the call option is exercised;
              (f) In all early call situations, replacement of existing capital must be done at conditions which are sustainable for the income capacity of the conventional bank licensee;
              (g) Any repayment of principal (e.g. through repurchase or redemption) must be with prior written approval of the CBB and the conventional bank licensee must not assume or create market expectations that supervisory approval will be given;
              (h) The conventional bank licensee must have full discretion at all times to cancel distributions/payments. This means that 'dividend pushers' are prohibited. A dividend pusher obliges a bank to make a dividend or coupon payment on an instrument if it has made a payment on another capital instrument or share. Also features that require the conventional bank licensee to make distributions in kind are not permitted;
              (i) Cancellation of discretionary payments must not be an event of default;
              (j) Conventional bank licensees must have full access to cancelled payments to meet obligations as they fall due;
              (k) Cancellation of distributions/payments must not impose restrictions on the conventional bank licensee except in relation to distributions to common stockholders;
              (l) Dividends/coupons must be paid out of distributable items;
              (m) The instrument cannot have a credit sensitive dividend feature (this might serve to increase the dividend payable if a bank's credit rating falls from A to BBB, for example) which may lead to the dividend/coupon being reset periodically based in whole or in part on the conventional bank licensee's credit standing;
              (n) The instrument cannot contribute to liabilities exceeding assets if such a balance sheet test forms part of national insolvency law. This means that instruments accounted for as liabilities must be able to be written down in some way as described in subparagraph (o);
              (o) All instruments must have principal loss absorption through either (i) conversion to common shares at an objective pre-specified trigger event; or (ii) a write-down mechanism which allocates losses to the instrument at a pre-specified trigger event. The write-down will reduce the claim of the instrument in liquidation and reduce the amount that will be re-paid when a call is exercised and partially or fully reduce coupon/dividend payments on the instrument;
              (p) Neither the conventional bank licensee nor a related party over which it exercises control or significant influence can have purchased the instrument, nor can the conventional bank licensee directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument. This also means that own holdings of AT1 instruments and AT1 instruments purchased or funded by the bank for employee share purchase schemes must be deducted from AT1. Any of the conventional bank licensee's AT1 instruments used as collateral for the advance of funds to its customers must be deducted from AT1 ;
              (q) The instrument cannot have any features that hinder recapitalisation, such as provisions that require the issuer to compensate investors if a new instrument is issued at a lower price during a specified time frame; and
              (r) If the instrument is not issued out of a fully consolidated subsidiary bank or the parent conventional bank licensee in the consolidated group (e.g. a special purpose vehicle — "SPV"), proceeds must be immediately available without limitation to the parent bank in the consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other criteria for inclusion in AT1.
              Amended: January 2016
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7

              [This paragraph has been left blank.]

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7A

              The issuance of any new shares as a result of a trigger event must occur prior to any public sector injection of capital so that the capital provided by the public sector is not diluted.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7B

              Where an issuing bank or SPV is part of a banking group and the issuer wishes the instrument to be included in the capital base of the group (in addition to its solo capital where applicable), the terms and conditions must specify an additional trigger event.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7C

              Any common stock paid as compensation to the holders of the instrument must be common stock of either the issuing bank or the parent bank of the group (including any successor in resolution).

              January 2015

          • Write Down or Conversion of Additional Tier 1 Instruments

            • CA-2.1.7D

              For the purposes of Subparagraph CA-2.1.6(o), the following provisions apply to AT1 instruments accounted for as liabilities:

              (a) A trigger event occurs when the CET1 capital ratio of the conventional bank licensee institution referred to in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1(a) falls below either of the following:
              (i) 7.0%;
              (ii) A level higher than 7.0 %, where determined by the conventional bank licensee and specified in the provisions governing the instrument; and
              (b) Conventional bank licensees may specify in the provisions governing the instrument one or more trigger events in addition to that referred to in Subparagraph (a).
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7E

              Where the provisions governing AT1 instruments require them to be converted into CET1 instruments upon the occurrence of a trigger event, those provisions must specify either of the following:

              (a) The rate of such conversion and a limit on the permitted amount of conversion; or
              (b) A range within which the instruments will convert into CET1 instruments.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7F

              Where the provisions governing AT1 instruments require their principal amount to be written down upon the occurrence of a trigger event, the write down must reduce all the following:

              (a)The claim of the holder of the instrument in the insolvency or liquidation of the conventional bank licensee;
              (b)The amount required to be paid in the event of the call or redemption of the instrument; and
              (c)The distributions made on the instrument.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7G

              Write down or conversion of an AT1 instrument must, under the applicable accounting framework, generate items that qualify as CET1 items.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7H

              The amount of AT1 instruments recognised in AT1 items is limited to the minimum amount of CET1 items that would be generated if the principal amount of the AT1 instruments were fully written down or converted into CET1 instruments.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7I

              The aggregate amount of AT1 instruments that is required to be written down or converted upon the occurrence of a trigger event must be no less than the lower of the following:

              (a)The amount required to restore fully the CET1 ratio of the conventional bank licensee to 7.0 %; and
              (b)The full principal amount of the instrument.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7J

              When a trigger event occurs conventional bank licensees must do the following:

              (a) Immediately inform the CBB;
              (b) Inform the holders of the AT1 instruments; and
              (c) Write down the principal amount of the AT1 instruments, or convert the instruments into CET1 instruments without delay, but no later than within one month, in accordance with the requirement laid down in this Section.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7K

              A conventional bank licensee issuing AT1 instruments that convert to CET1 on the occurrence of a trigger event must ensure that its authorised share capital is at all times sufficient, for converting all such convertible AT1 instruments into shares if a trigger event occurs.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7L

              All necessary authorisations must be obtained at the date of issuance of such convertible AT1 instruments. The conventional bank licensee must maintain at all times the necessary prior authorisation from the CBB to issue the CET1 instruments into which such AT1 instruments would convert upon occurrence of a trigger event.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.7M

              A conventional bank licensee issuing AT1 instruments that convert to CET1 on the occurrence of a trigger event must ensure that there are no procedural impediments to that conversion by virtue of its incorporation or statutes or contractual arrangements.

              January 2015

          • Consequences of the Conditions for AT1 Instruments Ceasing to Be Met

            • CA-2.1.7N

              The following must apply where, in the case of an AT1 instrument, the conditions laid down in Paragraph CA-2.1.6 cease to be met:

              (a) That instrument must immediately cease to qualify as an AT1 instrument; and
              (b) The part of the share premium accounts that relates to that instrument must immediately cease to qualify as an AT1 item.
              January 2015

          • Tier 2 Capital (T2)

            • CA-2.1.8

              T2 capital consists of the sum of the following items:

              (a) Instruments issued by the conventional bank licensee that meet the criteria for inclusion in T2 outlined in Paragraph CA-2.1.10;
              (b) Stock surplus (share premium) resulting from the issue of instruments included in T2;
              (c) Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the conventional bank licensee and held by third parties that meet the criteria for inclusion in T2 capital and are not included in T1. See CA-2.3 for the relevant criteria;
              (d) General loan loss provisions held against future, presently unidentified losses and are freely available to meet losses which subsequently materialise and qualify for inclusion within T2. Such general loan loss provisions which are eligible for inclusion in T2 will be limited to a maximum of 1.25 percentage points of credit risk-weighted risk assets. Provisions ascribed to identified deterioration of particular assets or known liabilities, whether individual or grouped, must be excluded;
              (e) Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of T2 (see CA-2.4); and
              (f) Asset revaluation reserves which arise from the revaluation of fixed assets from time to time in line with the change in market values, and are reflected on the face of the balance sheet as a revaluation reserve. Similarly, gains may also arise from revaluation of Investment Properties (real estate). These reserves (including the net gains on investment properties) may be included in T2 capital, with the concurrence of the external auditor, provided that the assets are prudently valued, fully reflecting the possibility of price fluctuation and forced sale.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.9

              The treatment of instruments issued out of consolidated subsidiaries of the conventional bank licensee and the regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of T2 are addressed in Section CA-2.3.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.10

              For an instrument to be included in T2(see CA-2.1.8(a)), it must meet all the criteria below:

              (a) It is issued and paid-in;
              (b) It is subordinated to depositors and general creditors of the conventional bank licensee;
              (c) It is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuing conventional bank licensee or related entity or other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim vis-à-vis depositors and general creditors of the conventional bank licensee;
              (d) It must have a minimum maturity of at least 5 years and it will be amortised on a straight line basis in the remaining five years before maturity and there are no step-ups or other incentives to redeem;
              (e) It may be callable at the initiative of the conventional bank licensee only after a minimum of five years and the conventional bank licensee must not do anything which creates an expectation that the call will be exercised. The conventional bank licensee may not exercise such a call option without receiving written prior approval of the CBB and the called instrument must be replaced with capital of the same or better quality; or the conventional bank licensee demonstrates that its capital position is well above the minimum capital requirements after the call option is exercised. In all early call situations, any replacement of existing capital must be done at conditions which are sustainable for the income capacity of the conventional bank licensee;
              (f) The investor must have no rights to accelerate the repayment of future scheduled payments (coupon or principal), except in bankruptcy and liquidation;
              (g) The instrument cannot have a credit sensitive dividend/coupon that is reset periodically based in whole or in part on the conventional bank licensee's credit standing;
              (h) Neither the conventional bank licensee nor a related party over which the bank exercises control or significant influence can have purchased the instrument, nor can the conventional bank licensee directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument. This means own holdings of T2 instruments and T2 purchased or funded by the conventional bank licensee for employee share purchase schemes must be deducted from T2. Any of the conventional bank licensee's own T2 instruments used as collateral for the advance of funds to its customers must be deducted from T2;
              (i) If the instrument is not issued out of a fully consolidated subsidiary bank or the parent conventional bank licensee in the consolidated group (e.g. a special purpose vehicle — "SPV"), proceeds must be immediately available without limitation to the parent conventional bank licensee in the consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other criteria for inclusion in T2; and
              (j) All T2 Instruments must have principal loss absorption through either (i) conversion to common shares at an objective pre-specified trigger event; or (ii) a write-down mechanism which allocates losses to the instrument at a pre-specified trigger event. The write-down will reduce the claim of the instrument in liquidation and reduce the amount that will be re-paid when a call is exercised and partially or fully reduce coupon/dividend payments on the instrument;
              Amended: January 2016
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11

              [This paragraph has been left blank.]

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11A

              The issuance of any new shares as a result of a trigger event must occur prior to any public sector injection of capital so that the capital provided by the public sector is not diluted.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11B

              Where an issuing bank or SPV is part of a banking group and the issuer wishes the instrument to be included in the capital base of the group (in addition to its solo capital where applicable), the terms and conditions must specify an additional trigger event.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11C

              Any common stock paid as compensation to the holders of the instrument must be common stock of either the issuing bank or the parent bank of the group (including any successor in resolution).

              January 2015

          • Write Down or Conversion of Tier 2 Instruments

            • CA-2.1.11D

              For the purposes of Subparagraph CA-2.1.10(j), the following provisions apply to T2 instruments accounted for as liabilities:

              (a) A trigger event occurs when the CET1 capital ratio of the conventional bank licensee institution referred to in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1(a) falls below either of the following:
              (i) 7.0%; or
              (ii) A level higher than 7.0 %, where determined by the conventional bank licensee and specified in the provisions governing the instrument; and
              (b) Conventional bank licensees may specify in the provisions governing the instrument one or more trigger events in addition to that referred to in Subparagraph (a).
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11E

              Where the provisions governing T2 instruments require them to be converted into CET1 instruments upon the occurrence of a trigger event, those provisions must specify either of the following:

              (a) The rate of such conversion and a limit on the permitted amount of conversion; or
              (b) A range within which the instruments will convert into CET1 instruments.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11F

              Where the provisions governing T2 instruments require their principal amount to be written down upon the occurrence of a trigger event, the write down must reduce all the following:

              (a) The claim of the holder of the instrument in the insolvency or liquidation of the conventional bank licensee;
              (b) The amount required to be paid in the event of the call or redemption of the instrument; and
              (c) The distributions made on the instrument.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11G

              Write down or conversion of a T2 instrument must, under the applicable accounting framework, generate items that qualify as CET1 items.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11H

              The amount of T2 instruments recognised in T2 items is limited to the minimum amount of CET1 items that would be generated if the principal amount of the T2 instruments were fully written down or converted into CET1 instruments.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11I

              The aggregate amount of T2 instruments that is required to be written down or converted upon the occurrence of a trigger event must be no less than the lower of the following:

              (a) The amount required to restore fully the CET1 ratio of the conventional bank licensee to 7.0 %; and
              (b) The full principal amount of the instrument.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11J

              When a trigger event occurs conventional bank licensees must do the following:

              (a)Immediately inform the CBB;
              (b)Inform the holders of the T2 instruments; and
              (c)Write down the principal amount of the T2 instruments, or convert the instruments into CET1 instruments without delay, but no later than within one month, in accordance with the requirement laid down in this Section.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11K

              A conventional bank licensee issuing T2 instruments that convert to CET1 on the occurrence of a trigger event must ensure that its authorised share capital is at all times sufficient, for converting all such convertible T2 instruments into shares if a trigger event occurs.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11L

              All necessary authorisations must be obtained at the date of issuance of such convertible T2 instruments. The conventional bank licensee must maintain at all times the necessary prior authorisation from the CBB to issue the CET1 instruments into which such T2 instruments would convert upon occurrence of a trigger event.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.1.11M

              A conventional bank licensee issuing T2 instruments that convert to CET1 on the occurrence of a trigger event must ensure that there are no procedural impediments to that conversion by virtue of its incorporation or statutes or contractual arrangements.

              January 2015

          • Consequences of the Conditions for T2 Instruments Ceasing to be Met

            • CA-2.1.11N

              The following must apply where, in the case of a T2 instrument, the conditions laid down in CA-2.1.10 cease to be met:

              (a) That instrument must immediately cease to qualify as a T2 instrument; and
              (b) The part of the share premium accounts that relates to that instrument must immediately cease to qualify as a T2 item.
              January 2015

        • CA-2.2 CA-2.2 Limits and Minima on the Use of Different Forms of Capital

          • Consolidated T1 Capital and Total Capital

            • CA-2.2.1

              CAR components and CARs outlined in Paragraph CA-B.2.1 must meet or exceed the following minimum ratios relative to total risk-weighted assets:

              (a) CET1 must be at least 6.5% of risk-weighted assets at all times;
              (b) T1 Capital must be at least 8% of risk-weighted assets at all times;
              (c) Total Capital (T1 Capital plus T2 Capital) must be at least 10% of risk-weighted assets at all times;
              (d) In addition, conventional bank licensees must meet the minimum Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) requirement of 2.5% of risk-weighted assets. The CCB must be composed of CET1 and so this gives an aggregate 9% CET1 including the CCB minimum capital requirement;
              (e) A minimum 10.5% T1 Capital Adequacy Ratio including the above CCB requirement; and
              (f) A 12.5% minimum Total Capital Adequacy Ratio including the above CCB requirement.
              January 2015

          • Solo Tier 1 Capital and Total Capital

            • CA-2.2.1A

              CAR components and CARs outlined in Paragraph CA-B.2.1 must meet or exceed the following minimum ratios on a solo basis relative to total risk-weighted assets:

              (a) CET1 must be at least 4.5% of risk-weighted assets at all times;
              (b) T1 Capital must be at least 6% of risk-weighted assets at all times;
              (c) Total Capital (T1 Capital plus T2 Capital) must be at least 8% of risk-weighted assets at all times; and
              (d) The minimum Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) requirement of 2.5% of risk-weighted assets does not apply on a solo basis.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.2.2

              CET1 must be the predominant form of capital. Accordingly, the contribution of AT1 instruments towards the Minimum T1 Capital Ratios mentioned in Paragraphs CA-2.2.1 and CA-2.2.1A is limited to 1.5%.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.2.3

              The limits on AT1 instruments and T2 instruments are based on the amount of CET1 after deductions pursuant to CA-2.4 (see Appendices CA-22 and CA-23 for examples of the threshold deduction effects and the caps).

              January 2015

          • Tier 2: Supplementary Capital

            • CA-2.2.4

              The contribution of T2 capital towards the Minimum Total Capital Ratios and Minimum Total Capital plus Capital Conservation Buffer Ratios mentioned in Paragraphs CA-2.2.1 (consolidated) and CA-2.2.1A (solo) is limited to 2.0%.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.2.5

              To explain the limits outlined in Paragraph CA-2.2.4 on the contributions of AT1 and T2 Capital to T1 and Total Capital, a simple example is given below where a conventional bank licensee has BD650mn of Core Equity Tier One Capital and BD200mn of AT1 and BD300mn of T2 Capital and BD10,000mn of total risk-weighted assets:

              (a) 6.5% CET1 = BD650mn;
              (b) 8.0% T1 = BD800mn (i.e. only BD150mn of the AT1 may be included in the T1 minimum requirement);
              (c) 10% Total Capital = BD1,000 mn (i.e. only BD200mn of the T2 Capital may be included in the Total Capital requirement).

              This means that if the conventional bank licensee only has BD650mn of CET1, it cannot comply with the additional Capital Conservation Buffer Requirement of 2.5% nor can it use excess AT1 or T2 Capital to meet this requirement. Although it would appear that the conventional bank licensee has BD1,150mn of total capital, only BD1,000 can be used to meet the minimum ratios. This example serves to underline the importance of CET1. Unless a conventional bank licensee can meet the CET1 minimum CARs of 6.5% and 9.0% mentioned above, it may not be able to meet any of the other minimum capital adequacy ratios outlined in Paragraph CA-2.2.1.

              January 2015

        • CA-2.3 CA-2.3 Minority Interest Held by Third Parties in Consolidated Banking Subsidiaries

          • Common Shares Issued by Consolidated Banking Subsidiaries

            • CA-2.3.1

              In order for minority interest arising from the issue of common shares by a fully consolidated subsidiary of the conventional bank licensee to be recognised in CET1 for the consolidated CAR calculation, it must meet the following conditions:

              (a) The instrument giving rise to the minority interest would, if issued by the conventional bank licensee, meet all of the criteria for classification as common shares for regulatory capital purposes;
              (b) The subsidiary that issued the instrument is itself a bank1'2; and
              (c) The subsidiary meets the limits outlined in Paragraph CA-2.3.2.

              1 For the purposes of this paragraph, any institution that is subject to the same minimum prudential standards and level of supervision as a bank may be considered to be a bank.

              2 Minority interest in a subsidiary that is a bank is strictly excluded from the parent bank's common equity if the parent bank or affiliate has entered into any arrangements to fund directly or indirectly minority investment in the subsidiary whether through an SPV or through another vehicle or arrangement. The treatment outlined above, thus, is strictly available where all minority investments in the bank subsidiary solely represent genuine third party common equity contributions to the subsidiary.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.3.2

              The amount of minority interest meeting the criteria above that will be recognised in consolidated CET1 will be calculated as follows:

              (a) Total minority interest meeting the criteria in Paragraph CA-2.3.1 minus the amount of the surplus CET1 of the subsidiary attributable to the minority shareholders;
              (b) Surplus CET1 of the subsidiary is calculated as the CET1 of the subsidiary minus the lower of:
              (i) The minimum CET1 requirement of the subsidiary plus the capital conservation buffer (CCB) (i.e. 7.0% of risk weighted assets or more as required by the concerned supervisor) and;
              (ii) The portion of the consolidated minimum CET1 requirement plus the CCB (i.e. 9.0% of consolidated risk weighted assets) that relates to the subsidiary; and
              (c) The amount of the surplus CET1 that is attributable to the minority shareholders is calculated by multiplying the surplus CET1 by the percentage of CET1 that is held by minority shareholders.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.3.2A

              Appendix CA-1 outlines an example of the effect of an allocation of minority interest between the parent bank and minority shareholders in the fully consolidated subsidiary.

              January 2015

          • AT1 Qualifying Capital Issued by Consolidated Banking Subsidiaries

            • CA-2.3.3

              AT1 capital instruments issued by a fully consolidated banking subsidiary of the conventional bank licensee to third party investors (including amounts under Paragraph CA-2.3.2) may receive recognition in T1 capital only if the instruments would, if issued by the conventional bank licensee, meet all of the criteria for classification as T1. The amount of this AT1 that will be recognised in consolidated AT1 will exclude amounts recognised in consolidated CET1 under Paragraph CA-2.3.2 and will be calculated as follows:

              (a) T1 of the subsidiary issued to third parties minus the amount of the surplus T1 of the subsidiary attributable to the third party investors;
              (b) Surplus T1 of the subsidiary is calculated as the T1 of the subsidiary minus the lower of: (1) the minimum T1 requirement of the subsidiary plus the CCB and (2) the portion of the consolidated minimum T1 requirement plus the CCB that relates to the subsidiary; and
              (c) The amount of the surplus T1 that is attributable to the third party investors is calculated by multiplying the surplus T1 by the percentage of T1 that is held by third party investors.
              January 2015

          • T2 Qualifying Capital issued by Consolidated Banking Subsidiaries

            • CA-2.3.4

              T2 instruments issued by a fully consolidated banking subsidiary of the conventional bank licensee to third party investors (including amounts under Paragraphs CA-2.3.2 and CA-2.3.3) may receive recognition in consolidated Total Capital only if the instruments would, if issued by the conventional bank licensee, meet all of the criteria for classification as T2. The amount of this T2 that will be recognised in the parent bank's T2 will exclude amounts recognised in CET1 under Paragraph CA-2.3.2 and amounts recognised in AT1 under Paragraph CA-2.3.3 and will be calculated as follows:

              (a) Total capital instruments of the subsidiary issued to third parties minus the amount of the surplus Total Capital of the subsidiary attributable to the third party investors;
              (b) Surplus Total Capital of the subsidiary is calculated as the Total Capital of the subsidiary minus the lower of:
              (i) The minimum Total Capital requirement of the subsidiary plus the capital conservation buffer; and
              (ii) The portion of the consolidated minimum Total Capital requirement plus the capital conservation buffer that relates to the subsidiary; and
              (c) The amount of the surplus Total Capital that is attributable to the third party investors is calculated by multiplying the surplus Total Capital by the percentage of Total Capital that is held by third party investors.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.3.5

              Where capital has been issued to third parties out of a special purpose vehicle (SPV), none of this capital can be included in consolidated CET1. However, such capital can be included in consolidated AT1 or T2 and treated as if the conventional bank licensee itself had issued the capital directly to the third parties only if it meets all the relevant entry criteria and the only asset of the SPV is its investment in the capital of the conventional bank licensee in a form that meets or exceeds all the relevant entry criteria3 (as required by CA-2.1.6(r) for AT1 and CA-2.1.10(i) for T2). In cases where the capital has been issued to third parties through an SPV via a fully consolidated subsidiary of the conventional bank licensee, such capital may, subject to the requirements of this paragraph, be treated as if the subsidiary itself had issued it directly to the third parties and may be included in the conventional bank licensee's consolidated AT1 or T2 in accordance with the treatment outlined in Paragraphs CA-2.3.3 and CA-2.3.4.


              3 Assets that relate to the operation of the SPV may be excluded from this assessment if they are de minimis.

              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

        • CA-2.4 CA-2.4 Regulatory Adjustments (Solo and Consolidated)

          • CA-2.4.1

            This section sets out the regulatory adjustments to be applied to Regulatory Capital. There are four stages of adjustments for CET1. In most cases these adjustments are applied in the calculation of CET1. The first set of adjustments is applied in Paragraphs CA-2.4.2 to CA-2.4.15. A subtotal for CET1 is obtained (this can be called CET1a). A second regulatory adjustment described in Paragraphs CA-2.4.16 to CA-2.4.19 is then applied to CET1a (this adjustment results in CET1b). A third regulatory adjustment described in Paragraphs CA-2.4.20 to CA-2.4.21 is then applied to CET1b (this adjustment results in CET1c). Then a final regulatory adjustment described in Paragraph CA-2.4.23 is then applied to CET1c (this adjustment results in CET1d). This is the amount of CET1 that can be used for the calculation of the CAR and determining all other applicable caps on T1 and T2. An example of the effects of the regulatory deductions is given in Appendix CA-22.

            January 2015

          • Goodwill and Other Intangibles (Except Mortgage Servicing Rights)

            • CA-2.4.2

              Goodwill must be deducted in the calculation of CET1, including any goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation. The full amount is to be deducted net of any associated deferred tax liability which would be extinguished if the goodwill becomes impaired or derecognised under IFRS. The amount to be deducted in respect of mortgage servicing rights is set out in Paragraph CA-2.4.23A. Intangible assets other than goodwill and mortgage service rights are subject to transitional arrangements and are phased out as regulatory adjustments as outlined in Subparagraph CA-B.2.1(d).

              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.3

              Conventional bank licensees must use the IFRS definition of intangible assets to determine which assets are classified as intangible and are thus required to be deducted.

              January 2015

          • Deferred Tax Assets

            • CA-2.4.4

              Deferred tax assets (DTAs) that rely on future profitability of the conventional bank licensee to be realised are to be deducted in the calculation of CET1. Deferred tax assets may be netted with associated deferred tax liabilities (DTLs) only if the DTAs and DTLs relate to taxes levied by the same taxation authority and offsetting is permitted by the relevant taxation authority. Where these DTAs relate to temporary differences (e.g. allowance for credit losses) the amount to be deducted is set out in Paragraph CA-2.4.23. All other such assets, e.g. those relating to operating losses, such as the carry forward of unused tax losses, or unused tax credits, are to be deducted in full net of deferred tax liabilities as described above. The DTLs permitted to be netted against DTAs must exclude amounts that have been netted against the deduction of goodwill, intangibles and defined benefit pension assets, and must be allocated on a pro rata basis between DTAs subject to the threshold deduction treatment and DTAs that are to be deducted in full.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.5

              An over instalment of tax or, in some jurisdictions, current year tax losses carried back to prior years may give rise to a claim or receivable from the government or local tax authority. Such amounts are typically classified as current tax assets for accounting purposes. The recovery of such a claim or receivable would not rely on the future profitability of the conventional bank licensee and must be assigned the relevant sovereign risk weighting.

              January 2015

          • Cash Flow Hedge Reserve

            • CA-2.4.6

              The amount of the cash flow hedge reserve that relates to the hedging of items that are not fair valued on the balance sheet (including projected cash flows) must be derecognised in the calculation of CET1. This means that positive amounts must be deducted and negative amounts must be added back.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.7

              This treatment specifically identifies the element of the cash flow hedge reserve that is to be derecognised for prudential purposes. It removes the element that gives rise to artificial volatility in common equity, as in this case the reserve only reflects one half of the picture (the fair value of the derivative, but not the changes in fair value of the hedged future cash flow).

              January 2015

          • Gain on Sale Related to Securitisation Transactions

            • CA-2.4.8

              Any increase in equity capital resulting from a securitisation transaction (see Section CA-6.4) must be deducted from the calculation of CET1.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.9

              [This paragraph has been left blank.]

              January 2015

          • Defined Benefit Pension Fund Assets and Liabilities

            • CA-2.4.10

              Defined benefit pension fund liabilities, as included on the balance sheet, must be fully recognised in the calculation of CET1 (i.e. CET1 cannot be increased through derecognising these liabilities). For each defined benefit pension fund that is an asset on the balance sheet, the asset must be deducted in the calculation of CET1 net of any associated deferred tax liability which would be extinguished if the asset should become impaired or derecognised under the relevant accounting standards. Assets in the fund to which the conventional bank licensee has unrestricted and unfettered access can, with supervisory approval, offset the deduction. Such offsetting assets must be given the risk weight they would receive if they were owned directly by the conventional bank licensee.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.11

              Paragraph CA-2.4.10 only applies to conventional bank licensees which have subsidiaries which are located in jurisdictions where there are defined benefit pension schemes and addresses the concern that assets arising from pension funds may not be capable of being withdrawn and used for the protection of depositors and other creditors of a bank. The concern is that their only value stems from a reduction in future payments into the fund. The treatment allows for banks to reduce the deduction of the asset if they can address these concerns and show that the assets can be easily and promptly withdrawn from the fund.

              January 2015

          • Investments in Own Shares

            • CA-2.4.12

              All of a conventional bank licensee's investments in its own common shares, whether held directly or indirectly must have already been deducted in the calculation of CET1 as required by Subparagraph CA-2.1.3(o). In addition, any own stock which the conventional bank licensee could be contractually obliged to purchase must be deducted in the calculation of CET1. The treatment described applies irrespective of the location of the exposure in the banking book or the trading book. In addition:

              (a) Gross long positions may be deducted net of short positions in the same underlying exposure only if the short positions involve no counterparty risk (i.e. this would normally mean that the long and short positions are with the same counterparty and a valid close-out netting agreement is in place);
              (b) Conventional bank licensees must look through holdings of index securities to deduct exposures to own shares. However, gross long positions in own shares resulting from holdings of index securities may be netted against short positions in own shares resulting from short positions in the same underlying index where they are undertaken with the same counterparty. In such cases the short positions may still involve counterparty risk (which is subject to the relevant counterparty credit risk charge); and
              (c) Any shares of the conventional bank licensee held as collateral against exposures to customers are considered to be held indirectly and are subject to deduction.
              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.13

              The deductions under Subparagraphs CA-2.1.3(o) and Paragraph CA-2.4.12 are necessary to avoid the double counting of a conventional bank licensee's own capital. The treatment seeks to remove the double counting that arises from direct holdings, indirect holdings via index funds and potential future holdings as a result of contractual obligations to purchase own shares.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.14

              Conventional bank licensee must deduct investments in their own AT1 in the calculation of their AT1 capital and must deduct investments in their own T2 in the calculation of their T2 capital.

              January 2015

          • Reciprocal Cross Holdings in the Capital of Banking and Financial Entities

            • CA-2.4.15

              Reciprocal cross holdings of capital that are designed to artificially inflate the capital position of conventional bank licensees will be deducted in full. Conventional bank licensees must apply a "corresponding deduction approach" to such investments in the capital of other banks and financial entities. This means the deduction must be applied to the same component of capital for which the capital would qualify if it was issued by the conventional bank licensee itself. The above adjustments (CA-2.4.2 to CA-2.4.15) must now be aggregated and applied to CET1 to obtain a subtotal (CET1a). This new adjusted CET1a is used for the purpose of calculating the next adjustment.

              January 2015

          • Investments in the capital of banking and financial entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the bank does not own more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the entity

            • CA-2.4.16

              The regulatory adjustment described in Paragraph CA-2.4.17 applies to investments in the capital of banking and financial entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the conventional bank licensee does not own more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the entity. In addition:

              (a) Investments include direct, indirect4 and synthetic holdings of capital instruments. For example, conventional bank licensees must look through holdings of index securities to determine their underlying holdings of capital;5
              (b) Holdings in both the banking book and trading book must be included. Capital includes common stock and all other types of cash and synthetic capital instruments (e.g. subordinated debt). It is the net long position that is to be included (i.e. the gross long position net of short positions in the same underlying exposure where the maturity of the short position either matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year);
              (c) Underwriting positions held for five working days or less can be excluded. Underwriting positions held for longer than five working days must be included; and
              (d) If the capital instrument of the entity in which the conventional bank licensee has invested does not meet the criteria for CET1, AT1, or T2 (see CA-2.1.2(f)) of the concerned bank, the capital is to be considered common shares for the purposes of this regulatory adjustment. However, if the investment is issued out of a regulated financial entity and not included in regulatory capital in the relevant jurisdiction of the financial entity, it is not required to be deducted.

              4 Indirect holdings are exposures or parts of exposures that, if a direct holding loses its value, will result in a loss to the bank substantially equivalent to the loss in value of the direct holding.

              5 If banks find it operationally burdensome to look through and monitor their exact exposure to the capital of other financial institutions as a result of their holdings of index securities, the CBB may permit banks, subject to prior CBB approval, to use a conservative estimate of the amount to be deducted.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.17

              If the total of all holdings listed in Paragraph CA-2.4.16 in aggregate exceed 10% of the conventional bank licensee's CET1a (i.e. after applying all other regulatory adjustments from Paragraph CA-2.4.2 to Paragraph CA-2.4.15) then the amount above 10% is required to be deducted, applying a corresponding deduction approach. This means the deduction must be applied to the same component of capital for which the capital would qualify if it was issued by the conventional bank licensee itself. Accordingly, the amount to be deducted from CET1a must be calculated as the total of all holdings which in aggregate exceed 10% of the conventional bank licensee's CET1a (as per above) multiplied by the common equity holdings as a percentage of the total capital holdings. This would result in a CET1a deduction which corresponds to the proportion of Total Capital holdings held in CET1a. Similarly, the amount to be deducted from AT1 must be calculated as the total of all holdings which in aggregate exceed 10% of the conventional bank licensee's CET1a (as per above) multiplied by the AT1 holdings as a percentage of the Total Capital holdings. The amount to be deducted from T2 must be calculated as the total of all holdings which in aggregate exceed 10% of the conventional bank licensee's CET1a (as per above) multiplied by the T2 holdings as a percentage of the Total Capital holdings.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.18

              See Paragraph CA-2.4.21 for further details on what to do if, under the corresponding deduction approach, a conventional bank licensee is required to make a deduction from a particular tier of capital and it does not have enough of that tier of capital to satisfy that deduction.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.19

              Amounts below the threshold, which are not deducted, will continue to be risk weighted. Thus, instruments in the trading book will be treated as per the market risk rules and instruments in the banking book must be treated as per Chapter CA-3. For the application of risk weighting the amount of the holdings must be allocated on a pro rata basis between those below and those above the threshold. The above adjustments (CA-2.4.16 to CA-2.4.18) must now be aggregated and applied to CET1a to obtain a new subtotal (CET1b). This new adjusted CET1b is used for the purpose of calculating the next adjustment.

              January 2015

          • Significant Investments in the Capital of Banking and Financial Entities that are Outside the Scope of Regulatory Consolidation

            • CA-2.4.20

              The regulatory adjustment described in Paragraph CA-2.4.21 applies to investments in the capital of banking and financial entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation where the conventional bank licensee owns more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the issuing entity or where the entity is an affiliate of the conventional bank licensee. In addition:

              (a) Investments include direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of capital instruments. For example, conventional bank licensee must look through holdings of index securities to determine their underlying holdings of capital;7
              (b) Holdings in both the banking book and trading book are to be included. Capital includes common stock and all other types of cash and synthetic capital instruments (e.g. subordinated debt). It is the net long position that is to be included (i.e. the gross long position net of short positions in the same underlying exposure where the maturity of the short position either matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year);
              (c) Underwriting positions held for five working days or less can be excluded. Underwriting positions held for longer than five working days must be included; and
              (d) If the capital instrument of the entity in which the conventional bank licensee has invested does not meet the criteria for CET1, AT1, or T2 (see CA-2.1.2 (f)) of the concerned bank, the capital is to be considered common shares for the purposes of this regulatory adjustment. However, if the investment is issued out of a regulated financial entity and not included in regulatory capital of the financial entity, it is not required to be deducted.

              6 Investments in entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation refers to investments in entities that have not been consolidated at all or have not been consolidated in such a way as to result in their assets being included in the calculation of consolidated risk-weighted assets of the group.

              7 If banks find it operationally burdensome to look through and monitor their exact exposure to the capital of other financial institutions as a result of their holdings of index securities, the CBB may permit banks, subject to prior CBB approval, to use a conservative estimate.

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.21

              All investments in Paragraph CA-2.4.20 that are not common shares must be fully deducted following a corresponding deduction approach. This means the deduction must be applied to the same tier of capital for which the capital would qualify if it was issued by the conventional bank licensee itself. If the conventional bank licensee is required to make a deduction from a particular tier of capital and it does not have enough of that tier of capital to satisfy that deduction, the shortfall will be deducted from the next higher tier of capital (e.g. if a conventional bank licensee does not have enough AT1 capital to satisfy a particular deduction, the shortfall will be deducted from CET1c as applicable).

              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.22

              Investments in Paragraph CA-2.4.20 that are common shares are subject to the threshold treatment described in paragraph CA-2.4.23. The above adjustments (CA-2.4.20 to CA-2.4.21) must be aggregated and applied to CET1b to obtain a new subtotal (CET1c). This new adjusted CET1c is used for the purpose of calculating the next adjustment.

              January 2015

          • Threshold Deductions

            • CA-2.4.23

              If the total of all common equity holdings listed in Paragraph CA-2.4.20 in aggregate exceeds 10% of the conventional bank licensee's CET1c, then the amount above 10% is required to be deducted from CET1c (see Appendices CA-22 and CA-23 for examples). After this deduction, the conventional bank licensee must deduct the amount by which each of items b) and c) in Paragraph CA-2.4.23A individually exceeds 10% of its CET1c. After these individual deductions, the aggregate of the three items below which exceeds 15% of its CET1c (calculated prior to the deduction of these items but after application of all other regulatory adjustments to CET1 applied in paragraphs CA-2.4.2 to CA-2.4.21) must be deducted from CET1c. The adjustments in this Paragraph are applied to CET1c to obtain a new subtotal (CET1d). This new adjusted CET1d is used for calculating the consolidated CAR and the applicable caps on AT1 and T2 Capital. The items included in the 15% aggregate limit are subject to full disclosure.

              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.23A

              As of 1 January 2020, the calculation of the 15% limit will be subject to the following treatment: the sum of the three items below that remains recognised after the application of all regulatory adjustments must not exceed 15% of CET1d (See Appendix CA-3 for an example):

              (a) Significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated banks and other financial entities as referred to in Paragraph CA-2.4.20;
              (b) Mortgage servicing rights (MSRs); and
              (c) Deferred Tax Assets (DTAs) that arise from temporary differences.
              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.24

              The amount of the three above items that are not deducted in the calculation of CET1d is risk weighted at 250% (see Paragraph CA-3.2.26).

              January 2015

          • Former Deductions from Capital

            • CA-2.4.25

              The following items receive the following risk weights:

              (a) Certain securitisation exposures outlined in Chapter CA-6: 1,250%;
              (b) Non-payment/delivery on non-DvP and non-PvP transactions (see Appendix CA-4): 1,250%;
              (c) The amount of any significant investments in commercial entities, as defined in Paragraph CM-5.11.4, which exceed the materiality thresholds is risk weighted at 800%. The materiality thresholds for these investments are: 15% of Total Capital for individual significant investments; and 60% of Total Capital for the aggregate of such investments; and
              (d) Any exposures above the large exposures limits set by the CBB in Chapter CM-5 of the CBB Rulebook: 800%.
              Amended: October 2016
              Amended: July 2015
              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-2.4.26

              For Subparagraphs CA-2.4.25 (c) and (d), amounts below the materiality thresholds and large exposure limits continue to be risk weighted in accordance with Chapter CA-3. Where the remaining holdings are made up of holdings carrying different risk weights, the application of the risk weighting must be allocated on a pro rata basis for those exposures that are not subject to the 800% risk weight. Appendix CA-21 gives an example of the way to calculate the risk weighted assets and the effect of the limits outlined in Subparagraphs CA-2.4.25 (c) and (d).

              Added: July 2015

      • CA-2A CA-2A Capital Conservation Buffer

        • CA-2A.1 CA-2A.1 Capital Conservation Best Practice

          • CA-2A.1.1

            This section outlines the operation of the capital conservation buffer, which is designed to ensure that banks build up capital buffers outside periods of stress which can be drawn down as losses are incurred. The requirement is based on simple capital conservation rules designed to avoid breaches of minimum capital requirements.

            January 2015

          • CA-2A.1.2

            Outside of periods of stress, conventional bank licensees must hold buffers of capital above the regulatory minimum.

            January 2015

        • CA-2A.2 CA-2A.2 The Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) Requirement

          • CA-2A.2.1

            Conventional bank licensees are required to hold a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) of 2.5%, comprised of CET1 above the regulatory minimum Total Capital ratio of 10%.8 Capital distribution constraints will be imposed on a conventional bank licensee when the CCB falls below 2.5%. The constraints imposed only relate to distributions, not the operation of the conventional bank licensee.


            8 Common Equity Tier 1 must first be used to meet the minimum capital requirements (including the 8% Tier 1 and 10% Total Capital requirements if necessary), before the remainder can contribute to the capital conservation buffer.

            January 2015

          • CA-2A.2.2

            Conventional bank licensees must note that they are required to maintain a minimum consolidated Total Capital Ratio of 12.5% and a solo Total Capital Ratio of 8% regardless of whether they do or do not have AT1 or T2 Capital and therefore conventional bank licensees will be required to retain 100% of the annual net profit unless their consolidated Total Capital Ratio is above 12.5% and their solo Total capital Ratio is above 8%.

            January 2015

          • CA-2A.2.3

            Elements subject to the restriction on distributions: Items considered to be distributions include dividends and share buybacks, discretionary profit distributions on other T1 capital instruments and discretionary bonus payments to staff. Payments that do not result in a depletion of CET1, which may for example include certain scrip dividends, are not considered distributions.

            January 2015

          • Capital Conservation Plan

            • CA-2A.2.4

              Where a conventional bank licensee fails to meet the required level of capital conservation buffer, it must prepare a Capital Conservation Plan (hereinafter referred to as "Plan") clearly outlining the information mentioned in this Paragraph. The conventional bank licensee must submit this Plan to the CBB within one week of becoming aware of the shortfall (see also CA-1.2.2). The conventional bank licensee must already have prepared such a Plan on a contingency basis. The Plan must include the following:

              (a) Estimates of income and expenditure and a forecasted balance sheet;
              (b) Measures to be taken to increase the conventional bank licensee's capital ratios;
              (c) A plan and time frame for the increase of capital with the objective of meeting fully the buffer requirement; and
              (d) Any other information the CBB deems necessary to carry out the assessment required, as indicated in Paragraph CA-2A.2.5.
              January 2015

            • CA-2A.2.5

              The CBB shall review the Plan submitted by the conventional bank licensee and shall approve it provided it considers that the Plan provides a reasonable basis for conserving or raising sufficient capital that will enable the conventional bank licensee to meet the buffer requirements within a period acceptable to the CBB. While reviewing the Plan, the CBB will also evaluate whether the conventional bank licensee has deliberately reduced its CET1 so as to operate in the buffer range (i.e. below the capital conservation buffer requirement) in order to reduce its cost of capital for competitive purposes.

              January 2015

            • CA-2A.2.6

              If the Plan is not approved by the CBB, it may take one or more of the following steps, inter alia, as deemed necessary:

              (a) Ask the conventional bank licensee to revise the Plan and resubmit it within a specified time period;
              (b) Require the conventional bank licensee to raise new capital from private sources to specified levels within specified periods; or
              (c) Impose more stringent restrictions on distributions than those required by Paragraph CA-2A.2.3
              January 2015

        • CA-2A.3 CA-2A.3 Implementation Date

          • CA-2A.3.1

            The capital conservation buffer will be implemented on 1 January 2015. It will be set at 2.5% of RWAs.

            January 2015

          • CA-2A.3.2

            Conventional bank licensees must maintain prudent earnings retention policies with a view to meeting the conservation buffer at all times.

            January 2015

          • CA-2A.3.3

            [This Paragraph was deleted in April 2015.]

            Deleted: April 2015
            January 2015

          • CA-2A.3.4

            The CBB will issue rules and guidance on the countercyclical buffer in due course.

            The CBB reserves the right to use its discretion on the timing and amount of the countercyclical buffer, depending on economic conditions in the region and globally.

            January 2015

    • PART 2: PART 2: Credit Risk

      • CA-3 CA-3 Credit Risk — The Standardized Approach

        • CA-3.1 CA-3.1 Overview

          • CA-3.1.1

            This Chapter sets out the rules relating to the standardized approach to credit risk. The securitisation framework is presented in Chapter CA-6. The standardized approach makes use of external credit assessments9 as a means of calculating the risk weight for exposures to certain categories of counterparty.


            9 The notations follow the methodology used by one institution, Standard & Poor's. The use of Standard & Poor's credit ratings is an example only; those of some other external credit assessment institutions could equally well be used. The ratings used throughout this document, therefore, do not express any preferences or determinations on external assessment institutions by CBB.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.1.2

            The credit equivalent amount (CEA) of Securities Financing Transactions (SFT)10 and OTC derivatives that expose a conventional bank licensee to counterparty credit risk11 is calculated under the rules set out in Appendix CA-2.


            10 Securities Financing Transactions (SFT) are transactions such as repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, security lending and borrowing, and margin lending transactions, where the value of the transactions depends on the market valuations and the transactions are often subject to margin agreements.

            11 The counterparty credit risk is defined as the risk that the counterparty to a transaction could default before the final settlement of the transaction's cash flows. An economic loss would occur if the transactions or portfolio of transactions with the counterparty has a positive economic value at the time of default. Unlike a firm's exposure to credit risk through a loan, where the exposure to credit risk is unilateral and only the lending bank faces the risk of loss, the counterparty credit risk creates a bilateral risk of loss: the market value of the transaction can be positive or negative to either counterparty to the transaction. The market value is uncertain and can vary over time with the movement of underlying market factors.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.1.3

            In determining the risk weights in the standardised approach, conventional bank licensees must use assessments by only those external credit assessment institutions which are recognised as eligible for capital purposes by CBB in accordance with the criteria defined in Section CA-3.4.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.1.4

            Exposures must be measured at the book value as shown in the financial statements of the conventional bank licensee (normally at amortised cost or fair value after applying specific provisions or fair value adjustments as applicable) and risk-weighted taking into account eligible financial collateral as applicable (see Chapter CA-4 concerning credit risk mitigation).

            January 2015

        • CA-3.2 CA-3.2 Segregation of Claims

          • Claims on Sovereigns

            • CA-3.2.1

              Claims on governments of GCC member states (hereinafter referred to as GCC) and their central banks can be risk weighted at 0%. Claims on other sovereigns and their central banks are given a preferential risk weighting of 0% where such claims are denominated and funded in the relevant domestic currency of that sovereign/central bank (e.g. if a Bahraini bank has a claim on government of Australia and the loan is denominated and funded in Australian dollar, it will be risk weighted at 0%). Such preferential risk weight for claims on GCC/other sovereigns and their central banks will be allowed only if the relevant supervisor also allows 0% risk weighting to claims on its sovereign and central bank.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.2

              Claims on sovereigns other than those referred to in the Paragraph CA-3.2.1 must be assigned risk weights as follows:

              Credit Assessment AAA to AA- A+ to A- BBB+ to BBB- BB+ to B- Below B- Unrated
              Risk Weight 0% 20% 50% 100% 150% 100%
              January 2015

          • Claims on International Organisations

            • CA-3.2.3

              Claims on the Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund and the European Central Bank receive a 0% risk weight.

              January 2015

          • Claims on Non-Central Government Public Sectors Entities (PSEs)

            • CA-3.2.4

              Any claims on the Bahraini PSEs listed in Appendix CA-18 are treated as claims on the government of Bahrain and are eligible for 0% risk weighting:

              Amended: April 2016
              Added: January 2015

            • CA-3.2.4A

              In addition to the Bahraini PSEs listed in Appendix CA-18, existing exposures to the following entities which have been removed from the list of PSEs as of 1st March 2016, will be grandfathered and will remain eligible until the final maturity or sale of such exposure:

              (a) Durrat Khaleej Al Bahrain Company;
              (b) Hawar Island Development Company;
              (c) Lulu Tourism Company; and
              (d) Al Awali Real estate Company.
              Added: April 2016

            • CA-3.2.4B

              Any new claims to the entities listed under Paragraph CA-3.2.4A are subject to the normal risk weights as outlined in this Section.

              Added: April 2016

            • CA-3.2.5

              Where other supervisors also treat claims on named PSEs as claims on their sovereigns, claims to those PSEs are treated as claims on the respective sovereigns as outlined in Paragraphs CA-3.2.1 and CA-3.2.2. These PSEs must be shown on a list maintained by the concerned central bank or financial regulator. Where PSEs are not on such a list, they must be subject to the treatment outlined in Paragraph CA-3.2.6.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.6

              Claims on all other (foreign) PSEs (i.e. not having sovereign treatment) denominated and funded in the home currency of the sovereign must be risk weighted as allowed by their home country supervisors, provided the sovereign carries rating BBB- or above. Claims on PSEs with no explicit home country weighting or to PSEs in countries of BB+ sovereign rating and below are subject to ECAI ratings as per the following table:

              Credit Assessment AAA to AA- A+ to A- BBB+ to BBB- BB+ to B- Below B- Unrated
              Risk Weight 20% 50% 100% 100% 150% 100%
              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.7

              Claims on commercial companies owned by governments must be risk weighted as normal commercial entities unless they are in the domestic currency and covered by a government guarantee in the domestic currency that satisfies the conditions in CA-4.2 and CA-4.5 in which case they may take the risk weight of the concerned government.

              January 2015

          • Claims on Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs)

            • CA-3.2.8

              MDBs currently eligible for a 0% risk weight are: the World Bank Group comprised of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) and the International Finance Corporation (IFC), the Asian Development Bank (ADB), the African Development Bank (AfDB), the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD), the Inter-American Development Bank (IADB), the European Investment Bank (EIB), the European Investment Fund (EIF), the Nordic Investment Bank (NIB), the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB), the Islamic Development Bank (IDB), Arab Monetary Fund (AMF), the Council of Europe Development Bank (CEDB), the Arab Bank for Economic Development in Africa (ABEDA), Council of European Resettlement Fund (CERF) and the Kuwait Fund for Arab Economic Development (KFAED).

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.9

              The claims on MDB's, which do not qualify for the 0% risk weighting, are assigned risk weights as follows:

              Banks Credit Quality Grades AAA to AA- A+ to A- BBB+ to BBB- BB+ to B- Below B- Unrated
              Risk weights 20% 50% 50% 100% 150% 50%
              January 2015

          • Claims on Banks

            • CA-3.2.10

              Claims on banks must be risk weighted as given in the following table. No claim on an unrated bank may receive a risk weight lower than that applied to claims on its sovereign of incorporation (see Guidance in Paragraph CA-3.2.11A for self-liquidating letters of credit).

              Banks Credit Quality Grades AAA to AA- A+ to A- BBB+ to BBB- BB+ to B- Below B- Unrated
              Standard risk weights 20% 50% 50% 100% 150% 50%
              Preferential risk weight 20% 20% 20% 50% 150% 20%
              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.11

              Short-term claims on locally incorporated banks may be assigned a risk weighting of 20% where such claims on the banks are of an original maturity of 3 months or less denominated and funded in either BD or US$. A preferential risk weight that is one category more favourable than the standard risk weighting may be assigned to claims on foreign banks licensed in Bahrain of an original maturity of 3 months or less denominated and funded in the relevant domestic currency (other than claims on banks that are rated below B-). Such preferential risk weight for short-term claims on banks licensed in other jurisdictions will be allowed only if the relevant supervisor also allows this preferential risk weighting to short-term claims on its banks.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.11A

              Self-liquidating letters of credit issued or confirmed by an unrated bank are allowed a risk weighting of 20% without reference to the risk weight of the sovereign of incorporation. All other claims will be subject to the 'sovereign floor' of the country of incorporation of the concerned issuing or confirming bank.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.12

              Claims with a contractual original maturity under 3 months that are expected to be rolled over (i.e. where the effective maturity is longer than 3 months) do not qualify for a preferential treatment for capital adequacy purposes.

              January 2015

          • Claims on Investment Firms

            • CA-3.2.13

              Claims on category one and category two investment firms which are licensed by the CBB are treated as claims on banks for risk weighting purposes but without the use of preferential risk weight for short-term claims. Claims on category three investment firms licensed by the CBB must be treated as claims on corporates for risk weighting purposes. Claims on investment firms in other jurisdictions will be treated as claims on corporates for risk weighting purposes. However, if the bank can demonstrate that the concerned investment firm is subject to an equivalent capital adequacy regime to this Module and is treated as a bank for risk weighting purposes by its home regulator, then claims on such investment firms may be treated as claims on banks.

              January 2015

          • Claims on Corporates, including Insurance Companies

            • CA-3.2.14

              Risk weighting for corporates including insurance companies is as follows:

              Credit assessment AAA to AA- A+ to A- BBB+ to BB- Below BB- Unrated
              Risk weight 20% 50% 100% 150% 100%
              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.15

              Risk weighting for unrated (corporate) claims will not be given a preferential RW to the concerned sovereign. Credit facilities to small/medium enterprises (SMEs) may be placed in the regulatory retail portfolio in limited cases below.

              January 2015

          • Claims included in the Regulatory Retail Portfolios

            • CA-3.2.16

              No claim on any unrated corporate, where said corporate originates from a foreign jurisdiction, may be given a risk weight lower than that assigned to a corporate within its own jurisdiction, and in no case will it be below 100%.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.17

              Claims included in the regulatory retail portfolio must be risk weighted at 75%, except as provided in CA-3.2.23 for past due loans.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.18

              To be included in the regulatory retail portfolio, claims must meet the following criteria:

              (a) Orientation — the exposure is to an individual person or persons or to a small business. A small business is a Bahrain-based business with annual turnover below BD 2mn;
              (b) Product — The exposure takes the form of any of the following: revolving credits and lines of credit (including credit cards and overdrafts), personal term loans and leases (e.g. auto leases, student loans) and small business facilities. Securities (such as bonds and equities), whether listed or not, are specifically excluded from this category. Mortgage loans will be excluded if they qualify for treatment as claims secured by residential property (see below). Loans for purchase of shares are also excluded from the regulatory retail portfolios;
              (c) Granularity — The regulatory retail portfolio is sufficiently diversified to a degree that reduces the risks in the portfolio, warranting a 75% risk weight. No aggregate exposure to one counterpart12 can exceed 0.2% of the regulatory retail portfolio; and
              (d) The maximum aggregated retail exposure to one counterpart must not exceed an absolute limit of BD 250,000.

              12 Aggregated exposure means gross amount (i.e. not taking any credit risk mitigation into account) of all forms of debt exposures (e.g. loans or commitments) that individually satisfy the three other criteria. In addition, "to one counterpart" means one or several entities that may be considered as a single beneficiary (e.g. in the case of a small business that is affiliated to another small business, the limit would apply to the bank's aggregated exposure on both businesses).

              January 2015

          • Claims Secured by Residential Property

            • CA-3.2.19

              Lending fully secured by first mortgages on residential property that is or will be occupied by the borrower, or that is leased, must carry a risk weighting of 75%.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.19A

              The RW for residential property may be reduced to 35% subject to meeting all of the criteria below:

              (a) The residential property is to be utilised for residential purposes only;
              (b) The residential property must be pledged as collateral to the conventional bank licensee;
              (c) There exists a legal infrastructure in the jurisdiction whereby the conventional bank licensee can enforce the repossession and liquidation of the residential property; and
              (d) The conventional bank licensee must obtain a satisfactory legal opinion that foreclosure or repossession as mentioned in (c) above is possible without any impediment.
              Amended: April 2015
              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.19B

              The RW for residential mortgage exposure granted under the Social Housing Schemes of the Kingdom of Bahrain may be reduced to 25% subject to meeting conditions, (a) and (b) in CA-3.2.19A. The reduced risk weight is subject to ensuring the compliance with the requirements for timely recognition of expected credit loss (ECL) as per the Credit Risk Management Module (Module CM).

              Amended: October 2022
              July 2019

          • Claims Secured by Commercial Real Estate

            • CA-3.2.20

              Claims secured by mortgages on commercial real estate are subject to a minimum of 100% risk weight. If the borrower is rated below BB-, the risk-weight corresponding to the rating of the borrower must be applied.

              January 2015

          • Past Due Loans

            • CA-3.2.21

              The unsecured portion of any loan (other than a qualifying residential mortgage loan) that is past due for 90 days or more, net of specific provisions (including partial write-offs), must be risk-weighted as follows:

              (a) 150% risk weight when specific provisions are less than 20% of the outstanding amount of the loan; and
              (b) 100% risk weight when specific provisions are greater than 20% of the outstanding amount of the loan.
              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.22

              For the purposes of defining the secured portion of a past due loan, eligible collateral and guarantees is the same as for credit risk mitigation purposes.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.23

              Past due retail loans must be excluded from the overall regulatory retail portfolio when assessing the granularity criterion, for risk-weighting purposes.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.2.24

              In the case of residential mortgage loans that qualify for lower risk weight in CA-3.2.19A, when such loans are past due for more than 90 days, they must be risk weighted at a minimum of 100% net of specific provisions.

              January 2015

          • Securitisation Tranches

            • CA-3.2.25

              Holdings of securitisation tranches are weighted according to the weightings in CA-6.4.8 from 20% to 1,250%. Please refer to Chapter CA-6 for full details.

              January 2015

          • Investments in Equities, MSRs and DTAs

            • CA-3.2.26

              Investments in listed equities must be risk weighted at 100% while equities other than listed must be risk weighted at 150% unless subject to the following treatments. The amount of any significant investments in commercial entities above the 15% and 60% Total Capital materiality thresholds (see CA-2.4.25) must be weighted at 800%. Significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial entities and Mortgage Servicing Rights and Deferred Tax Assets arising from temporary differences must be risk weighted at 250% if they have not already been deducted from CET1 as required by Paragraphs CA-2.4.15 to CA-2.4.24.

              January 2015

          • Investments in Funds

            • CA-3.2.27

              Investments in funds (e.g. mutual funds, Collective Investment Undertakings etc.) must be risk weighted as follows:

              (a) If the instrument (e.g. units) is rated, it should be risk-weighted according to its external rating (for risk-weighting, it must be treated as a "claim on corporate");
              (b) If not rated, such investment should be treated as an equity investment and risk weighted accordingly (i.e. 100% for listed and 150% for unlisted);
              (c) The conventional bank licensee can apply to CBB for using the look-through approach for such investments if it can demonstrate that the look-through approach is more appropriate to the circumstances of the conventional bank licensee;
              (d) If there are no voting rights attached to investment in funds, the investment will not be subjected to consolidation, deduction or additional risk weighting requirements (in respect of large exposures or significant investments); and
              (e) For the purpose of determining the "large exposure limit" for investment in funds, the look-through approach must be used (even if the look-through approach is not used to risk weight the investment).
              January 2015

          • Large Exposures over the Limits in Module CM

            • CA-3.2.28

              The amount of any large exposures exceeding the limits set in Chapter CM-5 must be weighted at 800%.

              January 2015

          • Holdings of Real Estate

            • CA-3.2.29

              All holdings of real estate by conventional bank licensees (i.e. owned directly or by way of investments in Real Estate Companies, subsidiaries or associate companies or other arrangements such as trusts, funds or REITs) must be risk-weighted at 200%. Premises occupied by the conventional bank licensee may be weighted at 100%. Investments in Real Estate Companies are subject to the materiality thresholds for commercial companies described in Section CA-2.4 and Chapter CM-5 and therefore any holdings which amount to 15% or more of Total Capital will be subject to 800% risk weight. The holdings below the 15% threshold will be weighted at 200%.

              January 2015

          • Other Assets

            • CA-3.2.30

              Gold bullion held in own vaults or on an allocated basis to the extent backed by bullion liabilities may be treated as cash and therefore risk-weighted at 0%. In addition, cash items in the process of collection must be risk-weighted at 20%. The standard risk weight for all other assets will be 100%. Investments in regulatory capital instruments issued by banks or financial entities must be risk weighted at a minimum of 100%, unless they are deducted from regulatory capital according to the corresponding deduction approach outlined in Section CA-2.4 of this Module.

              January 2015

          • Underwriting of Non-trading Book Items

            • CA-3.2.31

              Underwritings of capital instruments issued by other banking, financial or insurance entities are covered in Subparagraphs CA-2.4.16(c) and CA-2.4.20(c). The large exposures limits of Chapter CM-5 apply for underwritings. This means the 800% risk weights will apply for underwriting exposures in excess of the limits set in Chapter CM-5. The risk weights below apply for exposures within the limits of Module CM-5. Where a conventional bank licensee has acquired assets on its balance sheet in the banking book which it is intending to place with third parties under a formal arrangement, the following risk weightings apply for no more than 90 days. Once the 90-day period has expired, the usual risk weights apply:

              (a) For holdings of private equity (non-bank), a risk weighting of 100% applies instead of the usual 150% (see CA-3.2.26); and
              (b) For holdings of Real Estate, a risk weight of 100% applies instead of the usual 200% risk weight (see CA-3.2.29).
              January 2015

        • CA-3.3 CA-3.3 Off-balance Sheet Items

          • CA-3.3.1

            Off-balance-sheet items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents applying credit conversion factors (CCFs). Counterparty risk weightings for OTC derivative transactions will not be subject to any specific ceiling.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.2

            Commitments with an original maturity of up to one year and commitments with an original maturity of over one year will receive a CCF of 20% and 50%, respectively.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.3

            Any commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the conventional bank licensee without prior notice, or that are subject to automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrowers' creditworthiness, will receive a 0% CCF.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.4

            Direct credit substitutes, e.g. general guarantees of indebtedness (including standby letters of credit serving as financial guarantees for loans and securities) and acceptances (including endorsements with the character of acceptances) must receive a CCF of 100%.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.5

            Sale and repurchase agreements and asset sales with recourse, where the credit risk remains with the conventional bank licensee, must receive a CCF of 100%.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.6

            A CCF of 100% must be applied to the lending of other banks' securities or the posting of securities as collateral by banks, including instances where these arise out of repo-style transactions (i.e. repurchase/reverse repurchase and securities lending/securities borrowing transactions). See Section CA-4.3 for the calculation of risk-weighted assets where the credit converted exposure is secured by eligible collateral.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.7

            Forward asset purchases, forward deposits and partly-paid shares and securities, which represent commitments with certain drawdown must receive a CCF of 100%.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.8

            Certain transaction-related contingent items (e.g. performance bonds, bid bonds, warranties and standby letters of credit related to particular transactions) must receive CCF of 50%.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.9

            Note issuance facilities and revolving underwriting facilities must receive a CCF of 50%.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.10

            For short-term self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods, a 20% CCF must be applied to both issuing and confirming banks.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.11

            Where there is an undertaking to provide a commitment on an off-balance sheet item, conventional bank licensees are to apply the lower of the two applicable CCFs.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.12

            The credit equivalent amount of OTC derivatives and SFTs that expose a conventional bank licensee to counterparty credit risk must be calculated as per Appendix CA-2.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.13

            Conventional bank licensees must closely monitor securities, commodities, and foreign exchange transactions that have failed, starting the first day they fail. A capital charge to failed transactions must be calculated in accordance with CBB guidelines set forth in Appendix CA-4 (Capital treatment for failed trades and non-DvP transactions).

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.14

            With regard to unsettled securities, commodities, and foreign exchange transactions, conventional bank licensees are encouraged to develop, implement and improve systems for tracking and monitoring the credit risk exposure arising from unsettled transactions as appropriate for producing management information that facilitates action on a timely basis.

            January 2015

          • CA-3.3.15

            Furthermore, when such transactions are not processed through a delivery-versus-payment (DvP) or payment-versus-payment (PvP) mechanism, conventional bank licensees must calculate a capital charge of up to 1,250% as set forth in Appendix CA-4.

            January 2015

        • CA-3.4 CA-3.4 External Credit Assessments

          • The Recognition Process and Eligibility Criteria

            • CA-3.4.1

              CBB will assess all External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI) according to the six criteria below. The CBB also refers to the IOSCO Code of Conduct Fundamentals for Credit Rating Agencies when determining ECAI eligibility. Any failings, in whole or in part, to satisfy these to the fullest extent will result in the respective ECAI's methodology and associated resultant rating not being accepted by the CBB:

              (a) Objectivity: The methodology for assigning credit assessments must be rigorous, systematic, and subject to some form of validation based on historical experience. Moreover, assessments must be subject to ongoing review and responsive to changes in financial condition. Before being recognized by the CBB, an assessment methodology for each market segment, including rigorous back testing, must have been established for an absolute minimum of one year and with a preference of three years;
              (b) Independence: An ECAI must show independence and should not be subject to political or economic pressures that may influence the rating. The assessment process should be as free as possible from any constraints that could arise in situations where the composition of the board of directors, political pressure, the shareholder structure of the assessment institution or any other aspect could be seen as creating a conflict of interest;
              (c) International access/Transparency: The individual assessments, the key elements underlining the assessments and whether the issuer participated in the assessment process should be publicly available on a non-selective basis, unless they are private assessments. In addition, the general procedures, methodologies and assumptions for arriving at assessments used by the ECAI should be publicly available;
              (d) Disclosure: An ECAI should disclose the following information: its code of conduct; the general nature of its compensation arrangements with assessed entities; its assessment methodologies, including the definition of default, the time horizon, and the meaning of each rating; the actual default rates experienced in each assessment category; and the transitions of the assessments, e.g. the likelihood of AA ratings becoming A over time;
              (e) Resources: An ECAI must have sufficient resources to carry out high quality credit assessments. These resources should allow for substantial ongoing contact with senior and operational levels within the entities assessed in order to add value to the credit assessments. Such assessments will be based on methodologies combining qualitative and quantitative approaches; and
              (f) Credibility: Credibility, to a certain extent, can derive from the criteria above. In addition, the reliance on an ECAI's external credit assessments by independent parties (investors, insurers, trading partners) may be evidence of the credibility of the assessments of an ECAI. The credibility of an ECAI will also be based on the existence of internal procedures to prevent the misuse of confidential information. In order to be eligible for recognition, an ECAI does not have to assess firms in more than one country.
              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.2

              The CBB recognises Standard and Poor's, Moody's, Fitch IBCA and Capital Intelligence as eligible ECAIs. With respect to the possible recognition of other rating agencies as eligible ECAIs, CBB will update this paragraph subject to the rating agencies satisfying the eligibility requirements. (See Appendix CA-16 for mapping of eligible ECAIs).

              Amended: April 2016
              Added: January 2015

            • CA-3.4.3

              Conventional bank licensees must use the chosen ECAIs and their ratings consistently for each type of claim, for both risk weighting and risk management purposes. Conventional bank licensees will not be allowed to "cherry-pick" the assessments provided by different eligible ECAIs and to arbitrarily change the use of ECAIs.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.4

              Conventional bank licensees must disclose in their annual reports the names of the ECAIs that they use for the risk weighting of their assets by type of claims, the risk weights associated with the particular rating grades as determined by CBB through the mapping process as well as the aggregated risk-weighted assets for each risk weight based on the assessments of each eligible ECAI.

              January 2015

          • Multiple Assessments

            • CA-3.4.5

              If there are two assessments by eligible ECAIs chosen by a conventional bank licensee which map into different risk weights, the higher risk weight must be applied.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.6

              If there are three or more assessments by eligible ECAIs chosen by a conventional bank licensee which map into different risk weights, the assessments corresponding to the two lowest risk weights must be referred to and the higher of those two risk weights must be applied.

              January 2015

          • Issuer Versus Issues Assessment

            • CA-3.4.7

              Where a conventional bank licensee invests in a particular issue that has an issue-specific assessment, the risk weight of the claim will be based on this assessment. Where the conventional bank licensee's claim is not an investment in a specific assessed issue, the following general principles apply:

              (a) In circumstances where the borrower has a specific assessment for an issued debt — but the conventional bank licensee's claim is not an investment in this particular debt — a high quality credit assessment (one which maps into a risk weight lower than that which applies to an unrated claim) on that specific debt may only be applied to the conventional bank licensee's un-assessed claim if this claim ranks pari passu or senior to the claim with an assessment in all respects. If not, the credit assessment cannot be used and the un-assessed claim will receive the risk weight for unrated claims; and
              (b) In circumstances where the borrower has an issuer assessment, this assessment typically applies to senior unsecured claims on that issuer. Consequently, only senior claims on that issuer will benefit from a high quality issuer assessment. Other un-assessed claims of a highly assessed issuer will be treated as unrated. If either the issuer or a single issue has a low quality assessment (mapping into a risk weight equal to or higher than that which applies to unrated claims), an un-assessed claim on the same counterparty will be assigned the same risk weight as is applicable to the low quality assessment.
              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.8

              Whether the conventional bank licensee intends to rely on an issuer- or an issue-specific assessment, the assessment must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk exposure the conventional bank licensee has with regard to all payments owed to it.13


              13 For example, if a bank is owed both principal and interest, the assessment must fully take into account and reflect the credit risk associated with repayment of both principal and interest.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.9

              In order to avoid any double counting of credit enhancement factors, no recognition of credit risk mitigation techniques will be taken into account if the credit enhancement is already reflected in the issue specific rating (see Paragraph CA-4.1.5).

              January 2015

          • Domestic Currency and Foreign Currency Assessments

            • CA-3.4.10

              Where unrated exposures are risk weighted based on the rating of an equivalent exposure to that borrower, the general rule is that foreign currency ratings must be used for exposures in foreign currency. Domestic currency ratings, if separate, must only be used to risk weight claims denominated in the domestic currency.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.11

              However, when an exposure arises through a conventional bank licensee's participation in a loan that has been extended, or has been guaranteed against convertibility and transfer risk, by certain MDBs, its convertibility and transfer risk can be considered by CBB, on a case by case basis, to be effectively mitigated. To qualify, MDBs must have preferred creditor status recognised in the market and be included in MDB's qualifying for 0% risk rate under CA-3.2.8. In such cases, for risk weighting purposes, the borrower's domestic currency rating may be used instead of its foreign currency rating. In the case of a guarantee against convertibility and transfer risk, the local currency rating can be used only for the portion that has been guaranteed. The portion of the loan not benefiting from such a guarantee will be risk-weighted based on the foreign currency rating.

              January 2015

          • Short-Term/Long-Term Assessments

            • CA-3.4.12

              For risk-weighting purposes, short-term assessments are deemed to be issue-specific. They can only be used to derive risk weights for claims arising from the rated facility. They cannot be generalised to other short-term claims, except under the conditions of paragraph CA-3.4.14. In no event can a short-term rating be used to support a risk weight for an unrated long-term claim. Short-term assessments may only be used for short-term claims against banks and corporates. The table below provides a framework for conventional bank licensees' exposures to specific short-term facilities, such as a particular issuance of commercial paper:

              Credit assessment A-1/P-114 A-2/P-2 A-3/P-3 Others15
              Risk weight 20% 50% 100% 150%

              14 The notations follow the methodology used by Standard & Poor's and by Moody's Investors Service. The A-1 rating of Standard & Poor's includes both A-1+ and A-1-.

              15 This category includes all non-prime and B or C ratings.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.13

              If a short-term rated facility attracts a 50% risk-weight, unrated short-term claims cannot attract a risk weight lower than 100%. If an issuer has a short-term facility with an assessment that warrants a risk weight of 150%, all unrated claims, whether long-term or short-term, must also receive a 150% risk weight, unless the conventional bank licensee uses recognised credit risk mitigation techniques for such claims.

              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.14

              For short-term claims on conventional bank licensees, the interaction with specific short-term assessments is expected to be the following:

              (a) The general preferential treatment for short-term claims, as defined under paragraphs CA-3.2.11 and CA-3.2.12, applies to all claims on conventional bank licensees of up to three months original maturity when there is no specific short-term claim assessment;
              (b) When there is a short-term assessment and such an assessment maps into a risk weight that is more favourable (i.e. lower) or identical to that derived from the general preferential treatment, the short-term assessment should be used for the specific claim only. Other short-term claims would benefit from the general preferential treatment; and
              (c) When a specific short-term assessment for a short term claim on a conventional bank licensee maps into a less favourable (higher) risk weight, the general short-term preferential treatment for inter-bank claims cannot be used. All unrated short-term claims should receive the same risk weighting as that implied by the specific short-term assessment.
              January 2015

            • CA-3.4.15

              When a short-term assessment is to be used, the institution making the assessment needs to meet all of the eligibility criteria for recognising ECAIs as presented in Paragraph CA-3.4.1 in terms of its short-term assessment.

              January 2015

          • Level of Application of the Assessment

            • CA-3.4.16

              External assessments for one entity within a corporate group must not be used to risk weight other entities within the same group.

              January 2015

          • Unsolicited Ratings

            • CA-3.4.17

              Unsolicited ratings should be treated as unrated exposures.

              January 2015

      • CA-4 CA-4 Credit Risk — The Standardized Approach — Credit Risk Mitigation

        • CA-4.1 CA-4.1 Overarching Issues

          • Introduction

            • CA-4.1.1

              Banks use a number of techniques to mitigate the credit risks to which they are exposed. For example, exposures may be collateralised by first priority claims, in whole or in part with cash or securities, a loan exposure may be guaranteed by a third party, or a bank may buy a credit derivative to offset various forms of credit risk. Additionally banks may agree to net loans owed to them against deposits from the same counterparty. Off-balance sheet items will first be converted into on-balance sheet equivalents prior to the CRM being applied.

              January 2015

          • General Remarks

            • CA-4.1.2

              The framework set out in this sub-section of "General remarks" is applicable to all banking book exposures.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.3

              The comprehensive approach for the treatment of collateral (see Paragraphs CA-4.2.12 to CA-4.2.20 and CA-4.3.1 to CA-4.3.32) will also be applied to calculate the counterparty risk charges for OTC derivatives and repo-style transactions booked in the trading book.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.4

              No transaction in which CRM techniques are used should receive a higher capital requirement than an otherwise identical transaction where such techniques are not used.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.5

              The effects of CRM will not be double counted. Therefore, no additional recognition of CRM for regulatory capital purposes will be applicable on claims for which an issue-specific rating is used that already reflects that CRM. As stated in Paragraph CA-3.4.8, principal-only ratings will also not be allowed within the framework of CRM.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.6

              Conventional bank licensees must employ robust procedures and processes to control residual risks (see Paragraph CA-4.1.6A), including strategy; consideration of the underlying credit; valuation; policies and procedures; systems; control of roll-off risks; and management of concentration risk arising from the conventional bank licensee's use of CRM techniques and its interaction with the conventional bank licensee's overall credit risk profile.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.6A

              While the use of CRM techniques reduces or transfers credit risk, it simultaneously may increase other risks (residual risks). Residual risks include legal, operational, liquidity and market risks.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.6B

              Where residual risks are not adequately controlled, the CBB may impose additional capital charges or take supervisory actions.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.6C

              Conventional bank licensees must ensure that sufficient resources are devoted to the orderly operation of margin agreements with OTC derivative and securities-financing counterparties, as measured by the timeliness and accuracy of its outgoing calls and response time to incoming calls. Conventional bank licensees must have collateral management policies in place to control, monitor and report:

              (a) The risk to which margin agreements exposes them (such as the volatility and liquidity of the securities exchanged as collateral);
              (b) The concentration risk to particular types of collateral;
              (c) The reuse of collateral (both cash and non-cash) including the potential liquidity shortfalls resulting from the reuse of collateral received from counterparties; and
              (d) The surrender of rights on collateral posted to counterparties.
              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.7

              Public Disclosure Requirements (see Module PD) relating to the use of collateral must also be observed for conventional bank licensees to obtain capital relief in respect of any CRM techniques.

              January 2015

          • Legal Certainty

            • CA-4.1.8

              In order for conventional bank licensees to obtain capital relief for any use of CRM techniques, the minimum standards for legal documentation outlined in Paragraph CA-4.1.9 must be met.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.1.9

              All documentation used in collateralised transactions and for documenting on-balance sheet netting, guarantees and credit derivatives must be binding on all parties and legally enforceable in all relevant jurisdictions. Conventional bank licensees must have conducted sufficient legal review to verify this and have a well founded legal basis to reach this conclusion, and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure continuing enforceability.

              January 2015

        • CA-4.2 CA-4.2 Overview of Credit Risk Mitigation Techniques16


          16 See Appendix CA-5 for an overview of methodologies for the capital treatment of transactions secured by financial collateral under the standardised approach.

          • Collateralised Transactions

            • CA-4.2.1

              A collateralised transaction is one in which:

              (a) Conventional bank licensees have a credit exposure or potential credit exposure; and
              (b) That credit exposure or potential credit exposure is hedged in whole or in part by collateral posted by a counterparty17 or by a third party on behalf of the counterparty.

              17 In this section "counterparty" is used to denote a party to whom a bank has an on- or off-balance sheet credit exposure or a potential credit exposure. That exposure may, for example, take the form of a loan of cash or securities (where the counterparty would traditionally be called the borrower), of securities posted as collateral, of a commitment or of exposure under an OTC derivatives contract.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.2

              Where conventional bank licensees take eligible financial collateral (e.g. cash or securities, more specifically defined in Paragraphs CA-4.3.1 and CA-4.3.2, they are allowed to reduce their credit exposure to a counterparty when calculating their capital requirements to take account of the risk mitigating effect of the collateral.

              January 2015

          • Overall Framework and Minimum Conditions

            • CA-4.2.3

              Conventional bank licensees may opt for either the simple approach, which substitutes the risk weighting of the collateral for the risk weighting of the counterparty for the collateralised portion of the exposure (generally subject to a 20% floor), or for the comprehensive approach, which allows fuller offset of collateral against exposures, by effectively reducing the exposure amount by the value ascribed to the collateral. Conventional bank licensees may operate under either, but not both, approaches in the banking book, but only under the comprehensive approach in the trading book. Partial collateralisation is recognised in both approaches. Mismatches in the maturity of the underlying exposure and the collateral will only be allowed under the comprehensive approach.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.4

              However, before capital relief will be granted in respect of any form of collateral, the standards set out below in Paragraphs CA-4.2.5 to CA-4.2.8 must be met under either approach.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.5

              In addition to the general requirements for legal certainty set out in Paragraphs CA-4.1.8 and CA-4.1.9, the legal mechanism by which collateral is pledged or transferred must ensure that the conventional bank licensee has the right to liquidate or take legal possession of it, in a timely manner, in the event of the default, insolvency or bankruptcy (or one or more otherwise-defined credit events set out in the transaction documentation) of the counterparty (and, where applicable, of the custodian holding the collateral). Furthermore conventional bank licensees must take all steps necessary to fulfil those requirements under the law applicable to the conventional bank licensee's interest in the collateral for obtaining and maintaining an enforceable security interest, e.g. by registering it with a registrar, or for exercising a right to net or set off in relation to title transfer collateral.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.6

              In order for collateral to provide protection, the credit quality of the counterparty and the value of the collateral must not have a material positive correlation. For example, securities issued by the counterparty — or by any related group entity — would provide little protection and so would be ineligible.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.7

              Conventional bank licensees must have clear and robust procedures for the timely liquidation of collateral to ensure that any legal conditions required for declaring the default of the counterparty and liquidating the collateral are observed, and that collateral can be liquidated promptly.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.8

              Where the collateral is held by a custodian, conventional bank licensees must take reasonable steps to ensure that the custodian segregates the collateral from its own assets.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.9

              A capital requirement will be applied to a conventional bank licensee on either side of the collateralised transaction: for example, both repos and reverse repos will be subject to capital requirements. Likewise, both sides of a securities lending and borrowing transaction will be subject to explicit capital charges, as will the posting of securities in connection with a derivative exposure or other borrowing.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.10

              Where a conventional bank licensee, acting as agent, arranges a repo-style transaction (i.e. repurchase/reverse repurchase and securities lending/borrowing transactions) between a customer and a third party and provides a guarantee to the customer that the third party will perform on its obligations, then the risk to the conventional bank licensee is the same as if the conventional bank licensee had entered into the transaction as a principal. In such circumstances, a conventional bank licensee will be required to calculate capital requirements as if it were itself the principal.

              January 2015

          • The Simple Approach

            • CA-4.2.11

              In the simple approach the risk weighting of the collateral instrument collateralising or partially collateralising the exposure is substituted for the risk weighting of the counterparty. Details of this framework are provided in Paragraphs CA-4.3.26 to CA-4.3.29.

              January 2015

          • The Comprehensive Approach

            • CA-4.2.12

              In the comprehensive approach, when taking collateral, conventional bank licensees must calculate their adjusted exposure to a counterparty for capital adequacy purposes in order to take account of the effects of that collateral. Using haircuts and add-ons, conventional bank licensees are required to adjust both the amount of the exposure to the counterparty and the value of any collateral received in support of that counterparty to take account of possible future fluctuations in the value of either18, occasioned by market movements. This will produce volatility adjusted amounts for both exposure and collateral. Unless either side of the transaction is cash, the volatility adjusted amount for the exposure will be higher than the exposure due to the add-on and for the collateral it will be lower due to the haircut.


              18 Exposure amounts may vary where, for example, securities are being lent.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.13

              Additionally where the exposure and collateral are held in different currencies an additional downwards adjustment must be made to the volatility adjusted collateral amount to take account of possible future fluctuations in exchange rates.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.14

              Where the volatility-adjusted exposure amount is greater than the volatility-adjusted collateral amount (including any further adjustment for foreign exchange risk), conventional bank licensees must calculate their risk-weighted assets as the difference between the two multiplied by the risk weight of the counterparty. The framework for performing these calculations is set out in Paragraphs CA-4.3.3 to CA-4.3.6.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.15

              Conventional bank licensees must use standard haircuts given in Paragraph CA-4.3.7 unless allowed to use models under Paragraph CA-4.3.22.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.16

              The size of the individual haircuts and add-ons will depend on the type of instrument, type of transaction and the frequency of marking-to-market and remargining. For example, repo-style transactions subject to daily marking-to-market and to daily re-margining will receive a haircut based on a 5-business day holding period and secured lending transactions with daily mark-to-market and no re-margining clauses will receive a haircut based on a 20-business day holding period. These haircut numbers will be scaled up using the square root of time formula depending on the frequency of re-margining or marking-to-market.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.17

              For certain types of repo-style transactions (broadly speaking government bond repos as defined in Paragraphs CA-4.3.14 and CA-4.3.15), the CBB may allow conventional bank licensees using standard haircuts not to apply these haircuts in calculating the exposure amount after risk mitigation.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.18

              The effect of master netting agreements covering repo-style transactions can be recognised for the calculation of capital requirements subject to the conditions in Paragraph CA-4.3.17.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.19

              As an alternative to standard haircuts conventional bank licensees may, subject to approval from CBB, use VaR models for calculating potential price volatility for repo-style transactions and other similar SFTs, as set out in Paragraphs CA-4.3.22 to CA-4.3.25. Alternatively, subject to approval from the CBB's, they may also calculate, for these transactions, an expected positive exposure, as set forth in Appendix CA-2.

              January 2015

          • On-Balance Sheet Netting

            • CA-4.2.20

              Where conventional bank licensees have legally enforceable netting arrangements for loans and deposits they may calculate capital requirements on the basis of net credit exposures subject to the conditions in Paragraph CA-4.4.1.

              January 2015

          • Guarantees and Credit Derivatives

            • CA-4.2.21

              Where guarantees or credit derivatives are direct, explicit, irrevocable and unconditional, and the CBB is satisfied that conventional bank licensees fulfil certain minimum operational conditions relating to risk management processes the CBB may allow conventional bank licensees to take account of such credit protection in calculating capital requirements.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.22

              A range of guarantors and protection providers are recognised, as shown in Paragraph CA-4.5.7. A substitution approach will be applied. Thus only guarantees issued by or protection provided by entities with a lower risk weight than the counterparty will lead to reduced capital charges since the protected portion of the counterparty exposure is assigned the risk weight of the guarantor or protection provider, whereas the uncovered portion retains the risk weight of the underlying counterparty.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.2.23

              Detailed operational requirements are given in Paragraphs CA-4.5.1 to CA-4.5.5.

              January 2015

          • Maturity Mismatch

            • CA-4.2.24

              Where the residual maturity of the CRM is less than that of the underlying credit exposure a maturity mismatch occurs. Where there is a maturity mismatch and the CRM has an original maturity of less than one year, the CRM is not recognised for capital purposes. In other cases where there is a maturity mismatch, partial recognition is given to the CRM for regulatory capital purposes as detailed below in Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4. Under the simple approach for collateral maturity mismatches will not be allowed.

              January 2015

          • Miscellaneous

            • CA-4.2.25

              Treatments for pools of credit risk mitigants and first- and second-to-default credit derivatives are given in Paragraphs CA-4.7.1 to CA-4.7.5.

              January 2015

        • CA-4.3 CA-4.3 Collateral

          • Eligible Financial Collateral

            • CA-4.3.1

              The following collateral instruments are eligible for recognition in the simple approach:

              (a) Cash (as well as certificates of deposit or comparable instruments issued by the lending bank) on deposit with the bank which is incurring the counterparty exposure;19,20
              (b) Gold;
              (c) Debt securities rated by a recognised external credit assessment institution where these are either:
              (i) At least BB- when issued by sovereigns or PSEs that are treated as sovereigns by the CBB;
              (ii) At least BBB- when issued by other entities (including banks and securities firms); or
              (iii) At least A-3/P-3 for short-term debt instruments;
              (d) Debt securities not rated by a recognised external credit assessment institution where these are:
              (i) Issued by a bank;
              (ii) Listed on a recognised exchange;
              (iii) Classified as senior debt;
              (iv) All rated issues of the same seniority by the issuing bank must be rated at least BBB- or A-3/P-3 by a recognised external credit assessment institution;
              (v) The bank holding the securities as collateral has no information to suggest that the issue justifies a rating below BBB- or A-3/P-3 (as applicable);
              (vi) The CBB is sufficiently confident about the market liquidity of the security;
              (e) Equities (including convertible bonds) that are included in a main index;
              (f) Undertakings for Collective Investments in Transferable Securities (UCITS) and mutual funds where:
              (i) A price for the units is publicly quoted daily; and
              (ii) The UCITS/mutual fund is limited to investing in the instruments listed in this paragraph21; and
              (g) Re-securitisations (as defined in the securitisation framework), irrespective of any credit ratings, are not eligible financial collateral.

              19 Cash funded credit linked notes issued by the bank against exposures in the banking book which fulfil the criteria for credit derivatives will be treated as cash collateralised transactions.

              20 When cash on deposit, certificates of deposit or comparable instruments issued by the lending bank are held as collateral at a third-party bank in a non-custodial arrangement, if they are openly pledged/assigned to the lending bank and if the pledge /assignment is unconditional and irrevocable, the exposure amount covered by the collateral (after any necessary haircuts for currency risk) will receive the risk weight of the third-party bank.

              21 However, the use or potential use by a UCITS/mutual fund of derivative instruments solely to hedge investments listed in this paragraph and paragraph CA-4.3.2 shall not prevent units in that UCITS /mutual fund from being eligible financial collateral.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.3.2

              The following collateral instruments are eligible for recognition in the comprehensive approach:

              (a) All of the instruments in paragraph CA-4.3.1;
              (b) Equities (including convertible bonds) which are not included in a main index but which are listed on a recognised exchange; and
              (c) UCITS/mutual funds which include such equities.
              January 2015

          • The Comprehensive Approach

            • Calculation of Capital Requirement

              • CA-4.3.3

                For a collateralised transaction, the exposure amount after risk mitigation is calculated as follows:

                E* = Max {0, [E x (1 + He) - C x (1 - Hc - Hfx)]}

                where:
                E* = The exposure value after risk mitigation
                E = Current value of the exposure
                He = Add-on appropriate to the exposure
                C = The current value of the collateral received
                Hc = Haircut appropriate to the collateral
                Hfx = Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch between the collateral and exposure

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.4

                The exposure amount after risk mitigation is multiplied by the risk weight of the counterparty to obtain the risk-weighted asset amount for the collateralised transaction.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.5

                The treatment for transactions where there is a mismatch between the maturity of the counterparty exposure and the collateral is given in Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.6

                Where the collateral is a basket of assets, the haircut on the basket will be:

                H = ∑i ai Hi, where ai is the weight of the asset (as measured by units of currency) in the i basket and Hi the haircut applicable to that asset.

                January 2015

            • Standard Haircuts and Add-Ons

              • CA-4.3.7

                These are the standardised supervisory haircuts and add-ons (assuming daily mark-to market, daily re-margining and a 10-business day holding period), expressed as percentages:

                Issue rating for debt securities Residual Maturity Sovereigns22,23 Other issuers24 Securitisation Exposures25
                AAA to AA-/A-1 ≤1 year 0.5 1 2
                >1 year, ≤5 years 2 4 8
                >5 years 4 8 16
                A+ to BBB-/ A-2/ A-3/ P-3 and Unrated bank securities ≤1 year 1 2 4
                >1 year, ≤5 years 3 6 12
                >5 years 6 12 24
                BB+ to BB- All 15 Not Eligible Not Eligible
                Main index equities 15
                Other equities 25
                UCITS/mutual funds Highest haircut applicable to any security in fund
                Cash in the same currency26 0

                22 Includes PSEs which are treated as sovereigns by the CBB.

                23 Multilateral development banks receiving a 0% risk weight will be treated as sovereigns.

                24 Includes PSEs which are not treated as sovereigns by CBB.

                25 Securitisation exposures are defined as those exposures that meet the definition set forth in the securitisation framework.

                26 Eligible cash collateral specified in Subparagraph CA-4.3.1(a).

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.8

                The standard haircut for currency risk where exposure and collateral are denominated in different currencies is 8% (also based on a 10-business day holding period and daily mark-to-market).

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.9

                For transactions in which the conventional bank licensee lends non-eligible instruments (e.g. non-investment grade corporate debt securities), the add-on to be applied on the exposure must be the same as the one for equity traded on a recognised exchange that is not part of a main index.

                January 2015

            • Adjustment for Different Holding Periods and Non Daily Mark-to-market or Re-Margining

              • CA-4.3.10

                For some transactions, depending on the nature and frequency of the revaluation and re-margining provisions, different holding periods are appropriate. The framework for collateral haircuts distinguishes between repo-style transactions (i.e. repo/reverse repos and securities lending/borrowing), "other capital-market-driven transactions" (i.e. OTC derivatives transactions and margin lending) and secured lending. In capital-market-driven transactions and repo-style transactions, the documentation contains remargining clauses; in secured lending transactions, it generally does not.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.11

                The minimum holding period for various products is summarised in the following table.

                Transaction type Minimum holding period Condition
                Repo-style transaction five business days daily re-margining
                Other capital market transactions ten business days daily re-margining
                Secured lending twenty business days daily revaluation
                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.12

                When the frequency of re-margining or revaluation is longer than the minimum, the minimum haircut numbers will be scaled up depending on the actual number of business days between re margining or revaluation using the square root of time formula below:

                where:

                H = Haircut

                HM = Haircut under the minimum holding period

                TM = Minimum holding period for the type of transaction

                NR = Actual number of business days between re margining for capital market transactions or revaluation for secured transactions.

                When a conventional bank licensee calculates the volatility on a TN day holding period which is different from the specified minimum holding period TM, the HM will be calculated using the square root of time formula:

                TN = Holding period used by the bank for deriving HN

                HN = Haircut based on the holding period TN

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.13

                For example, for conventional bank licensees using the standard CBB haircuts, the 10-business day haircuts provided in paragraph CA-4.3.7 will be the basis and this haircut will be scaled up or down depending on the type of transaction and the frequency of re-margining or revaluation using the formula below:

                where:

                H = Haircut

                H10 = 10-business day standard CBB haircut for instrument

                NR = Actual number of business days between re-margining for capital

                = Market transactions or revaluation for secured transactions.

                TM = Minimum holding period for the type of transaction

                January 2015

            • Conditions for Zero H

              • CA-4.3.14

                For repo-style transactions where the following conditions are satisfied, and the counterparty is a core market participant, conventional bank licensees are not required to apply the haircuts specified in the comprehensive approach and may instead apply a haircut of zero. This carve-out will not be available for conventional bank licensees using the modelling approaches as described in Paragraphs CA-4.3.22 to CA-4.3.25:

                (a) Both the exposure and the collateral are cash or a sovereign security or PSE security qualifying for a 0% risk weight in the standardised approach;
                (b) Both the exposure and the collateral are denominated in the same currency;
                (c) Either the transaction is overnight or both the exposure and the collateral are marked-to-market daily and are subject to daily re-margining;
                (d) Following a counterparty's failure to re-margin, the time that is required between the last mark-to-market before the failure to re-margin and the liquidation27 of the collateral is considered to be no more than four business days;
                (e) The transaction is settled across a settlement system proven for that type of transaction;
                (f) The documentation covering the agreement is standard market documentation for repo-style transactions in the securities concerned;
                (g) The transaction is governed by documentation specifying that if the counterparty fails to satisfy an obligation to deliver cash or securities or to deliver margin or otherwise defaults, then the transaction is immediately terminable; and
                (h) Upon any default event, regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt, the conventional bank licensee has the unfettered, legally enforceable right to immediately seize and liquidate the collateral for its benefit.

                27 This does not require the bank to always liquidate the collateral but rather to have the capability to do so within the given time frame.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.15

                Core market participants include the following entities:

                (a) Sovereigns, central banks and PSEs;
                (b) Banks and securities firms;
                (c) Other financial companies (including insurance companies) eligible for a 20% risk weight in the standardised approach;
                (d) Regulated mutual funds that are subject to capital or leverage requirements;
                (e) Regulated pension funds; and
                (f) Recognised clearing organisations.
                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.16

                Where a supervisor has applied a specific carve-out to repo-style transactions in securities issued by its domestic government, then banks incorporated in Bahrain are allowed to adopt the same approach to the same transactions.

                January 2015

            • Treatment of Repo-Style Transactions Covered under Master Netting Agreements

              • CA-4.3.17

                The effects of bilateral netting agreements covering repo-style transactions will be recognised on a counterparty-by-counterparty basis if the agreements are legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt. In addition, netting agreements must:

                (a) Provide the non-defaulting party the right to terminate and close-out in a timely manner all transactions under the agreement upon an event of default, including in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy of the counterparty;
                (b) Provide for the netting of gains and losses on transactions (including the value of any collateral) terminated and closed out under it so that a single net amount is owed by one party to the other;
                (c) Allow for the prompt liquidation or setoff of collateral upon the event of default; and
                (d) Be, together with the rights arising from the provisions required in (a) to (c) above, legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of the counterparty's insolvency or bankruptcy.
                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.18

                Netting across positions in the banking and trading book will only be recognised when the netted transactions fulfil the following conditions:

                (a) All transactions are marked to market daily28; and
                (b) The collateral instruments used in the transactions are recognised as eligible financial collateral in the banking book.

                28 The holding period for the haircuts will depend as in other repo-style transactions on the frequency of margining.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.19

                The formula in Paragraph CA-4.3.3 will be adapted to calculate the capital requirements for transactions with netting agreements.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.20

                For conventional bank licensees using the standard haircuts, the framework below will apply to take into account the impact of master netting agreements.

                E* = Max {0, [(∑(E) – ∑(C)) + ∑ (ES x HS) + ∑ (EFX x HFX)]}29

                Where:

                E* = The exposure value after risk mitigation
                E = Current value of the exposure
                C = The value of the collateral received
                ES = Absolute value of the net position in a given security
                HS = Haircut appropriate to ES
                EFX = Absolute value of the net position in a currency different from the settlement currency
                HFX = Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch


                29 The starting point for this formula is the formula in paragraph CA-4.3.3 which can also be presented as the following: E* = max {0, [(E – C) + (E x He) + (C x Hc) + (C x Hfx)]}

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.21

                The net long or short position of each security included in the netting agreement will be multiplied by the appropriate haircut. All other rules regarding the calculation of haircuts stated in Paragraphs CA4.3.3 to CA-4.3.16 equivalently apply for conventional bank licensees using bilateral netting agreements for repo-style transactions.

                January 2015

            • Use of Models

              • CA-4.3.22

                As an alternative to the use of standard haircuts, CBB may allow conventional bank licensees to use a VaR models approach to reflect the price volatility of the exposure and collateral for repo-style transactions, taking into account correlation effects between security positions. This approach would apply to repo-style transactions covered by bilateral netting agreements on a counterparty-by-counterparty basis. At the discretion of CBB, firms are also eligible to use the VaR model approach for margin lending transactions, if the transactions are covered under a bilateral master netting agreement that meets the requirements of Paragraphs CA-4.3.17 and CA-4.3.18. The VaR models approach is available to conventional bank licensees that have received CBB's recognition for an internal market risk model under Chapter CA-14. Conventional bank licensees which have not received CBB's recognition for use of models under Chapter CA-14 can separately apply for CBB's recognition to use their internal VaR models for calculation of potential price volatility for repo-style transactions. Internal models will only be accepted when a conventional bank licensee can prove the quality of its model to CBB through the backtesting of its output using one year of historical data.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.23

                The quantitative and qualitative criteria for recognition of internal market risk models for repo-style transactions and other similar transactions are in principle the same as in Chapter CA-14. With regard to the holding period, the minimum will be 5-business days for repo-style transactions, rather than the 10-business days in the Market Risk Amendment. For other transactions eligible for the VaR models approach, the 10-business day holding period will be retained. The minimum holding period should be adjusted upwards for market instruments where such a holding period would be inappropriate given the liquidity of the instrument concerned.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.24

                The calculation of the exposure E* for banks using their internal model will be the following:

                E* = Max {0, [(∑E – ∑c) + VaR output from internal model]}

                In calculating capital requirements banks will use the previous business day's VaR number.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.3.25

                [This paragraph was deleted in January 2015.]

                January 2015

          • The Simple Approach

            • Minimum Conditions

              • CA-4.3.26

                For collateral to be recognised in the simple approach, the collateral must be pledged for at least the life of the exposure and it must be marked to market and revalued with a minimum frequency of six months. Those portions of claims collateralised by the market value of recognised collateral receive the risk weight applicable to the collateral instrument. The risk weight on the collateralised portion will be subject to a floor of 20% except under the conditions specified in Paragraphs CA-4.3.27 to CA-4.3.29. The remainder of the claim should be assigned to the risk weight appropriate to the counterparty. A capital requirement will be applied to conventional bank licensees on either side of the collateralised transaction: for example, both repos and reverse repos will be subject to capital requirements.

                January 2015

          • Exceptions to the Risk Weight Floor

            • CA-4.3.27

              Transactions which fulfil the criteria outlined in Paragraph CA-4.3.14 and are with a core market participant, as defined in Paragraph CA-4.3.15, receive a risk weight of 0%. If the counterparty to the transactions is not a core market participant the transaction should receive a risk weight of 10%.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.3.28

              OTC derivative transactions subject to daily mark-to-market, collateralised by cash and where there is no currency mismatch receive a 0% risk weight. Such transactions collateralised by sovereign or PSE securities qualifying for a 0% risk weight in the standardised approach will receive a 10% risk weight.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.3.29

              The 20% floor for the risk weight on a collateralised transaction will not be applied and a 0% risk weight can be applied where the exposure and the collateral are denominated in the same currency, and either:

              (a) The collateral is cash on deposit as defined in Paragraph CA-4.3.1(a); or
              (b) The collateral is in the form of sovereign/PSE securities eligible for a 0% risk weight, and its market value has been discounted by 20%.
              January 2015

          • Collateralised OTC Derivatives Transactions

            • CA-4.3.30

              Under the Current Exposure Method, the calculation of the counterparty credit risk charge for an individual contract is as follows:

              Counterparty charge = [(RC + add-on) – CA] x r x 8%

              Where:

              RC = The replacement cost,
              Add-on = The amount for potential future exposure calculated according to paragraph 45 of Appendix CA-2.
              CA = The volatility adjusted collateral amount under the comprehensive approach prescribed in Paragraphs CA-4.3.3 to CA-4.3.16, or zero if no eligible collateral is applied to the transaction, and
              r = The risk weight of the counterparty.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.3.31

              When effective bilateral netting contracts are in place, RC is the net replacement cost and the add-on is ANet as calculated according to paragraph 50 (i) to 50 (vi) of Appendix CA-2. The haircut for currency risk (Hfx) must be applied when there is a mismatch between the collateral currency and the settlement currency. Even in the case where there are more than two currencies involved in the exposure, collateral and settlement currency, a single haircut assuming a 10-business day holding period scaled up as necessary depending on the frequency of mark-to-market must be applied.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.3.32

              As an alternative to the Current Exposure Method for the calculation of the counterparty credit risk charge, conventional bank licensees may also use the Standardised Method.

              January 2015

        • CA-4.4 CA-4.4 On-Balance Sheet Netting

          • CA-4.4.1

            Where a conventional bank licensee:

            (a) Has a well-founded legal basis for concluding that the netting or offsetting agreement is enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt;
            (b) Is able at any time to determine those assets and liabilities with the same counterparty that are subject to the netting agreement;
            (c) Monitors and controls its roll-off risks; and
            (d) Monitors and controls the relevant exposures on a net basis,

            it may use the net exposure of loans and deposits as the basis for its capital adequacy calculation in accordance with the formula in Paragraph CA-4.3.3. Assets (loans) are treated as exposure and liabilities (deposits) as collateral. The haircuts will be zero except when a currency mismatch exists. A 10-business day holding period will apply when daily mark-to- market is conducted and all the requirements contained in Paragraphs CA-4.3.7, CA-4.3.13, and CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4 will apply.

            January 2015

        • CA-4.5 CA-4.5 Guarantees and Credit Derivatives

          • Operational Requirements

            • Operational Requirements Common to Guarantees and Credit Derivatives

              • CA-4.5.1

                A guarantee (counter-guarantee) or credit derivative must represent a direct claim on the protection provider and must be explicitly referenced to specific exposures or a pool of exposures, so that the extent of the cover is clearly defined and incontrovertible. Other than non-payment by a protection purchaser of money due in respect of the credit protection contract it must be irrevocable; there must be no clause in the contract that would allow the protection provider unilaterally to cancel the credit cover or that would increase the effective cost of cover as a result of deteriorating credit quality in the hedged exposure30. It must also be unconditional; there should be no clause in the protection contract outside the direct control of the conventional bank licensee that could prevent the protection provider from being obliged to pay out in a timely manner in the event that the original counterparty fails to make the payment(s) due.


                30 Note that the irrevocability condition does not require that the credit protection and the exposure be maturity matched; rather that the maturity agreed ex ante may not be reduced ex post by the protection provider. Paragraph CA-4.6.2 sets forth the treatment of call options in determining remaining maturity for credit protection.

                January 2015

            • Additional Operational Requirements for Guarantees

              • CA-4.5.2

                In addition to the legal certainty requirements in Paragraphs CA-4.1.8 and CA-4.1.9, in order for a guarantee to be recognised, the following conditions must be satisfied:

                (a) On the qualifying default/non-payment of the counterparty, the conventional bank licensee may in a timely manner pursue the guarantor for any monies outstanding under the documentation governing the transaction. The guarantor may make one lump sum payment of all monies under such documentation to the conventional bank licensee, or the guarantor may assume the future payment obligations of the counterparty covered by the guarantee. The conventional bank licensee must have the right to receive any such payments from the guarantor without first having to take legal actions in order to pursue the counterparty for payment;
                (b) The guarantee is an explicitly documented obligation assumed by the guarantor; and
                (c) Except as noted in the following sentence, the guarantee covers all types of payments the underlying obligor is expected to make under the documentation governing the transaction, for example notional amount, margin payments etc. Where a guarantee covers payment of principal only, interests and other uncovered payments must be treated as an unsecured amount in accordance with Paragraph CA-4.5.10.
                January 2015

            • Additional Operational Requirements for Credit Derivatives

              • CA-4.5.3

                In order for a credit derivative contract to be recognised, the following conditions must be satisfied:

                (a) The credit events specified by the contracting parties must at a minimum cover:
                (i) Failure to pay the amounts due under terms of the underlying obligation that are in effect at the time of such failure (with a grace period that is closely in line with the grace period in the underlying obligation);
                (ii) Bankruptcy, insolvency or inability of the obligor to pay its debts, or its failure or admission in writing of its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due, and analogous events; and
                (iii) Restructuring of the underlying obligation involving forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest or fees that results in a credit loss event (i.e. charge-off, specific provision or other similar debit to the profit and loss account). When restructuring is not specified as a credit event, refer to Paragraph CA-4.5.4;
                (b) If the credit derivative covers obligations that do not include the underlying obligation, Subparagraph (g) governs whether the asset mismatch is permissible;
                (c) The credit derivative shall not terminate prior to expiration of any grace period required for a default on the underlying obligation to occur as a result of a failure to pay, subject to the provisions of Paragraph CA-4.6.2;
                (d) Credit derivatives allowing for cash settlement are recognised for capital purposes insofar as a robust valuation process is in place in order to estimate loss reliably. There must be a clearly specified period for obtaining post-credit- event valuations of the underlying obligation. If the reference obligation specified in the credit derivative for purposes of cash settlement is different than the underlying obligation, Subparagraph (g) below governs whether the asset mismatch is permissible;
                (e) If the protection purchaser's right/ability to transfer the underlying obligation to the protection provider is required for settlement, the terms of the underlying obligation must provide that any required consent to such transfer may not be unreasonably withheld;
                (f) The identity of the parties responsible for determining whether a credit event has occurred must be clearly defined. This determination must not be the sole responsibility of the protection seller. The protection buyer must have the right/ability to inform the protection provider of the occurrence of a credit event;
                (g) A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the reference obligation under the credit derivative (i.e. the obligation used for purposes of determining cash settlement value or the deliverable obligation) is permissible if (1) the reference obligation ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (2) the underlying obligation and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e. the same legal entity) and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place; and
                (h) A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the obligation used for purposes of determining whether a credit event has occurred is permissible if (1) the latter obligation ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (2) the underlying obligation and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e. the same legal entity) and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place.
                January 2015

              • CA-4.5.4

                When the restructuring of the underlying obligation is not covered by the credit derivative, but the other requirements in Paragraph CA-4.5.3 are met, partial recognition of the credit derivative will be allowed. If the amount of the credit derivative is less than or equal to the amount of the underlying obligation, 60% of the amount of the hedge can be recognised as covered. If the amount of the credit derivative is larger than that of the underlying obligation, then the amount of eligible hedge is capped at 60% of the amount of the underlying obligation31.


                31 The 60% recognition factor is provided as an interim treatment, which the CBB may refine in the future.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.5.5

                Only credit default swaps and total return swaps that provide credit protection equivalent to guarantees will be eligible for recognition. The following exception applies. Where a conventional bank licensee buys credit protection through a total return swap and records the net payments received on the swap as net income, but does not record offsetting deterioration in the value of the asset that is protected (either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves), the credit protection will not be recognised. The treatment of first-to-default and second-to-default products is covered separately in Paragraphs CA-4.7.2 to CA-4.7.5.

                January 2015

              • CA-4.5.6

                Other types of credit derivatives are not eligible for recognition32.


                32 Cash funded credit linked notes issued by the bank against exposures in the banking book which fulfil the criteria for credit derivatives will be treated as cash collateralised transactions.

                January 2015

          • Range of Eligible Guarantors (Counter-Guarantors)/Protection Providers

            • CA-4.5.7

              Credit protection given by the following entities will be recognised:

              (a) Sovereign entities33, PSEs, banks34 and securities firms with a lower risk weight than the counterparty;
              (b) Other entities that are externally rated except where credit protection is provided to a securitisation exposure. This would include credit protection provided by parent, subsidiary and affiliate companies when they have a lower risk weight than the obligor; and
              (c) When credit protection is provided to a securitisation exposure, other entities that currently are externally rated BBB- or better and that were externally rated A- or better at the time the credit protection was provided. This would include credit protection provided by parent, subsidiary and affiliate companies when they have a lower risk weight than the obligor.

              33 This includes the Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank and the European Community, as well as those MDBs referred to in CA-3.2.8.

              34 This includes other MDBs.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.5.7A

              Credit default guarantee provided by Tamkeen is recognised as an eligible credit risk mitigant.

              Added: January 2023

          • Risk Weights

            • CA-4.5.8

              The protected portion is assigned the risk weight of the protection provider. The uncovered portion of the exposure is assigned the risk weight of the underlying counterparty.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.5.9

              Materiality thresholds on payments below which no payment is made in the event of loss are equivalent to retained first loss positions and must be deducted in full from the Total Capital of the conventional bank licensee purchasing the credit protection.

              January 2015

          • Proportional Cover

            • CA-4.5.10

              Where the amount guaranteed, or against which credit protection is held, is less than the amount of the exposure, and the secured and unsecured portions are of equal seniority, i.e. the conventional bank licensee and the guarantor share losses on a pro-rata basis capital relief will be afforded on a proportional basis: i.e. the protected portion of the exposure will receive the treatment applicable to eligible guarantees/credit derivatives, with the remainder treated as unsecured.

              January 2015

          • Tranched Cover

            • CA-4.5.11

              Where the conventional bank licensee transfers a portion of the risk of an exposure in one or more tranches to a protection seller or sellers and retains some level of risk of the loan and the risk transferred and the risk retained are of different seniority, conventional bank licensees may obtain credit protection for either the senior tranches (e.g. second loss portion) or the junior tranche (e.g. first loss portion). In this case the rules as set out in Chapter CA-6 (Credit risk — securitisation framework) will apply.

              January 2015

          • Currency Mismatches

            • CA-4.5.12

              Where the credit protection is denominated in a currency different from that in which the exposure is denominated — i.e. there is a currency mismatch — the amount of the exposure deemed to be protected will be reduced by the application of a haircut HFX, i.e.

              GA = G x (1 – HFX)

              Where:

              G = Nominal amount of the credit protection
              HFX = Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch between the credit protection and underlying obligation.

              The appropriate haircut based on a 10-business day holding period (assuming daily marking-to-market) will be applied. If a conventional bank licensee uses the standard haircuts it will be 8%. The haircuts must be scaled up using the square root of time formula, depending on the frequency of revaluation of the credit protection as described in Paragraph CA-4.3.12.

              January 2015

          • Sovereign Guarantees and Counter-guarantees

            • CA-4.5.13

              Portions of claims guaranteed by the entities detailed in Paragraph CA-3.2.1, where the guarantee is denominated in the domestic currency (and US$ in case of a guarantee provided by the Government of Bahrain and CBB) may get a 0% risk-weighting. A claim may be covered by a guarantee that is indirectly counter-guaranteed by such entities. Such a claim may be treated as covered by a sovereign guarantee provided that:

              (a) The sovereign counter-guarantee covers all credit risk elements of the claim;
              (b) Both the original guarantee and the counter-guarantee meet all operational requirements for guarantees, except that the counter-guarantee need not be direct and explicit to the original claim; and
              (c) CBB is satisfied that the cover is robust and that no historical evidence suggests that the coverage of the counter-guarantee is less than effectively equivalent to that of a direct sovereign guarantee.
              January 2015

        • CA-4.6 CA-4.6 Maturity Mismatches

          • CA-4.6.1

            For the purposes of calculating risk-weighted assets, a maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a hedge is less than that of the underlying exposure.

            January 2015

          • Definition of Maturity

            • CA-4.6.2

              The maturity of the underlying exposure and the maturity of the hedge should both be defined conservatively. The effective maturity of the underlying should be gauged as the longest possible remaining time before the counterparty is scheduled to fulfil its obligation, taking into account any applicable grace period. For the hedge, embedded options which may reduce the term of the hedge should be taken into account so that the shortest possible effective maturity is used. Where a call is at the discretion of the protection seller, the maturity will always be at the first call date. If the call is at the discretion of the protection buying bank but the terms of the arrangement at origination of the hedge contain a positive incentive for the bank to call the transaction before contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first call date will be deemed to be the effective maturity. For example, where there is a step-up in cost in conjunction with a call feature or where the effective cost of cover increases over time even if credit quality remains the same or increases, the effective maturity will be the remaining time to the first call.

              January 2015

          • Risk Weights for Maturity Mismatches

            • CA-4.6.3

              As outlined in Paragraph CA-4.2.24, hedges with maturity mismatches are only recognised when their original maturities are greater than or equal to one year. As a result, the maturity of hedges for exposures with original maturities of less than one year must be matched to be recognised. In all cases, hedges with maturity mismatches will not be recognised when they have a residual maturity of three months or less.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.6.4

              When there is a maturity mismatch with recognised credit risk mitigants (collateral, on-balance sheet netting, guarantees and credit derivatives) the following adjustment will be applied.

              Pa = P x (t – 0.25) / (T – 0.25)
              Where:

              Pa = Value of the credit protection adjusted for maturity mismatch.
              P = Credit protection (e.g. collateral amount, guarantee amount) adjusted for any haircuts.
              T = Min (T, residual maturity of the credit protection arrangement) expressed in years.
              T = Min (5, residual maturity of the exposure) expressed in years.

              January 2015

        • CA-4.7 CA-4.7 Other Items Related to the Treatment of CRM Techniques

          • Treatment of Pools of CRM Techniques

            • CA-4.7.1

              In the case where a conventional bank licensee has multiple CRM techniques covering a single exposure (e.g. a bank has both collateral and guarantee partially covering an exposure), the conventional bank licensee is required to subdivide the exposure into portions covered by each type of CRM technique (e.g. portion covered by collateral, portion covered by guarantee) and the risk-weighted assets of each portion must be calculated separately. When credit protection provided by a single protection provider has differing maturities, they must be subdivided into separate protection as well.

              January 2015

          • First-to-default Credit Derivatives

            • CA-4.7.2

              There are cases where a conventional bank licensee obtains credit protection for a basket of reference names and where the first default among the reference names triggers the credit protection and the credit event also terminates the contract. In this case, the conventional bank licensee may recognise regulatory capital relief for the asset within the basket with the lowest risk-weighted amount, but only if the notional amount is less than or equal to the notional amount of the credit derivative.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.7.3

              With regard to the conventional bank licensee providing credit protection through such an instrument, if the product has an external credit assessment from an eligible credit assessment institution, the risk weight in Paragraph CA-6.4.8 applied to securitisation tranches will be applied. If the product is not rated by an eligible external credit assessment institution, the risk weights of the assets included in the basket will be aggregated up to a maximum of 1250% and multiplied by the nominal amount of the protection provided by the credit derivative to obtain the risk-weighted asset amount.

              January 2015

          • Second-to-default Credit Derivatives

            • CA-4.7.4

              In the case where the second default among the assets within the basket triggers the credit protection, the conventional bank licensee obtaining credit protection through such a product will only be able to recognise any capital relief if first-default-protection has also be obtained or when one of the assets within the basket has already defaulted.

              January 2015

            • CA-4.7.5

              For conventional bank licensees providing credit protection through such a product, the capital treatment is the same as in Paragraph CA-4.7.3 above with one exception. The exception is that, in aggregating the risk weights, the asset with the lowest risk weighted amount can be excluded from the calculation.

              January 2015

      • CA-5 CA-5 Credit Risk — The Internal Ratings-Based Approach

        • CA-5.1

          [This Chapter was deleted in January 2015.]

          January 2015

      • CA-6 CA-6 Credit Risk — Securitisation Framework

        • CA-6.1 CA-6.1 Scope and Definitions of Transactions Covered under the Securitisation Framework

          • CA-6.1.1

            Conventional bank licensees must apply the securitisation framework for determining regulatory capital requirements on exposures arising from traditional and synthetic securitisations or similar structures that contain features common to both.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.1A

            A conventional bank licensee must meet all the requirements listed in the Paragraph CA-6.1.1.B below, to use any of the approaches specified in the securitisation framework. If a conventional bank licensee does not perform the level of the due diligence specified, it must risk weight the amount of the securitisation (or re-securitisation) exposure at 1,250% using the approach outlined in the Paragraphs CA-6.4.2 to CA-6.4.4.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.1B

            In order for a conventional bank licensee to use the securitisation framework, a conventional bank licensee must have the information specified below or risk weight the exposure at 1,250%:

            (a) A conventional bank licensee must have a comprehensive understanding of the risk characteristics of its individual securitisation exposures, whether on-balance sheet or off-balance sheet, as well as the risk characteristics of the pools underlying its securitisation exposures;
            (b) A conventional bank licensee must be able to access performance information on the underlying pools on an ongoing basis in a timely manner. Such information should include: exposure type, percentage of loans more than 30, 60 and 90 days past due, default rates, prepayment rates, loans in foreclosure, property type, occupancy, average credit score or other measures of creditworthiness, average loan-to-value ratio, and industry and geographic diversification. For re-securitisations, a conventional bank licensee must have not only information on the underlying securitisation tranches, such as the issuer name and credit quality, but also the characteristics and performance of the pools underlying the securitisation tranches; and
            (c) A conventional bank licensee must have a thorough understanding of all structural features of a securitisation transaction that would materially impact the performance of the conventional bank licensee's exposures to the transaction, such as the contractual waterfall and waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, liquidity enhancements, market value triggers, and deal-specific definitions of default.
            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.2

            Since securitisations may be structured in many different ways, the capital treatment of a securitisation exposure must be determined on the basis of its economic substance rather than its legal form. Similarly, CBB will look to the economic substance of a transaction to determine whether it should be subject to the securitisation framework for purposes of determining regulatory capital. Conventional bank licensees are encouraged to consult with the CBB when there is uncertainty about whether a given transaction should be considered a securitisation. For example, transactions involving cash flows from real estate (e.g. rents) may be considered specialised lending exposures, if warranted.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.3

            A traditional securitisation is a structure where the cash flow from an underlying pool of exposures is used to service at least two different stratified risk positions or tranches reflecting different degrees of credit risk. Payments to the investors depend upon the performance of the specified underlying exposures, as opposed to being derived from an obligation of the entity originating those exposures. The stratified/tranched structures that characterise securitisations differ from ordinary senior/subordinated debt instruments in that junior securitisation tranches can absorb losses without interrupting contractual payments to more senior tranches, whereas subordination in a senior/subordinated debt structure is a matter of priority of rights to the proceeds of liquidation.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.4

            A synthetic securitisation is a structure with at least two different stratified risk positions or tranches that reflect different degrees of credit risk where credit risk of an underlying pool of exposures is transferred, in whole or in part, through the use of funded (e.g. credit-linked notes) or unfunded (e.g. credit default swaps) credit derivatives or guarantees that serve to hedge the credit risk of the portfolio. Accordingly, the investors' potential risk is dependent upon the performance of the underlying pool.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5

            Conventional bank licensees' exposures to a securitisation are hereafter referred to as "securitisation exposures". Securitisation exposures can include but are not restricted to the following: asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed securities, credit enhancements, liquidity facilities, interest rate or currency swaps, credit derivatives and tranched cover as described in Paragraph CA-4.5.11. Reserve accounts, such as cash collateral accounts, recorded as an asset by the originating conventional bank licensee must also be treated as securitisation exposures.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5A

            A re-securitisation exposure is a securitisation exposure in which the risk associated with an underlying pool of exposures is tranched and at least one of the underlying exposures is a securitisation exposure. In addition, an exposure to one or more re-securitisation exposures is a re-securitisation exposure.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5B

            Given the complexity of many securitisation transactions, licensees are encouraged to consult with the CBB when there is uncertainty about whether a particular structured credit position should be considered a re-securitisation exposure. The CBB will consider the exposure's economic substance when making a determination on whether a structured credit position is a re-securitisation exposure.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5C

            Re-securitisation exposures include collateralised debt obligations (CDOs) of asset-backed securities (ABS) including, for example, a CDO backed by residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS). Moreover, it also captures a securitisation exposure where the pool contains many individual mortgage loans and a single RMBS. This means that even if only one of the underlying exposures is a securitisation exposure, then any tranched position (such as senior or subordinated ABS) exposed to that pool is considered a re-securitisation exposure.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5D

            Furthermore, when an instrument's performance is linked to one or more re-securitisation exposures, generally that instrument is a re-securitisation exposure. Thus a credit derivative providing credit protection for a CDO squared tranche is a re-securitisation exposure.

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.5E

            The definition of re-securitisation also applies to ABCP programmes. The ratings based risk approach tables include weightings for both securitisation and re-securitisation exposures (see CA-6.4.8 onward).

            January 2015

          • CA-6.1.6

            Underlying instruments in the pool being securitised may include but are not restricted to the following: loans, commitments, asset-backed and mortgage-backed securities, corporate bonds, equity securities, and private equity investments. The underlying pool may include one or more exposures.

            January 2015

        • CA-6.2 CA-6.2 Definitions and General Terminology

          • Originating Bank

            • CA-6.2.1

              For risk-based capital purposes, a conventional bank licensee is considered to be an originator with regard to a certain securitisation if it meets either of the following conditions:

              (a) The conventional bank licensee originates directly or indirectly underlying exposures included in the securitisation; or
              (b) The conventional bank licensee serves as a sponsor of an asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduit or similar programme that acquires exposures from third-party entities. In the context of such programmes, a conventional bank licensee would generally be considered a sponsor and, in turn, an originator if it, in fact or in substance, manages or advises the programme, places securities into the market, or provides liquidity and/or credit enhancements.
              January 2015

          • Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) Programme

            • CA-6.2.2

              An asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) programme predominately issues commercial paper with an original maturity of one year or less that is backed by assets or other exposures held in a bankruptcy-remote, Special Purpose Securitisation Vehicle (SPSV).

              January 2015

          • Clean-Up Call

            • CA-6.2.3

              A clean-up call is an option that permits the securitisation exposures (e.g. asset-backed securities) to be called before all of the underlying exposures or securitisation exposures have been repaid. In the case of traditional securitisations, this is generally accomplished by repurchasing the remaining securitisation exposures once the pool balance or outstanding securities have fallen below some specified level. In the case of a synthetic transaction, the clean-up call may take the form of a clause that extinguishes the credit protection.

              January 2015

          • Credit Enhancement

            • CA-6.2.4

              A credit enhancement is a contractual arrangement in which the conventional bank licensee retains or assumes a securitisation exposure and, in substance, provides some degree of added protection to other parties to the transaction.

              January 2015

          • Credit Enhancing Interest-Only Strip

            • CA-6.2.5

              A credit-enhancing interest-only strip (I/O) is an on-balance sheet asset that (i) represents a valuation of cash flows related to future margin income, and (ii) is subordinated.

              January 2015

          • Early Amortisation

            • CA-6.2.6

              Early amortisation provisions are mechanisms that, once triggered, allow investors to be paid out prior to the originally stated maturity of the securities issued. For risk-based capital purposes, an early amortisation provision will be considered either controlled or non-controlled. A controlled early amortisation provision must meet all of the following conditions:

              (a) The conventional bank licensee must have an appropriate capital/liquidity plan in place to ensure that it has sufficient capital and liquidity available in the event of an early amortisation;
              (b) Throughout the duration of the transaction, including the amortisation period, there is the same pro-rata sharing of interest, principal, expenses, losses and recoveries based on the conventional bank licensee's and investors' relative shares of the receivables outstanding at the beginning of each month;
              (c) The conventional bank licensee must set a period for amortisation that would be sufficient for at least 90% of the total debt outstanding at the beginning of the early amortisation period to have been repaid or recognised as in default; and
              (d) The pace of repayment must not be any more rapid than would be allowed by straight-line amortisation over the period set out in criterion (c).
              January 2015

            • CA-6.2.7

              An early amortisation provision that does not satisfy the conditions for a controlled early amortisation provision must be treated as a non-controlled early amortisation provision.

              January 2015

          • Excess Spread

            • CA-6.2.8

              Excess spread is generally defined as gross finance charge collections and other income received by the trust or SPSV (specified in Paragraph CA-6.2.10) minus certificate interest, servicing fees, charge-offs, and other senior trust or SPSV expenses.

              January 2015

          • Implicit Support

            • CA-6.2.9

              Implicit support arises when a conventional bank licensee provides support to a securitisation in excess of its predetermined contractual obligation.

              January 2015

          • SPSV

            • CA-6.2.10

              An SPSV is a corporation, trust, or other entity organised for a specific purpose, the activities of which are limited to those appropriate to accomplish the purpose of the SPSV, and the structure of which is intended to isolate the SPSV from the credit risk of an originator or seller of exposures. SPSVs are commonly used as financing vehicles in which exposures are sold to a trust or similar entity in exchange for cash or other assets funded by debt issued by the trust.

              January 2015

        • CA-6.3 CA-6.3 Operational Requirements for the Recognition of Risk Transference

          • CA-6.3.1

            The following operational requirements are applicable to the standardised approach of the securitisation framework.

            January 2015

          • Operational Requirements for Traditional Securitisations

            • CA-6.3.2

              An originating bank may exclude securitised exposures from the calculation of risk weighted assets under Paragraph CA-6.4.1, only if all of the following conditions have been met. Conventional bank licensees meeting these conditions must still hold regulatory capital against any securitisation exposures they retain:

              (a) Significant credit risk associated with the securitised exposures has been transferred to third parties;
              (b) The transferor does not maintain effective or indirect control35 over the transferred exposures. The assets are legally isolated from the transferor in such a way (e.g. through the sale of assets or through sub-participation) that the exposures are put beyond the reach of the transferor and its creditors, even in bankruptcy or receivership. These conditions must be supported by an opinion provided by a qualified legal counsel;
              (c) The securities issued are not obligations of the transferor. Thus, investors who purchase the securities only have claim to the underlying pool of exposures;
              (d) The transferee is an SPSV and the holders of the beneficial interests in that entity have the right to pledge or exchange them without restriction;
              (e) Clean-up calls must satisfy the conditions set out in Paragraph CA-6.3.5; and
              (f) The securitisation does not contain clauses that (i) require the originating bank to alter systematically the underlying exposures such that the pool's weighted average credit quality is improved unless this is achieved by selling assets to independent and unaffiliated third parties at market prices; (ii) allow for increases in a retained first loss position or credit enhancement provided by the originating bank after the transaction's inception; or (iii) increase the yield payable to parties other than the originating bank, such as investors and third-party providers of credit enhancements, in response to a deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying pool.

              35 The transferor is deemed to have maintained effective control over the transferred credit risk exposures if it: (i) is able to repurchase from the transferee the previously transferred exposures in order to realise their benefits; or (ii) is obligated to retain the risk of the transferred exposures. The transferor's retention of servicing rights to the exposures will not necessarily constitute indirect control of the exposures.

              January 2015

          • Operational Requirements for Synthetic Securitisations

            • CA-6.3.3

              For synthetic securitisations, the use of CRM techniques (i.e. collateral, guarantees and credit derivatives) for hedging the underlying exposure may be recognised for risk-based capital purposes only if the conditions outlined below are satisfied:

              (a) Credit risk mitigants must comply with the requirements as set out in Chapter CA-4 of this Module;
              (b) Eligible collateral is limited to that specified in Paragraphs CA-4.3.1 and CA-4.3.2. Eligible collateral pledged by SPSVs may be recognised;
              (c) Eligible guarantors are defined in Paragraph CA-4.5.7. Conventional bank licensees may not recognise SPSVs as eligible guarantors in the securitisation framework;
              (d) Conventional bank licensees must transfer significant credit risk associated with the underlying exposure to third parties;
              (e) The instruments used to transfer credit risk may not contain terms or conditions that limit the amount of credit risk transferred, such as those provided below:
              (i) Clauses that materially limit the credit protection or credit risk transference (e.g. significant materiality thresholds below which credit protection is deemed not to be triggered even if a credit event occurs or those that allow for the termination of the protection due to deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures);
              (ii) Clauses that require the originating bank to alter the underlying exposures to improve the pool's weighted average credit quality;
              (iii) Clauses that increase the conventional bank licensees' cost of credit protection in response to deterioration in the pool's quality;
              (iv) Clauses that increase the yield payable to parties other than the originating bank, such as investors and third-party providers of credit enhancements, in response to a deterioration in the credit quality of the reference pool; and
              (v) Clauses that provide for increases in a retained first loss position or credit enhancement provided by the originating bank after the transaction's inception;
              (f) An opinion must be obtained from a qualified legal counsel that confirms the enforceability of the contracts in all relevant jurisdictions; and
              (g) Clean-up calls must satisfy the conditions set out in Paragraph CA-6.3.5.
              January 2015

            • CA-6.3.4

              For synthetic securitisations, the effect of applying CRM techniques for hedging the underlying exposure are treated according to Chapter CA-4. In case there is a maturity mismatch, the capital requirement will be determined in accordance with Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4. When the exposures in the underlying pool have different maturities, the longest maturity must be taken as the maturity of the pool. Maturity mismatches may arise in the context of synthetic securitisations when, for example, a conventional bank licensee uses credit derivatives to transfer part or all of the credit risk of a specific pool of assets to third parties. When the credit derivatives unwind, the transaction will terminate. This implies that the effective maturity of the tranches of the synthetic securitisation may differ from that of the underlying exposures. Originating banks of synthetic securitisations must treat such maturity mismatches in the following manner. A conventional bank licensee applying the standardised approach for securitisation must risk weight all retained positions that are unrated or rated below investment grade at 1,250%. For all other securitisation exposures, the conventional bank licensee must apply the maturity mismatch treatment set forth in Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4.

              January 2015

          • Operational Requirements and Treatment of Clean-Up Calls

            • CA-6.3.5

              For securitisation transactions that include a clean-up call, no capital will be required due to the presence of a clean-up call if the following conditions are met:

              (a) The exercise of the clean-up call must not be mandatory, in form or in substance, but rather must be at the discretion of the originating bank;
              (b) The clean-up call must not be structured to avoid allocating losses to credit enhancements or positions held by investors or otherwise structured to provide credit enhancement; and
              (c) The clean-up call must only be exercisable when 10% or less of the original underlying portfolio, or securities issued remain, or, for synthetic securitisations, when 10% or less of the original reference portfolio value remains.
              January 2015

            • CA-6.3.6

              Securitisation transactions that include a clean-up call that does not meet all of the criteria stated in Paragraph CA-6.3.5 result in a capital requirement for the originating bank. For a traditional securitisation, the underlying exposures must be treated as if they were not securitised. Additionally, conventional bank licensees must not recognise in regulatory capital any gain-on-sale, as defined in Paragraph CA-6.4.3. For synthetic securitisations, the bank purchasing protection must hold capital against the entire amount of the securitised exposures as if they did not benefit from any credit protection. If a synthetic securitisation incorporates a call (other than a clean-up call) that effectively terminates the transaction and the purchased credit protection on a specific date, the conventional bank licensee must treat the transaction in accordance with Paragraph CA-6.3.4 and Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4.

              January 2015

            • CA-6.3.7

              If a clean-up call, when exercised, is found to serve as a credit enhancement, the exercise of the clean-up call must be considered a form of implicit support provided by the conventional bank licensee and must be treated in accordance with the supervisory guidance pertaining to securitisation transactions.

              January 2015

        • CA-6.4 CA-6.4 Treatment of Securitisation Exposures

          • Calculation of Capital Requirements

            • CA-6.4.1

              Except as stated in Paragraph CA-6.3.2, conventional bank licensees are required to hold regulatory capital against all of their securitisation exposures and re-securitisation exposures, including those arising from the provision of credit risk mitigants to a securitisation transaction, investments in asset-backed securities, retention of a subordinated tranche, and extension of a liquidity facility or credit enhancement, as set forth in the remainder of this section. Repurchased securitisation exposures must be treated as retained securitisation exposures.

              January 2015

            • (i) Deduction

              • CA-6.4.2

                [This Paragraph has been deleted in January 2015.]

                January 2015

              • CA-6.4.3

                Conventional bank licensees must deduct from CET1 any increase in equity capital resulting from a securitisation transaction, such as that associated with expected future margin income (FMI) resulting in a gain-on-sale. Such an increase in capital is referred to as a "gain-on-sale" for the purposes of the securitisation framework.

                January 2015

              • CA-6.4.4

                [This Paragraph has been deleted in January 2015.]

                January 2015

            • (ii) Implicit Support

              • CA-6.4.5

                When a conventional bank licensee provides implicit support to a securitisation, it must, at a minimum, hold capital against all of the exposures associated with the securitisation transaction as if they had not been securitised. Additionally, conventional bank licensees would not be permitted to recognise in regulatory capital any gain-on-sale, as defined in Paragraph CA-6.4.3. Furthermore, the conventional bank licensee is required to disclose publicly that (a) it has provided non-contractual support and (b) the capital impact of doing so.

                January 2015

          • Operational Requirements for Use of External Credit Assessments

            • CA-6.4.6

              The following operational criteria concerning the use of external credit assessments apply in the standardised approach of the securitisation framework:

              (a) To be eligible for risk-weighting purposes, the external credit assessment must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk exposure the conventional bank licensee has with regard to all payments owed to it. For example, if a conventional bank licensee is owed both principal and interest, the assessment must fully take into account and reflect the credit risk associated with timely repayment of both principal and interest;
              (b) The external credit assessments must be from an eligible ECAI as recognised by the CBB in accordance with Section CA-3.4 with the following exception. In contrast with Subparagraph CA-3.4.1(c), an eligible credit assessment must be publicly available, on a non-selective basis and free of charge. In other words, a rating must be published in an accessible form and included in the ECAI's transition matrix. Also, loss and cashflow analysis as well as sensitivity of ratings to changes in the underlying ratings assumptions must be publicly available. Consequently, ratings that are made available only to the parties to a transaction do not satisfy this requirement;
              (c) Eligible ECAIs must have a demonstrated expertise in assessing securitisations, which may be evidenced by strong market acceptance;
              (d) A conventional bank licensee must apply external credit assessments from eligible ECAIs consistently across a given type of securitisation exposure. Furthermore, a conventional bank licensee cannot use the credit assessments issued by one ECAI for one or more tranches and those of another ECAI for other positions (whether retained or purchased) within the same securitisation structure that may or may not be rated by the first ECAI. Where two or more eligible ECAIs can be used and these assess the credit risk of the same securitisation exposure differently, Paragraphs CA-3.4.5 and CA-3.4.6 will apply;
              (e) Where CRM is provided directly to an SPSV by an eligible guarantor defined in Paragraph CA-4.5.7 and is reflected in the external credit assessment assigned to a securitisation exposure(s), the risk weight associated with that external credit assessment should be used. In order to avoid any double counting, no additional capital recognition is permitted. If the CRM provider is not recognised as an eligible guarantor in Paragraph CA-4.5.7, the covered securitisation exposures should be treated as unrated; and
              (f) In the situation where a credit risk mitigant is not obtained by the SPSV but rather applied to a specific securitisation exposure within a given structure (e.g. ABS tranche), the conventional bank licensee must treat the exposure as if it is unrated and then use the CRM treatment outlined in Chapter CA-4 to recognise the hedge.
              January 2015

            • CA-6.4.6A

              A conventional bank licensee is not permitted to use any external credit assessment for risk-weighting purposes where the assessment is at least partly based on unfunded support provided by the conventional bank licensee. For example, if a conventional bank licensee buys ABCP where it provides an unfunded securitisation exposure extended to the ABCP programme (e.g. liquidity facility or credit enhancement), and that exposure plays a role in determining the credit assessment on the ABCP, the conventional bank licensee must treat the ABCP as if it were not rated. The conventional bank licensee must continue to hold capital against the other securitisation exposures it provides (e.g. against the liquidity facility and/or credit enhancement). The treatment described above is also applicable to exposures held in the trading book. A conventional bank licensee's capital requirement for such exposures held in the trading book can be no less than the amount required under the banking book treatment.

              January 2015

            • CA-6.4.6B

              Conventional bank licensees are permitted to recognise overlap in their exposures, consistent with Paragraph CA-6.4.23. For example, a conventional bank licensee providing a liquidity facility supporting 100% of the ABCP issued by an ABCP programme and purchasing (for its own account) 20% of the outstanding ABCP of that programme could recognise an overlap of 20% (100% liquidity facility + 20% CP held − 100% CP issued = 20%). If a conventional bank licensee provided a liquidity facility that covered 90% of the outstanding ABCP and purchased 20% of the ABCP, the two exposures would be treated as if 10% of the two exposures overlapped (90% liquidity facility + 20% CP held – 100% CP issued = 10%). If a conventional bank licensee provided a liquidity facility that covered 50% of the outstanding ABCP and purchased 20% of the ABCP, the two exposures would be treated as if there were no overlap.

              January 2015

          • Standardised Approach for Securitisation Exposures

            • (i) Scope

              • CA-6.4.7

                Conventional bank licensees that apply the standardised approach to credit risk for the type of underlying exposure(s) securitised must use the standardised approach under the securitisation framework.

                January 2015

            • (ii) Risk Weights

              • CA-6.4.8

                The risk-weighted asset amount of a securitisation exposure is computed by multiplying the amount of the position by the appropriate risk weight determined in accordance with the following tables. For off-balance sheet exposures, conventional bank licensees must apply a CCF and then risk weight the resultant credit equivalent amount. If such an exposure is rated, a CCF of 100% must be applied.

                Long term rating36 Securitisation Exposure Re-securitisation Exposure
                AAA to AA– 20% 40%
                A+ to A– 50% 100%
                BBB+ to BBB– 100% 225%
                BB+ to BB– 350% 650%
                B+ and below or unrated 1,250% 1,250%
                Short term rating Securitisation Exposure Re-securitisation Exposure
                A-1/P-1 20% 40%
                A-2/P-2 50% 100%
                A-3/P-3 100% 225%
                All other ratings or unrated 1,250% 1,250%

                36 The rating designations used in the following tables are for illustrative purposes only and do not indicate any preference for, or endorsement of, any particular external assessment system.

                January 2015

              • CA-6.4.9

                The capital treatment of positions retained by originators, liquidity facilities, credit risk mitigants, and securitisations of revolving exposures are identified separately. The treatment of clean-up calls is provided in Paragraphs CA-6.3.5 to CA-6.3.7.

                January 2015

              • Recognition of Ratings on Below-Investment Grade Exposures

                • CA-6.4.10

                  Only third-party investors, as opposed to conventional bank licensees that serve as originators, may recognise external credit assessments that are equivalent to BB+ to BB- for risk weighting purposes of securitisation exposures.

                  January 2015

              • Originators to Apply 1,250% Risk Weight to all Below-Investment Grade Exposures

                • CA-6.4.11

                  Originating banks as defined in paragraph CA-6.2.1 must risk weight all retained securitisation exposures rated below investment grade (i.e. BBB-) at 1,250%.

                  January 2015

            • (iii) Exceptions to General Treatment of Unrated Securitisation Exposures

              • CA-6.4.12

                As noted in the tables above, unrated securitisation exposures must be risk weighted at 1,250% with the following exceptions: (i) the most senior exposure in a securitisation, (ii) exposures that are in a second loss position or better in ABCP programmes and meet the requirements outlined in Paragraph CA-6.4.15, and (iii) eligible liquidity facilities.

                January 2015

              • Treatment of Unrated Most Senior Securitisation Exposures

                • CA-6.4.13

                  If the most senior exposure in a securitisation of a traditional or synthetic securitisation is unrated, a conventional bank licensee that holds or guarantees such an exposure may determine the risk weight by applying the "look-through" treatment, provided the composition of the underlying pool is known at all times. Conventional bank licensees are not required to consider interest rate or currency swaps when determining whether an exposure is the most senior in a securitisation for the purpose of applying the "look-through" approach.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.14

                  In the look-through treatment, the unrated most senior position receives the average risk weight of the underlying exposures subject to CBB review. Where the conventional bank licensee is unable to determine the risk weights assigned to the underlying credit risk exposures, the unrated position must be risk-weighted at 1,250%.

                  January 2015

              • Treatment of Exposures in a Second Loss Position or Better in ABCP Programmes

                • CA-6.4.15

                  A 1,250% risk weighting is not required for those unrated securitisation exposures provided by sponsoring conventional bank licensees to ABCP programmes that satisfy the following requirements:

                  (a) The exposure is economically in a second loss position or better and the first loss position provides significant credit protection to the second loss position;
                  (b) The associated credit risk is the equivalent of investment grade or better; and
                  (c) The conventional bank licensee holding the unrated securitisation exposure does not retain or provide the first loss position.
                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.16

                  Where these conditions are satisfied, the risk weight is the greater of (i) 100% or (ii) the highest risk weight assigned to any of the underlying individual exposures covered by the facility.

                  January 2015

              • Risk Weights for Eligible Liquidity Facilities

                • CA-6.4.17

                  For eligible liquidity facilities as defined in Paragraph CA-6.4.19 and where the conditions for use of external credit assessments in Paragraph CA-6.4.6 are not met, the risk weight applied to the exposure's credit equivalent amount is equal to the highest risk weight assigned to any of the underlying individual exposures covered by the facility.

                  January 2015

            • (iv) Credit Conversion Factors for Off-Balance Sheet Exposures

              • CA-6.4.18

                For risk-based capital purposes, conventional bank licensees must determine whether, according to the criteria outlined below, an off-balance sheet securitisation exposure qualifies as an 'eligible liquidity facility' or an 'eligible servicer cash advance facility'. All other off-balance sheet securitisation exposures will receive a 100% CCF.

                January 2015

              • Eligible Liquidity Facilities

                • CA-6.4.19

                  Conventional bank licensees are permitted to treat off-balance sheet securitisation exposures as eligible liquidity facilities if the following minimum requirements are satisfied:

                  (a) The facility documentation must clearly identify and limit the circumstances under which it may be drawn. Draws under the facility must be limited to the amount that is likely to be repaid fully from the liquidation of the underlying exposures and any seller-provided credit enhancements. In addition, the facility must not cover any losses incurred in the underlying pool of exposures prior to a draw, or be structured such that draw-down is certain (as indicated by regular or continuous draws);
                  (b) The facility must be subject to an asset quality test that precludes it from being drawn to cover credit risk exposures where the obligor is more than 90 days past due on any material risk in the banking group. In addition, if the exposures that a liquidity facility is required to fund are externally rated securities, the facility can only be used to fund securities that are externally rated investment grade at the time of funding;
                  (c) The facility cannot be drawn after all applicable (e.g. transaction-specific and programme-wide) credit enhancements from which the liquidity would benefit have been exhausted; and
                  (d) Repayment of draws on the facility (i.e. assets acquired under a purchase agreement or loans made under a lending agreement) must not be subordinated to any interests of any note holder in the programme (e.g. ABCP programme) or subject to deferral or waiver.
                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.20

                  Where these conditions are met, the conventional bank licensee may apply a 50% CCF to the eligible facility regardless of the maturity of the facility. However, if an external rating of the facility itself is used for risk-weighting the facility, a 100% CCF must be applied.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.21

                  [This Paragraph has been deleted in January 2012].

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.22

                  [This Paragraph has been deleted in January 2012].

                  January 2015

              • Treatment of Overlapping Exposures

                • CA-6.4.23

                  A conventional bank licensee may provide several types of facilities that can be drawn under various conditions. The same conventional bank licensee may be providing two or more of these facilities. Given the different triggers found in these facilities, it may be the case that a conventional bank licensee provides duplicative coverage to the underlying exposures. In other words, the facilities provided by a conventional bank licensee may overlap since a draw on one facility may preclude (in part) a draw under the other facility. In the case of overlapping facilities provided by the same conventional bank licensee, the conventional bank licensee does not need to hold additional capital for the overlap. Rather, it is only required to hold capital once for the position covered by the overlapping facilities (whether they are liquidity facilities or credit enhancements). Where the overlapping facilities are subject to different conversion factors, the conventional bank licensee must attribute the overlapping part to the facility with the highest conversion factor. However, if overlapping facilities are provided by different banks, each conventional bank licensee must hold capital for the maximum amount of the facility (see also Paragraph CA-6.4.6A).

                  January 2015

              • Eligible Servicer Cash Advance Facilities

                • CA-6.4.24

                  If contractually provided for, servicers may advance cash to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments to investors so long as the servicer is entitled to full reimbursement and this right is senior to other claims on cash flows from the underlying pool of exposures. A 0% CCF must be applied to such un-drawn servicer cash advances or facilities provided that these are unconditionally cancellable without prior notice.

                  January 2015

              • Treatment of Credit Risk Mitigation for Securitisation Exposures

                • CA-6.4.25

                  The treatment below applies to a conventional bank licensee that has obtained a credit risk mitigant on a securitisation exposure. Credit risk mitigants include guarantees, credit derivatives, collateral and on-balance sheet netting. Collateral in this context refers to that used to hedge the credit risk of a securitisation exposure rather than the underlying exposures of the securitisation transaction.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.26

                  When a conventional bank licensee other than the originator provides credit protection to a securitisation exposure, it must calculate a capital requirement on the covered exposure as if it were an investor in that securitisation. If a conventional bank licensee provides protection to an unrated credit enhancement, it must treat the credit protection provided as if it were directly holding the unrated credit enhancement.

                  January 2015

              • Collateral

                • CA-6.4.27

                  Eligible collateral is limited to that recognised under the standardised approach for CRM (Paragraphs CA-4.3.1 and CA-4.3.2). Collateral pledged by SPSVs may be recognised.

                  January 2015

              • Guarantees and Credit Derivatives

                • CA-6.4.28

                  Credit protection provided by the entities listed in Paragraph CA-4.5.7 may be recognised. SPSVs cannot be recognised as eligible guarantors. A conventional bank licensee must not recognise any support provided by itself (see also Paragraph CA-6.4.6).

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.29

                  Where guarantees or credit derivatives fulfil the minimum operational conditions as specified in Paragraphs CA-4.5.1 to CA-4.5.6, conventional bank licensees can take account of such credit protection in calculating capital requirements for securitisation exposures.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.30

                  Capital requirements for the guaranteed/protected portion will be calculated according to CRM for the standardised approach as specified in Paragraphs CA-4.5.8 to CA-4.5.13.

                  January 2015

              • Maturity Mismatches

                • CA-6.4.31

                  For the purpose of setting regulatory capital against a maturity mismatch, the capital requirement will be determined in accordance with Paragraphs CA-4.6.1 to CA-4.6.4. When the exposures being hedged have different maturities, the longest maturity must be used.

                  January 2015

            • (vi) Capital Requirement for Early Amortisation Provisions

              • Scope

                • CA-6.4.32

                  An originating bank is required to hold capital against all or a portion of the investors' interest (i.e. against both the drawn and un-drawn balances related to the securitised exposures) when:

                  (a) It sells exposures into a structure that contains an early amortisation feature; and
                  (b) The exposures sold are of a revolving nature. These involve exposures where the borrower is permitted to vary the drawn amount and repayments within an agreed limit under a line of credit (e.g. credit card receivables and corporate loan commitments).
                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.33

                  The capital requirement should reflect the type of mechanism through which an early amortisation is triggered.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.34

                  For securitisation structures wherein the underlying pool comprises revolving and term exposures, a conventional bank licensee must apply the relevant early amortisation treatment (outlined in Paragraphs CA-6.4.36 to CA-6.4.47) to that portion of the underlying pool containing revolving exposures.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.35

                  Conventional bank licensees are not required to calculate a capital requirement for early amortisations in the following situations:

                  (a) Replenishment structures where the underlying exposures do not revolve and the early amortisation ends the ability of the conventional bank licensee to add new exposures;
                  (b) Transactions of revolving assets containing early amortisation features that mimic term structures (i.e. where the risk on the underlying facilities does not return to the originating bank);
                  (c) Structures where a bank securitises one or more credit line(s) and where investors remain fully exposed to future draws by borrowers even after an early amortisation event has occurred; and
                  (d) The early amortisation clause is solely triggered by events not related to the performance of the securitised assets or the selling bank, such as material changes in tax laws or regulations.
                  January 2015

              • Maximum Capital Requirement

                • CA-6.4.36

                  For a conventional bank licensee subject to the early amortisation treatment, the total capital charge for all of its positions will be subject to a maximum capital requirement (i.e. a 'cap') equal to the greater of (i) that required for retained securitisation exposures, or (ii) the capital requirement that would apply had the exposures not been securitised. In addition, conventional bank licensees must deduct the entire amount of any gain-on-sale and credit enhancing I/Os arising from the securitisation transaction in accordance with Paragraphs CA-6.4.2 to CA-6.4.4.

                  January 2015

              • Mechanics

                • CA-6.4.37

                  The originator's capital charge for the investors' interest is determined as the product of (a) the investors' interest, (b) the appropriate CCF (as discussed below), and (c) the risk weight appropriate to the underlying exposure type, as if the exposures had not been securitised. As described below, the CCFs depend upon whether the early amortisation repays investors through a controlled or non-controlled mechanism. They also differ according to whether the securitised exposures are uncommitted retail credit lines (e.g. credit card receivables) or other credit lines (e.g. revolving corporate facilities). A line is considered uncommitted if it is unconditionally cancellable without prior notice.

                  January 2015

            • (vii) Determination of CCFs for Controlled Early Amortisation Features

              • CA-6.4.38

                An early amortisation feature is considered controlled when the definition as specified in Paragraph CA-6.2.6 is satisfied.

                January 2015

              • Uncommitted Retail Exposures

                • CA-6.4.39

                  For uncommitted retail credit lines (e.g. credit card receivables) in securitisations containing controlled early amortisation features, conventional bank licensees must compare the three-month average excess spread defined in Paragraph CA-6.2.8 to the point at which the conventional bank licensee is required to trap excess spread as economically required by the structure (i.e. excess spread trapping point).

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.40

                  In cases where such a transaction does not require excess spread to be trapped, the trapping point is deemed to be 4.5 percentage points.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.41

                  The conventional bank licensee must divide the excess spread level by the transaction's excess spread trapping point to determine the appropriate segments and apply the corresponding conversion factors, as outlined in the following table.

                  Controlled Early Amortisation Features

                    Uncommitted Committed
                  Retail credit lines 3-month average excess spread Credit Conversion Factor (CCF)

                  133.33% of trapping point or more
                  0% CCF

                  less than 133.33% to 100% of trapping point
                  1% CCF

                  less than 100% to 75% of trapping point
                  2% CCF

                  less than 75% to 50% of trapping point
                  10% CCF

                  less than 50% to 25% of trapping point
                  20% CCF

                  less than 25%
                  40% CCF
                  90% CCF
                  Non-retail credit lines 90% CCF 90% CCF
                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.42

                  Conventional bank licensees are required to apply the conversion factors set out above for controlled mechanisms to the investors' interest referred to in Paragraph CA-6.4.37.

                  January 2015

              • Other Exposures

                • CA-6.4.43

                  All other securitised revolving exposures (i.e. those that are committed and all non-retail exposures) with controlled early amortisation features will be subject to a CCF of 90% against the off-balance sheet exposures.

                  January 2015

            • (viii) Determination of CCFs for Non-Controlled Early Amortisation Features

              • CA-6.4.44

                Early amortisation features that do not satisfy the definition of a controlled early amortisation as specified in Paragraph CA-6.2.6 will be considered non-controlled and treated as follows.

                January 2015

              • Uncommitted Retail Exposures

                • CA-6.4.45

                  For uncommitted retail credit lines (e.g. credit card receivables) in securitisations containing non-controlled early amortisation features, conventional bank licensees must make the comparison described in Paragraphs CA-6.4.38 and CA-6.4.40.

                  January 2015

                • CA-6.4.46

                  The conventional bank licensee must divide the excess spread level by the transaction's excess spread trapping point to determine the appropriate segments and apply the corresponding conversion factors, as outlined in the following table.

                  Non-Controlled Early Amortisation Features

                    Uncommitted Committed
                  Retail credit lines 3-month average excess spread
                  Credit Conversion Factor (CCF)

                  133.33% or more of trapping point
                  0% CCF

                  less than 133.33% to 100% of trapping point
                  5% CCF

                  less than 100% to 75% of trapping point
                  15% CCF

                  less than 75% to 50% of trapping point
                  50% CCF

                  less than 50% of trapping point
                  100% CCF
                  100% CCF
                  Non-retail credit lines 100% CCF 100% CCF
                  January 2015

              • Other Exposures

                • CA-6.4.47

                  All other securitised revolving exposures (i.e. those that are committed and all non-retail exposures) with non-controlled early amortisation features will be subject to a CCF of 100% against the off-balance sheet exposures.

                  January 2015

              • [Paragraphs CA-6.4.48 to CA-6.4.88 were deleted in January 2015]

    • PART 3: PART 3: Other Risks

      • CA-7 CA-7 Operational Risk

        • CA-7.1 CA-7.1 The Measurement Methodologies

          • CA-7.1.1

            The framework outlined below presents two methods for calculating operational risk capital charges in a continuum of increasing sophistication and risk sensitivity:

            (a) The Basic Indicator Approach; and
            (b) The Standardised Approach.
            January 2015

          • CA-7.1.2

            Conventional bank licensees are encouraged to move towards standardised approach as they develop more sophisticated operational risk measurement systems and practices.

            January 2015

          • CA-7.1.3

            A conventional bank licensee will not be allowed to choose to revert to basic indicator approach once it has been approved for standardised approach without CBB's approval. However, if CBB determines that a conventional bank licensee using standardised approach no longer meets the qualifying criteria for standardised approach, it may require the conventional bank licensee to revert to basic indicator approach for some or all of its operations, until it meets the conditions specified by the CBB for returning to standardised approach.

            January 2015

          • Basic Indicator Approach

            • CA-7.1.4

              Conventional bank licensees applying the Basic Indicator Approach must hold capital for operational risk equal to the average over the previous three years of a fixed percentage (denoted alpha) of positive annual gross income. Figures for any year in which annual gross income is negative or zero must be excluded from both the numerator and denominator when calculating the average.37 The charge may be expressed as follows:
              KBIA = [∑(GI1.nα)]/n

              where:

              KBIA = the capital charge under the Basic Indicator Approach

              GI = annual gross income, where positive, over the previous three years (audited financial years)

              n = number of the previous three years for which gross income is positive

              α = 15%, relating the industry wide level of required capital to the industry wide level of the indicator.


              37 If negative gross income distorts a bank's Pillar 1 capital charge, CBB will consider appropriate supervisory action.

              January 2015

            • CA-7.1.5

              Gross income is defined as net interest income plus net non-interest income.38 This measure should: (i) be gross of any provisions (e.g. for unpaid interest); (ii) be gross of operating expenses, including fees paid to outsourcing service providers39; (iii) exclude realised profits/losses from the sale of securities in the banking book;40 and (iv) exclude extraordinary or irregular items as well as income derived from insurance.


              38 As defined under International Financial Reporting Standards as applicable in the Kingdom of Bahrain.

              39 In contrast to fees paid for services that are outsourced, fees received by banks that provide outsourcing services shall be included in the definition of gross income.

              40 Realised profits/losses from securities classified as "held to maturity" and "available for sale", which typically constitute items of the banking book, are also excluded from the definition of gross income.

              January 2015

            • CA-7.1.6

              In case of a bank with negative gross income for the previous three years, a newly licensed bank with less than 3 years of operations, or a merger, acquisition or material restructuring, the CBB shall discuss with the concerned licensed bank an alternative method for calculating the operational risk capital charge. For example, a newly licensed bank may be required to use the projected gross income in its 3-year business plan. Another approach that the CBB may consider is to require such licensed banks to observe a higher CAR.

              January 2015

            • CA-7.1.7

              Conventional bank licensees applying this approach are encouraged to comply with the principles set in Section OM-8.2 of Operational Risk Management Module.

              January 2015

          • The Standardised Approach

            • CA-7.1.8

              In the Standardised Approach, banks' activities are divided into eight business lines: corporate finance, trading & sales, retail banking, commercial banking, payment & settlement, agency services, asset management, and retail brokerage. The business lines are defined in detail in Appendix CA-9. The conventional bank licensee must meet the requirements detailed in Section OM-8.3 to qualify for the use of standardised approach.

              January 2015

            • CA-7.1.9

              Within each business line, gross income is a broad indicator that serves as a proxy for the scale of business operations and thus the likely scale of operational risk exposure within each of these business lines. The capital charge for each business line is calculated by multiplying gross income by a factor (denoted beta) assigned to that business line. Beta serves as a proxy for the industry-wide relationship between the operational risk loss experience for a given business line and the aggregate level of gross income for that business line. It should be noted that in the Standardised Approach, gross income is measured for each business line, not the whole institution, i.e. in corporate finance, the indicator is the gross income generated in the corporate finance business line. An example of calculation of gross income is provided in Appendix CA-10.

              January 2015

            • CA-7.1.10

              The total capital charge is calculated as the three-year average of the simple summation of the regulatory capital charges across each of the business lines in each year. In any given year, negative capital charges (resulting from negative gross income) in any business line can not off-set positive capital charges in other business lines. Where the aggregate capital charge across all business lines within a given year is negative, then the input to the numerator for that year will be zero.41 The total capital charge may be expressed as:

              KTSA = {∑ years 1-3 max[(GI1-8 X β1-8, 0]}/3

              where:

              KTSA = the capital charge under the Standardised Approach

              GI 1-8 = annual gross income in a given year, as defined above in the Basic Indicator Approach, for each of the eight business lines

              β1-8 = a fixed percentage, relating the level of required capital to the level of the gross income for each of the eight business lines.

              The values of the betas are detailed below.

              Business Lines Beta Factors
              Corporate Finance (β1) 18%
              Trading and Sales (β2) 18%
              Retail Banking (β3) 12%
              Commercial Banking (β4) 15%
              Payment and Settlement (β5) 18%
              Agency Services (β6) 15%
              Asset Management (β7) 12%
              Retail Brokerage (β8) 12%

              41 As under the Basic Indicator Approach, if negative gross income distorts a bank's Pillar 1 capital charge under the Standardised Approach, CBB will consider appropriate supervisory action.

              January 2015

      • CA-8 CA-8 Market Risk — Trading Book

        • CA-8.1 CA-8.1 Definition of the Trading Book

          • CA-8.1.1

            "Market risk" is defined as the risk of losses in on- and off-balance sheet positions arising from movements in market prices. The risks that are subject to the market risk capital requirement are:

            (a) Equity position risk in the trading book (see Chapter CA-10);42
            (b) Interest rate risk in trading positions in financial instruments in the trading book (see Chapter CA-9);
            (c) Foreign exchange risk (see Chapter CA-11); and
            (d) Commodities risk (see Chapter CA-12).

            42 Equity positions in the banking book are dealt with under Paragraph CA-3.2.26.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.2

            A trading book consists of positions in financial instruments and commodities held either with trading intent or in order to hedge other elements of the trading book, along with open foreign exchange positions in both the banking and the trading book. To be eligible for trading book capital treatment, financial instruments must either be free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability or able to be hedged completely. In addition, positions must be frequently and accurately valued, and the portfolio must be actively managed (open equity stakes in hedge funds, private equity investments, positions in a securitisation warehouse and real estate holdings do not meet the definition of the trading book, owing to significant constraints on the ability of banks to liquidate these positions and value them reliably on a daily basis. Such holdings must therefore be held in the conventional bank licensee's banking book and treated as equity holding in corporates, except real estate which must be treated as per Paragraph CA-3.2.29).

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.3

            A financial instrument is any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity. Financial instruments include both primary financial instruments (or cash instruments) and derivative financial instruments. A financial asset is any asset that is cash, the right to receive cash or another financial asset; or the contractual right to exchange financial assets on potentially favourable terms, or an equity instrument. A financial liability is the contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset or to exchange financial liabilities under conditions that are potentially unfavourable.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.4

            Positions held with trading intent are those held intentionally for short-term resale and/or with the intent of benefiting from actual or expected short-term price movements or to lock in arbitrage profits, and may include for example proprietary positions, positions arising from client servicing (e.g. matched principal broking) and market making. It is therefore possible that conventional bank licensees may sometimes not have a trading book as defined above. Nonetheless the conventional bank licensee's strategy and business plan must take account of the requirements of this Chapter in case a conventional bank licensee does take on positions with trading intent.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.5

            Conventional bank licensees must have clearly defined policies and procedures for determining which exposures to include in, and to exclude from, the trading book for purposes of calculating their regulatory capital, to ensure compliance with the criteria for trading book set forth in this Section and taking into account the conventional bank licensee's risk management capabilities and practices. The conventional bank licensee must have well-documented procedures to comply with stated policies, which must be fully documented and subject to periodic internal audit.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.6

            The policies and procedures referred to in Paragraph CA-8.1.5 must, at a minimum, address the following general considerations:

            (a) The activities the conventional bank licensee considers to be trading and as constituting part of the trading book for regulatory capital purposes;
            (b) The extent to which an exposure can be marked-to-market daily by reference to an active, liquid two-way market;
            (c) For exposures that are marked-to-model, the extent to which the conventional bank licensee can:
            (i) Identify the material risks of the exposure;
            (ii) Hedge the material risks of the exposure and the extent to which hedging instruments would have an active, liquid two-way market; and
            (iii) Derive reliable estimates for the key assumptions and parameters used in the model;
            (d) The extent to which the conventional bank licensee can and is required to generate valuations for the exposure that can be validated externally in a consistent manner;
            (e) The extent to which legal restrictions or other operational requirements would impede the conventional bank licensee's ability to effect an immediate liquidation of the exposure;
            (f) The extent to which the conventional bank licensee is required to, and can, actively risk manage the exposure within its trading operations; and
            (g) The extent to which the conventional bank licensee may transfer risk or exposures between the banking and the trading books and criteria for such transfers.

            The list above is not intended to provide a series of tests that a product or group of related products must pass to be eligible for inclusion in the trading book. Rather, the list provides a minimum set of key points that must be addressed by the policies and procedures for overall management of a conventional bank licensee's trading book.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.7

            The basic requirements for positions eligible to receive trading book capital treatment are as follows:

            (a) Clearly documented trading strategy for the position/instrument or portfolios, approved by senior management (which would include expected holding horizon);
            (b) Clearly defined policies and procedures for the active management of the position, which must include:
            (i) Positions are managed on a trading desk;
            (ii) Position limits are set and monitored for appropriateness;
            (iii) Dealers have the autonomy to enter into/manage the position within agreed limits and according to the agreed strategy;
            (iv) Positions are marked to market at least daily and when marking to model the parameters must be assessed on a daily basis;
            (v) Positions are reported to senior management as an integral part of the institution's risk management process; and
            (vi) Positions are actively monitored with reference to market information sources (assessment must be made of the market liquidity or the ability to hedge positions or the portfolio risk profiles). This would include assessing the quality and availability of market inputs to the valuation process, level of market turnover, sizes of positions traded in the market, etc.; and
            (c) Clearly defined policy and procedures to monitor the positions against the conventional bank licensee's trading strategy including the monitoring of turnover and stale positions in the conventional bank licensee's trading book.
            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.8

            When a conventional bank licensee hedges a banking book credit risk exposure using a credit derivative booked in its trading book (i.e. using an internal hedge), the banking book exposure is not deemed to be hedged for capital purposes unless the conventional bank licensee purchases from an eligible third party protection provider a credit derivative meeting the requirements of Paragraph CA-4.5.3 vis-à-vis the banking book exposure. Where such third party protection is purchased and is recognised as a hedge of a banking book exposure for regulatory capital purposes, neither the internal nor external credit derivative hedge would be included in the trading book for regulatory capital purposes.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.8A

            Positions in the conventional bank licensee's own regulatory capital instruments are deducted from capital (as detailed in Chapter CA-2.4). Positions in other banks', securities firms', and other financial entities' eligible regulatory capital instruments, as well as intangible assets, are subject to the treatment set down in Chapter CA-2.4.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.9

            Term trading-related repo-style transactions that a conventional bank licensee accounts for in its banking book may be included in the conventional bank licensee's trading book for regulatory capital purposes so long as all such repo-style transactions are included. For this purpose, trading-related repo-style transactions are defined as only those that meet the requirements of Paragraphs CA-8.1.4 and CA-8.1.7 and both legs are in the form of either cash or securities includable in the trading book.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.10

            Regardless of where they are booked, all repo-style transactions are subject to a banking book counterparty credit risk charge.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.1.11

            For the purposes of this framework, the correlation trading portfolio incorporates securitisation exposures and n-th-to-default credit derivatives that meet the following criteria:

            (a) The positions are neither re-securitisation positions, nor derivatives of securitisation exposures that do not provide a pro-rata share in the proceeds of a securitisation tranche (this therefore excludes options on a securitisation tranche, or a synthetically leveraged super-senior tranche); and
            (b) All reference entities are single-name products, including single-name credit derivatives, for which a liquid two-way market exists. This will include commonly traded indices based on these reference entities. A two-way market is deemed to exist where there are independent bona fide offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations can be determined within one day and settled at such price within a relatively short time conforming to trade custom.

            Positions which reference an underlying that would be treated as a retail exposure, a residential mortgage exposure or a commercial mortgage exposure under the standardised approach to credit risk are not included in the correlation trading portfolio. Positions which reference a claim on a special purpose entity are not included either. A conventional bank licensee may also include in the correlation trading portfolio positions that hedge the positions described above and which are neither securitisation exposures nor n-th-to-default credit derivatives and where a liquid two-way market as described above exists for the instrument or its underlyings.

            January 2015

        • CA-8.2

          [This Chapter has been moved to Chapter CA-16 in January 2012]

          January 2015

        • CA-8.3 CA-8.3 Treatment of Counterparty Credit Risk in the Trading Book

          • CA-8.3.1

            Conventional bank licensees must calculate the counterparty credit risk charge for OTC derivatives, repo-style and other transactions booked in the trading book, separate from the capital charge for general market risk and specific risk.43 The risk weights to be used in this calculation must be consistent with those used for calculating the capital requirements in the banking book. Thus, conventional bank licensees must use the standardised approach risk weights in the trading book.


            43 The treatment for unsettled foreign exchange and securities trades is set forth in Paragraph CA-3.3.13.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.3.2

            In the trading book, for repo-style transactions, all instruments, which are included in the trading book, may be used as eligible collateral. Those instruments which fall outside the banking book definition of eligible collateral are subject to a haircut at the level applicable to non-main index equities listed on recognised exchanges (as noted in Paragraph CA-4.3.7). Where conventional bank licensees are applying a VaR approach to measuring exposure for repo-style transactions, they also may apply this approach in the trading book in accordance with Paragraphs CA-4.3.22 to CA-4.3.25 and Appendix CA-2.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.3.3

            The calculation of the counterparty credit risk charge for collateralised OTC derivative transactions is the same as the rules prescribed for such transactions booked in the banking book.

            January 2015

          • CA-8.3.4

            The calculation of the counterparty charge for repo-style transactions must follow the rules in Paragraphs CA-4.3.3 to CA-4.3.25 and Appendix CA-2.

            January 2015

          • Credit Derivatives

            • CA-8.3.5

              The counterparty credit risk charge for single name credit derivative transactions in the trading book must be calculated applying the following potential future exposure add-on factors:

                Protection buyer Protection seller
              Total Return Swap    
              "Qualifying" reference obligation 5% 5%
              "Non-qualifying" reference obligation 10% 10%
              Credit Default Swap    
              "Qualifying" reference obligation 5% 5%**
              "Non-qualifying" reference obligation 10% 10%**

              There will be no difference depending on residual maturity.

              The definition of "qualifying" is the same as for the treatment of specific risk in chapter CA-9.

              ** The protection seller of a credit default swap is only subject to the add-on factor where it is subject to closeout upon the insolvency of the protection buyer while the underlying is still solvent. Add-on must then be capped to the amount of unpaid premiums.

              January 2015

            • CA-8.3.6

              Where the credit derivative is a first to default transaction, the add-on is determined by the lowest credit quality underlying in the basket, i.e. if there are any non-qualifying items in the basket, the non-qualifying reference obligation add-on is used. For second and subsequent to default transactions, underlying assets must continue to be allocated according to the credit quality, i.e. the second lowest credit quality determines the add-on for a second to default transaction etc.

              January 2015

      • CA-9 CA-9 Market Risk — Interest Rate Risk — (STA)

        • CA-9.1 CA-9.1 Introduction

          • CA-9.1.1

            This Chapter describes the standardised approach for the measurement of the interest rate risk in the conventional bank licensee's trading book, in order to determine the capital requirement for this risk. The interest rate exposure captured includes exposure arising from interest-bearing and discounted financial instruments, derivatives which are based on the movement of interest rates, foreign exchange forwards, and interest rate exposure embedded in derivatives which are based on non-interest rate related instruments.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.2

            For the guidance of the conventional bank licensees, and without being exhaustive, the following list includes financial instruments in the trading book to which interest rate risk capital requirements will apply, irrespective of whether or not the instruments carry coupons:

            (a) Bonds/loan stocks, debentures etc;
            (b) Non-convertible preference shares;
            (c) Convertible securities such as preference shares and bonds, which are treated as debt instruments44;
            (d) Mortgage backed securities and other securitised assets45;
            (e) Certificates of Deposit;
            (f) Treasury bills, local authority bills, banker's acceptances;
            (g) Commercial paper;
            (h) Euronotes, medium term notes, etc;
            (i) Floating rate notes, FRCDs etc;
            (j) Foreign exchange forward positions;
            (k) Derivatives based on the above instruments and interest rates; and
            (l) Interest rate exposure embedded in other financial instruments.

            44 See Section CA-10.1 for an explanation of the circumstances in which convertible securities should be treated as equity instruments. In other circumstances, they should be treated as debt instruments.

            45 Traded mortgage securities and mortgage derivative products possess unique characteristics because of the risk of pre-payment. It is possible that including such products within the standardised methodology as if they were similar to other securitised assets may not capture all the risks of holding positions in them. Banks which have traded mortgage securities and mortgage derivative products should discuss their proposed treatment with the CBB and obtain the CBB's prior written approval for it.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.3

            A security which is the subject of a repurchase or securities lending agreement must be treated as if it were still owned by the lender of the security, i.e. it is treated in the same manner as other securities positions.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.4

            The minimum capital requirement is expressed in terms of two separately calculated charges, one applying to the "specific risk" of each security, whether it is a short or a long position, and the other to the interest rate risk in the portfolio (termed "general market risk") where long and short positions in different securities or instruments can be offset. The conventional bank licensees must, however, determine the specific risk capital charge for the correlation trading portfolio as follows: The conventional bank licensee computes (i) the total specific risk capital charges that would apply just to the net long positions from the net long correlation trading exposures combined, and (ii) the total specific risk capital charges that would apply just to the net short positions from the net short correlation trading exposures combined. The larger of these total amounts is then the specific risk capital charge for the correlation trading portfolio.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.4A

            [This Paragraph was deleted in January 2015.]

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.5

            The specific risk capital requirement recognises that individual instruments may change in value for reasons other than shifts in the yield curve of a given currency. The general risk capital requirement reflects the price change of these products caused by parallel and non-parallel shifts in the yield curve, as well as the difficulty of constructing perfect hedges.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.6

            There is general market risk inherent in all interest rate risk positions. This may be accompanied by one or more out of specific interest rate risk, counterparty risk, equity risk and foreign exchange risk, depending on the nature of the position. Conventional bank licensees must consider carefully which risks are generated by each individual position. It should be recognised that the identification of the risks will require the application of the appropriate level of technical skills and professional judgment.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.1.7

            Conventional bank licensees which have the intention and capability to use internal models for the measurement of general interest rate risk and, hence, for the calculation of the capital requirement, must seek the prior written approval of the CBB for those models. The CBB's detailed rules for the recognition and use of internal models are included in Chapter CA-14. Conventional bank licensees which do not use internal models must adopt the standardised approach to calculate the interest rate risk capital requirement, as set out in detail in this Chapter.

            January 2015

        • CA-9.2 CA-9.2 Specific Risk Calculation

          • CA-9.2.1

            The capital charge for specific risk is designed to protect against a movement in the price of an individual instrument, owing to factors related to the individual issuer.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.2

            In measuring the specific risk for interest rate related instruments, a conventional bank licensee may net, by value, long and short positions (including positions in derivatives) in the same debt instrument to generate the individual net position in that instrument. Instruments will be considered to be the same where the issuer is the same, they have an equivalent ranking in a liquidation, and the currency, the coupon and the maturity are the same.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.3

            The specific risk capital requirement is determined by weighting the current market value of each individual net position, whether long or short, according to its allocation among the following broad categories:

            Categories External credit assessment Specific risk capital charge
            Government (including GCC governments) AAA to AA-

            A+ to BBB-








            BB+ to B-

            Below B-

            Unrated
            0%

            0.25% (residual term to final maturity 6 months or less)

            1.00% (residual term to final maturity greater than 6 and up to and including 24 months)

            1.60% (residual term to final maturity exceeding 24 months)

            8.00%

            12.00%

            8.00%
            Qualifying   0.25% (residual term to final maturity 6 months or less)

            1.00% (residual term to final maturity greater than 6 and up to and including 24 months)

            1.60% (residual term to final maturity exceeding 24 months)
            Other Similar to credit risk charges under the standardised approach, e.g.:

            BB+ to BB-

            Below BB-

            Unrated
            8.00%

            12.00%

            8.00%
            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.4

            When the government paper is denominated in the domestic currency and funded by the conventional bank licensee in the same currency, a 0% specific risk charge may be applied.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.5

            Central "government" debt instruments include all forms of government paper, including bonds, treasury bills and other short-term instruments.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.6

            However the CBB reserves the right to apply a specific risk weight to securities issued by certain foreign governments, especially to securities denominated in a currency other than that of the issuing government.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.2.7

            The "qualifying" category includes securities issued by or fully guaranteed by public sector entities and multilateral development banks (refer to Paragraph CA-3.2.8), plus other securities that are:

            (a) Rated investment grade by at least two internationally recognised credit rating agencies (to be agreed with the CBB);
            (b) Deemed to be of comparable investment quality by the reporting bank, provided that the issuer is rated investment grade by at least two internationally recognised credit rating agencies (to be agreed with the CBB);
            (c) Rated investment grade by one credit rating agency and not less than investment grade by any internationally recognised credit rating agencies (to be agreed with the CBB); or
            (d) Unrated (subject to the approval of the CBB), but deemed to be of comparable investment quality by the reporting bank and where the issuer has securities listed on a recognised stock exchange, may also be included.
            January 2015

          • Specific Risk Rules for Unrated Debt Securities

            • CA-9.2.8

              Unrated securities may be included in the "qualifying" category when they are (subject to CBB's approval) unrated, but deemed to be of comparable investment quality by the reporting bank, and the issuer has securities listed on a recognised stock exchange.

              January 2015

          • Specific Risk Rules for Non-qualifying Issuers

            • CA-9.2.9

              Instruments issued by a non-qualifying issuer receive the same specific risk charge as a non-investment grade corporate borrower under the standardised approach for credit risk under Chapter CA-4.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.10

              However, since this may in certain cases considerably underestimate the specific risk for debt instruments which have a high yield to redemption relative to government debt securities, CBB will have the discretion, on a case by case basis:

              (a) To apply a higher specific risk charge to such instruments; and/or
              (b) To disallow offsetting for the purposes of defining the extent of general market risk between such instruments and any other debt instruments.
              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.11

              In that respect, securitisation exposures subject to the securitisation framework set forth in Chapter CA-6 (e.g. equity tranches that absorb first loss), as well as securitisation exposures that are unrated liquidity lines or letters of credit must be subject to a capital charge that is no less than the charge set forth in the securitisation framework.

              January 2015

          • Specific Risk Rules for Positions Covered under the Securitisation Framework

            • CA-9.2.11A

              The specific risk of securitisation positions as defined in Paragraphs CA-6.1.1 to CA-6.1.6 which are held in the trading book is to be calculated according to the method used for such positions in the banking book unless specified otherwise below. To that effect, the risk weight has to be calculated as specified below and applied to the net positions in securitisation instruments in the trading book. The total specific risk capital charge for the correlation trading portfolio is to be computed according to Paragraph CA-9.2.17, and the total specific risk capital charge for securitisation exposures is to be computed according to Paragraph CA-9.1.4.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.11B

              The specific risk capital charges for positions covered under the standardised approach for securitisation exposures are defined in the table below. These charges must be applied by conventional bank licensees using the standardised approach for credit risk. For positions with long-term ratings of B+ and below and short-term ratings other than A-1/P-1, A-2/P-2, A-3/P-3, a 1,250% risk weighting as defined in Paragraph CA-6.4.8 is required. A 1,250% weighting is also required for unrated positions with the exception of the circumstances described in Paragraphs CA-6.4.12 to CA-6.4.16. The operational requirements for the recognition of external credit assessments outlined in Paragraph CA-6.4.6 apply.

              January 2015

          • Specific Risk Capital Charges under the Standardised Approach Based on External Credit Ratings

            External Credit Assessment AAA to AA- A-1/P-1 A+ to A- A-2/P-2 BBB+ BBB- A-3/P-3 BB+ to BB- Below BB- and below A-3/P-3 or unrated
            Securitisation Exposures 1.6% 4% 8% 28% Deduction
            Re-securitisation Exposures 3.2% 8% 18% 52% Deduction
            January 2015

            • CA-9.2.11C

              The specific risk capital charges for unrated positions under the securitisation framework as defined in Paragraphs CA-6.1.1 to CA-6.1.6 must be calculated as set out below, subject to CBB approval. The capital charge can be calculated as 12% of the weighted average risk weight that would be applied to the securitised exposures under the standardised approach, multiplied by a concentration ratio. If the concentration ratio is 12.5 or higher the position has to be deducted from capital as defined in Paragraph CA-6.4.2. This concentration ratio is equal to the sum of the nominal amounts of all the tranches divided by the sum of the nominal amounts of the tranches junior to or pari passu with the tranche in which the position is held including that tranche itself.

              The resulting specific risk capital charge must not be lower than any specific risk capital charge applicable to a rated more senior tranche. If a conventional bank licensee is unable to determine the specific risk capital charge as described above or prefers not to apply the treatment described above to a position, it must deduct that position from capital.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.11D

              A position subject to deduction according to Paragraphs CA-9.2.11B to CA-9.2.11C may be excluded from the calculation of the capital charge for general market risk.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.11E

              [This Paragraph was deleted in January 2015.]

              January 2015

          • Specific Risk Capital Charges for Positions Hedged by Credit Derivatives

            • CA-9.2.12

              Full allowance will be recognised when the values of two legs (i.e. long and short) always move in the opposite direction and broadly to the same extent. This would be the case in the following situations:

              (a) The two legs consist of completely identical instruments; or
              (b) A long cash position is hedged by a total rate of return swap (or vice versa) and there is an exact match between the reference obligation and the underlying exposure (i.e. the cash position)46.

              In these cases, no specific risk capital requirement applies to both sides of the position.


              46 The maturity of the swap itself may be different from that of the underlying exposure.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.13

              An 80% offset will be recognised when the value of two legs (i.e. long and short) always moves in the opposite direction but not broadly to the same extent. This would be the case when a long cash position is hedged by a credit default swap or a credit linked note (or vice versa) and there is an exact match in terms of the reference obligation, the maturity of both the reference obligation and the credit derivative, and the currency to the underlying exposure. In addition, key features of the credit derivative contract (e.g. credit event definitions, settlement mechanisms) should not cause the price movement of the credit derivative to materially deviate from the price movements of the cash position. To the extent that the transaction transfers risk (i.e. taking account of restrictive payout provisions such as fixed payouts and materiality thresholds), an 80% specific risk offset will be applied to the side of the transaction with the higher capital charge, while the specific risk requirement on the other side will be zero.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.14

              Partial allowance will be recognised when the value of the two legs (i.e. long and short) usually moves in the opposite direction. This would be the case in the following situations:

              (a) The position is captured in Paragraph CA-9.2.12 under (b), but there is an asset mismatch between the reference obligation and the underlying exposure. Nonetheless, the position meets the requirements in Paragraph CA-4.5.3 (g);
              (b) The position is captured in Paragraph CA-9.2.12 under (a) or CA-9.2.13 but there is a currency or maturity mismatch47 between the credit protection and the underlying asset; or
              (c) The position is captured in Paragraph CA-9.2.13 but there is an asset mismatch between the cash position and the credit derivative. However, the underlying asset is included in the (deliverable) obligations in the credit derivative documentation.

              47 Currency mismatches should feed into the normal reporting of foreign exchange risk.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.15

              In each of these cases in Paragraphs CA-9.2.12 to CA-9.2.14, the following rule applies. Rather than adding the specific risk capital requirements for each side of the transaction (i.e. the credit protection and the underlying asset) only the higher of the two capital requirements will apply.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.16

              In cases not captured in Paragraphs CA-9.2.12 to CA-9.2.14, a specific risk capital charge must be assessed against both sides of the position.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.2.17

              An n-th-to-default credit derivative is a contract where the payoff is based on the n-th asset to default in a basket of underlying reference instruments. Once the n-th default occurs the transaction terminates and is settled:

              (a) The capital charge for specific risk for a first-to-default credit derivative is the lesser of (1) the sum of the specific risk capital charges for the individual reference credit instruments in the basket, and (2) the maximum possible credit event payment under the contract. Where a conventional bank licensee has a risk position in one of the reference credit instruments underlying a first-to-default credit derivative and this credit derivative hedges the conventional bank licensee's risk position, the conventional bank licensee is allowed to reduce with respect to the hedged amount both the capital charge for specific risk for the reference credit instrument and that part of the capital charge for specific risk for the credit derivative that relates to this particular reference credit instrument. Where a conventional bank licensee has multiple risk positions in reference credit instruments underlying a first-to-default credit derivative this offset is allowed only for that underlying reference credit instrument having the lowest specific risk capital charge;
              (b) The capital charge for specific risk for an n-th-to-default credit derivative with n greater than one is the lesser of (1) the sum of the specific risk capital charges for the individual reference credit instruments in the basket but disregarding the (n-1) obligations with the lowest specific risk capital charges; and (2) the maximum possible credit event payment under the contract. For n-th-to-default credit derivatives with n greater than 1 no offset of the capital charge for specific risk with any underlying reference credit instrument is allowed;
              (c) If a first or other n-th-to-default credit derivative is externally rated, then the protection seller must calculate the specific risk capital charge using the rating of the derivative and apply the respective securitisation risk weights as specified in Paragraph CA-9.2.11B; and
              (d) The capital charge against each net n-th-to-default credit derivative position applies irrespective of whether the conventional bank licensee has a long or short position, i.e. obtains or provides protection.
              January 2015

        • CA-9.3 CA-9.3 General Market Risk Calculation

          • CA-9.3.1

            The capital requirements for general market risk are designed to capture the risk of loss arising from changes in market interest rates, i.e. the risk of parallel and non-parallel shifts in the yield curve. A choice between two principal methods of measuring the general market risk is permitted, a "maturity" method and a "duration" method. In each method, the capital charge is the sum of the following four components:

            (a) The net short or long position in the whole trading book;
            (b) A small proportion of the matched positions in each time-band (the "vertical disallowance");
            (c) A larger proportion of the matched positions across different time-bands (the "horizontal disallowance"); and
            (d) A net charge for positions in options, where appropriate (see Chapter CA-13).
            January 2015

          • CA-9.3.2

            Separate maturity ladders must be used for each currency and capital charges must be calculated for each currency separately and then summed, by applying the prevailing foreign exchange spot rates, with no off-setting between positions of opposite sign.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.3.3

            In the case of those currencies in which the value and volume of business is insignificant, separate maturity ladders for each currency are not required. Instead, the conventional bank licensee may construct a single maturity ladder and slot, within each appropriate time-band, the net long or short position for each currency. However, these individual net positions are to be summed within each time-band, irrespective of whether they are long or short positions, to arrive at the gross position figure for the time-band.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.3.4

            A combination of the two methods (referred to under Paragraph CA-9.3.1) is not permitted.

            January 2015

        • CA-9.4 CA-9.4 Maturity Method

          • CA-9.4.1

            A worked example of the maturity method is included in Appendix CA-11. The various time-bands and their risk weights, relevant to the maturity method, are illustrated in Subparagraph CA-9.4.2(a).

            January 2015

          • CA-9.4.2

            The steps in the calculation of the general market risk for interest rate positions, under this method, are set out below:

            (a) Individual long or short positions in interest-rate related instruments, including derivatives, are slotted into a maturity ladder comprising thirteen time-bands (or fifteen time-bands in the case of zero-coupon and deep-discount instruments, defined as those with a coupon of less than 3%), on the following basis:
            (i) Fixed rate instruments are allocated according to their residual term to maturity (irrespective of embedded puts and calls), and whether their coupon is below 3%;
            (ii) Floating rate instruments are allocated according to the residual term to the next repricing date;
            (iii) Positions in derivatives, and all positions in repos, reverse repos and similar products are decomposed into their components within each time band. Derivative instruments are covered in greater detail in Sections CA-9.6 to CA-9.9;
            (iv) Opposite positions of the same amount in the same issues (but not different issues by the same issuer), whether actual or notional, can be omitted from the interest rate maturity framework, as well as closely matched swaps, forwards, futures and FRAs which meet the conditions set out in Section CA-9.8. In other words, these positions are netted within their relevant time-bands; and
            (v) The CBB's advice must be sought on the treatment of instruments that deviate from the above structures, or which may be considered sufficiently complex to warrant the CBB's attention.
            January 2015

          • Maturity Method: Time-Bands and Risk Weights

              Coupon 3% or more Coupon < 3% Risk weight
            Zone 1 1 month or less 1 month or less 0.00%
            1 to 3 months 1 to 3 months 0.20%
            3 to 6 months 3 to 6 months 0.40%
            6 to 12 months 6 to 12 months 0.70%
            Zone 2 1 to 2 years 1 to 1.9 years 1.25%
            2 to 3 years 1.9 to 2.8 years 1.75%
            3 to 4 years 2.8 to 3.6 years 2.25%
            Zone 3 4 to 5 years 3.6 to 4.3 years 2.75%
            5 to 7 years 4.3 to 5.7 years 3.25%
            7 to 10 years 5.7 to 7.3 years 3.75%
            10 to 15 years 7.3 to 9.3 years 4.50%
            15 to 20 years 9.3 to 10.6 years 5.25%
            > 20 years 10.6 to 12 years 6.00%
              12 to 20 years 8.00%
              > 20 years 12.50%
            (b) The market values of the individual long and short net positions in each maturity band are multiplied by the respective risk weighting factors given in Subparagraph CA-9.4.2(a);
            (c) Matching of positions within each maturity band (i.e. vertical matching) is done as follows:
            (i) Where a maturity band has both weighted long and short positions, the extent to which the one offsets the other is called the matched weighted position. The remainder (i.e. the excess of the weighted long positions over the weighted short positions, or vice versa, within a band) is called the unmatched weighted position for that band;
            (d) Matching of positions, across maturity bands, within each zone (i.e. horizontal matching — level 1), is done as follows:
            (i) Where a zone has both unmatched weighted long and short positions for various bands, the extent to which the one offsets the other is called the matched weighted position for that zone. The remainder (i.e. the excess of the weighted long positions over the weighted short positions, or vice versa, within a zone) is called the unmatched weighted position for that zone;
            (e) Matching of positions, across zones (i.e. horizontal matching — level 2), is done as follows:
            (i) The unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 1 may be offset against the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 2. The extent to which the unmatched weighted positions in zones 1 and 2 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 1 and 2;
            (ii) After step (i) above, any residual unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 2 may be matched by offsetting the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 3. The extent to which the unmatched positions in zones 2 and 3 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 2 and 3;

            The calculations in steps (i) and (ii) above may be carried out in reverse order (i.e. zones 2 and 3, followed by zones 1 and 2).
            (iii) After steps (i) and (ii) above, any residual unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 1 may be matched by offsetting the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 3. The extent to which the unmatched positions in zones 1 and 3 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 1 and 3;
            (f) Any residual unmatched weighted positions, following the matching within and between maturity bands and zones as described above, will be summed; and
            (g) The general interest rate risk capital requirement is the sum of:
            (i) Matched weighted positions in all maturity bands x 10%;
            (ii) Matched weighted positions in zone 1 x 40%;
            (iii) Matched weighted positions in zone 2 x 30%;
            (iv) Matched weighted positions in zone 3 x 30%;
            (v) Matched weighted positions between zones 1 & 2 x 40%;
            (vi) Matched weighted positions between zones 2 & 3 x 40%;
            (vii) Matched weighted positions between zones 1 & 3 x 100%; and
            (viii) Residual unmatched weighted positions x 100%.

            Item (i) is referred to as the vertical disallowance, items (ii) through (iv) as the first set of horizontal disallowances, and items (v) through (vii) as the second set of horizontal disallowances.
            January 2015

        • CA-9.5 CA-9.5 Duration Method

          • CA-9.5.1

            The duration method is an alternative approach to measuring the exposure to parallel and non-parallel shifts in the yield curve, and recognises the use of duration as an indicator of the sensitivity of individual positions to changes in market yields. Under this method, conventional bank licensees may use a duration-based system for determining their general interest rate risk capital requirements for traded debt instruments and other sources of interest rate exposures including derivatives. A worked example of the duration method is included in Appendix CA-12. The various time-bands and assumed changes in yield, relevant to the duration method, are illustrated below.

            January 2015

          • Duration Method: Time-Bands and Assumed Changes in Yield

              Time-band Assumed change in yield
            Zone 1 1 month or less 1.00
            1 to 3 months 1.00
            3 to 6 months 1.00
            6 to 12 months 1.00
            Zone 2 1 to 1.9 years 0.90
            1.9 to 2.8 years 0.80
            2.8 to 3.6 years 0.75
            Zone 3 3.6 to 4.3 years 0.75
            4.3 to 5.7 years 0.70
            5.7 to 7.3 years 0.65
            7.3 to 9.3 years 0.60
            9.3 to 10.6 years 0.60
            10.6 to 12 years 0.60
            12 to 20 years 0.60
            > 20 years 0.60
            January 2015

          • CA-9.5.2

            Conventional bank licensees must notify the CBB of the circumstances in which they elect to use this method. Once chosen, the duration method must be consistently applied, in accordance with the requirements of Section CA-9.3.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.5.3

            Where a conventional bank licensee has chosen to use the duration method, it is possible that it will not be suitable for certain instruments. In such cases, the conventional bank licensee must seek the advice of the CBB or obtain approval for application of the maturity method to the specific category(ies) of instruments, in accordance with the provisions of Section CA-9.3.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.5.4

            The steps in the calculation of the general market risk for interest rate positions, under this method, are set out below:

            (a) The conventional bank licensee must determine the Yield-to-Maturity (YTM) for each individual net position in fixed rate and floating rate instruments, based on the current market value. The basis of arriving at individual net positions is explained in Section CA-9.4. The YTM for fixed rate instruments is determined without any regard to whether the instrument is coupon bearing, or whether the instrument has any embedded options. In all cases, YTM for fixed rate instruments is calculated with reference to the final maturity date and, for floating rate instruments, with reference to the next repricing date;
            (b) The conventional bank licensee must calculate, for each debt instrument, the modified duration (M) on the basis of the following formula:

            M = D / (1+r)

            where,

            D (duration) =


            r = YTM % per annum expressed as a decimal
            C = Cash flow at time t
            t = time at which cash flows occur, in years
            m = time to maturity, in years
            (c) Individual net positions, at current market value, are allocated to the time-bands illustrated in Paragraph CA-9.5.1, based on their modified duration;
            (d) The conventional bank licensee must then calculate the modified duration-weighted position for each individual net position by multiplying its current market value by the modified duration and the assumed change in yield;
            (e) Matching of positions within each time band (i.e. vertical matching) is done as follows:
            (i) Where a time band has both weighted long and short positions, the extent to which the one offsets the other is called the matched weighted position. The remainder (i.e. the excess of the weighted long positions over the weighted short positions, or vice versa, within a band) is called the unmatched weighted position for that band;
            (f) Matching of positions, across time bands, within each zone (i.e. horizontal matching - level 1), is done as follows:
            (i) Where a zone has both unmatched weighted long and short positions for various bands, the extent to which the one offsets the other is called the matched weighted position for that zone. The remainder (i.e. the excess of the weighted long positions over the weighted short positions, or vice versa, within a zone) is called the unmatched weighted position for that zone;
            (g) Matching of positions, across zones (i.e. horizontal matching -level 2), is done as follows:
            (i) The unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 1 may be offset against the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 2. The extent to which the unmatched weighted positions in zones 1 and 2 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 1 and 2;
            (ii) After step (i) above, any residual unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 2 may be matched by offsetting the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 3. The extent to which the unmatched positions in zones 2 and 3 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 2 and 3;

            The calculations in steps (i) and (ii) above may be carried out in reverse order (i.e. zones 2 and 3, followed by zones 1 and 2); and
            (iii) After steps (a) and (b) above, any residual unmatched weighted long or short position in zone 1 may be matched by offsetting the unmatched weighted short or long position in zone 3. The extent to which the unmatched positions in zones 1 and 3 are offsetting is described as the matched weighted position between zones 1 and 3;
            (h) Any residual unmatched weighted positions, following the matching within and between maturity bands and zones as described above, will be summed; and
            (i) The general interest rate risk capital requirement is the sum of:
            (i) Matched weighted positions in all maturity bands x 5%;
            (ii) Matched weighted positions in zone 1 x 40%;
            (iii) Matched weighted positions in zone 2 x 30%;
            (iv) Matched weighted positions in zone 3 x 30%;
            (v) Matched weighted positions between zones 1 & 2 x 40%;
            (vi) Matched weighted positions between zones 2 & 3 x 40%;
            (vii) Matched weighted positions between zones 1 & 3 x 100%; and
            (viii) Residual unmatched weighted positions x 100%.

            Item (i) is referred to as the vertical disallowance, items (ii) through (iv) as the first set of horizontal disallowances, and items (v) through (vii) as the second set of horizontal disallowances.
            January 2015

        • CA-9.6 CA-9.6 Derivatives

          • CA-9.6.1

            Conventional bank licensees which propose to use internal models to measure the interest rate risk inherent in derivatives must seek the prior written approval of the CBB for applying those models. The use of internal models to measure market risk, and the CBB's rules applicable to them, are discussed in detail in Chapter CA-14.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.6.2

            Where a conventional bank licensee, with the prior written approval of the CBB, uses an interest rate sensitivity model, the output of that model is used, by the duration method, to calculate the general market risk as described in Section CA-9.5.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.6.3

            Where a conventional bank licensee does not propose to use models, it must use the techniques described in the following Paragraphs, for measuring the market risk on interest rate derivatives. The measurement system must include all interest rate derivatives and off-balance-sheet instruments in the trading book which react to changes in interest rates (e.g. forward rate agreements, other forward contracts, bond futures, interest rate and cross-currency swaps, options and forward foreign exchange contracts). Where a conventional bank licensee has obtained the approval of the CBB for the use of non-interest rate derivatives models, the embedded interest rate exposures must be incorporated in the standardised measurement framework described in Sections CA-9.7 to CA-9.9.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.6.4

            Derivative positions attract specific risk only when they are based on an underlying instrument or security. For instance, where the underlying exposure is an interest rate exposure, as in a swap based upon inter-bank rates, there is no specific risk, but only counterparty risk. A similar treatment applies to FRAs, forward foreign exchange contracts and interest rate futures. However, for a swap based on a bond yield, or a futures contract based on a debt security or an index representing a basket of debt securities, the credit risk of the issuer of the underlying bond generates a specific risk capital requirement. Future cash flows derived from positions in derivatives generate counterparty risk requirements related to the counterparty in the trade, in addition to position risk requirements (specific and general market risk) related to the underlying security.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.6.5

            A summary of the rules for dealing with interest rate derivatives (other than options) is set out in Section CA-9.9. The treatment of options, being a complex issue, is dealt with in detail in Chapter CA-13.

            January 2015

        • CA-9.7 CA-9.7 Calculation of Derivative Positions

          • CA-9.7.1

            The derivatives must be converted to positions in the relevant underlying and become subject to specific and general market risk charges as described in Sections CA-9.2 and CA-9.3, respectively. For the purpose of calculation by the standard formulae, the amounts reported are the market values of the principal amounts of the underlying or of the notional underlying. For instruments where the apparent notional amount differs from the effective notional amount, conventional bank licensees must use the latter.

            January 2015

          • CA-9.7.2

            The remaining Paragraphs in this Section include the guidelines for the calculation of positions in different categories of interest rate derivatives. Conventional bank licensees which need further assistance in the calculation, particularly in relation to complex instruments, should contact the CBB in writing.

            January 2015

          • Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts

            • CA-9.7.3

              A forward foreign exchange position is decomposed into legs representing the paying and receiving currencies. Each of the legs is treated as if it were a zero coupon bond, with zero specific risk, in the relevant currency and included in the measurement framework as follows:

              (a) If the maturity method is used, each leg is included at the notional amount; and
              (b) If the duration method is used, each leg is included at the present value of the notional zero coupon bond.
              January 2015

          • Deposit Futures and FRAs

            • CA-9.7.4

              Deposit futures, forward rate agreements and other instruments where the underlying is a money market exposure is split into two legs as follows:

              (a) The first leg represents the time to expiry of the futures contract, or settlement date of the FRA as the case may be;
              (b) The second leg represents the time to expiry of the underlying instrument;
              (c) Each leg is treated as a zero coupon bond with zero specific risk; and
              (d) For deposit futures, the size of each leg is the notional amount of the underlying money market exposure. For FRAs, the size of each leg is the notional amount of the underlying money market exposure discounted to present value, although in the maturity method, the notional amount may be used without discounting.

              For example, under the maturity method, a single 3-month Euro$ 1,000,000 deposit futures contract expiring in 3 months' time has one leg of $ 1,000,000 representing the 8 months to contract expiry, and another leg of $ 1,000,000 in the 11 months' time-band representing the time to expiry of the deposit underlying the futures contract.

              January 2015

          • Bond Futures and Forward Bond Transactions

            • CA-9.7.5

              Bond futures, forward bond transactions and the forward leg of repos, reverse repos and other similar transactions must apply the two-legged approach. A forward bond transaction is one where the settlement is for a period other than the prevailing norm for the market:

              (a) The first leg is a zero coupon bond with zero specific risk. Its maturity is the time to expiry of the futures or forward contract. Its size is the cash flow on maturity discounted to present value, although in the maturity method, the cash flow on maturity may be used without discounting;
              (b) The second leg is the underlying bond. Its maturity is that of the underlying bond for fixed rate bonds, or the time to the next reset for floating rate bonds. Its size is as set out in (c) and (d) below;
              (c) For forward bond transactions, the underlying bond and amount is used at the present spot price;
              (d) For bond futures, the principal amounts for each of the two legs is reckoned as the futures price times the notional underlying bond amount;
              (e) Where a range of deliverable instruments may be delivered to fulfil a futures contract (at the option of the "short"), then the following rules are used to determine the principal amount, taking account of any conversion factors defined by the exchange:
              (i) The "long" may use one of the deliverable bonds, or the notional bond on which the contract is based, as the underlying instrument, but this notional long leg may not be offset against a short cash position in the same bond; and
              (ii) The "short" may treat the notional underlying bond as if it were one of the deliverable bonds, and it may be offset against a short cash position in the same bond;
              (f) For futures contracts based on a corporate bond index, the positions is included at the market value of the notional underlying portfolio of securities;
              (g) A repo (or sell-buy or stock lending) involving exchange of a security for cash must be represented as a cash borrowing — i.e. a short position in a government bond with maturity equal to the repo and coupon equal to the repo rate. A reverse repo (or buy-sell or stock borrowing) must be represented as a cash loan — i.e. a long position in a government bond with maturity equal to the reverse repo and coupon equal to the repo rate. These positions are referred to as "cash legs"; and
              (h) It should be noted that, where a security owned by the conventional bank licensee (and included in its calculation of market risk) is repo'd, it continues to contribute to the conventional bank licensee's interest rate or equity position risk calculation.
              January 2015

          • Swaps

            • CA-9.7.6

              Swaps are treated as two notional positions in government securities with the relevant maturities:

              (a) Interest rate swaps are decomposed into two legs, and each leg is allocated to the maturity band equating to the time remaining to repricing or maturity. For example, an interest rate swap in which a conventional bank licensee is receiving floating rate interest and paying fixed is treated as a long position in a floating rate instrument of maturity equivalent to the period until the next interest fixing and a short position in a fixed rate instrument of maturity equivalent to the residual life of the swap;
              (b) For swaps that pay or receive a fixed or floating interest rate against some other reference price, e.g. a stock index, the interest rate component must be slotted into the appropriate repricing or maturity category, with the equity component being included in the equity risk measurement framework as described in Chapter CA-10;
              (c) For cross currency swaps, the separate legs are included in the interest rate risk measurement for the currencies concerned, as having a fixed/floating leg in each currency. Alternatively, the two parts of a currency swap transaction are split into forward foreign exchange contracts and treated accordingly;
              (d) Where a swap has a deferred start, and one or both legs have been fixed, then the fixed leg(s) is sub-divided into the time to the commencement of the leg and the actual swap leg with fixed or floating rate. A swap is deemed to have a deferred start when the commencement of the interest rate calculation periods is more than two business days from the transaction date, and one or both legs have been fixed at the time of the commitment. However, when a swap has a deferred start and neither leg has been fixed, there is no interest rate exposure, albeit there is counterparty exposure; and
              (e) Where a swap has a different structure from those discussed above, it may be necessary to adjust the underlying notional principal amount, or the notional maturity of one or both legs of the transaction.
              January 2015

            • CA-9.7.7

              Conventional bank licensees with large swap books may use alternative formulae for these swaps to calculate the positions to be included in the maturity or duration ladder. One method would be to first convert the cash flows required by the swap into their present values. For this purpose, each cash flow must be discounted using the zero coupon yields, and a single net figure for the present value of the cash flows entered into the appropriate time-band using procedures that apply to zero or low coupon (less than 3%) instruments. An alternative method is to calculate the sensitivity of the net present value implied by the change in yield used in the duration method (as set out in Section CA-9.5), and allocate these sensitivities into the appropriate time-bands.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.7.8

              Conventional bank licensees which propose to use the approaches described in Paragraph CA-9.7.7, or any other similar alternative formulae, must obtain the prior written approval of the CBB.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.7.9

              The CBB will consider the following factors before approving any alternative methods for calculating the swap positions:

              (a) Whether the systems proposed to be used are accurate;
              (b) Whether the positions calculated fully reflect the sensitivity of the cash flows to interest rate changes and are entered into the appropriate time-bands; and
              (c) Whether the positions are denominated in the same currency.
              January 2015

        • CA-9.8 CA-9.8 Netting of Derivative Positions

          • Permissible Offsetting of Fully Matched Positions for Both Specific and General Market Risk

            • CA-9.8.1

              Conventional bank licensees may exclude from the interest rate risk calculation, altogether, the long and short positions (both actual and notional) in identical instruments with exactly the same issuer, coupon, currency and maturity. A matched position in a future or a forward and its corresponding underlying may also be fully offset, albeit the leg representing the time to expiry of the future is included in the calculation.

              January 2015

            • CA-9.8.2

              When the future or the forward comprises a range of deliverable instruments, offsetting of positions in the futures or forward contract and its underlying is only permitted in cases where there is a readily identifiable underlying security which is most profitable for the trader with a short position to deliver. The price of this security, sometimes called the "cheapest-to-deliver", and the price of the future or forward contract must, in such cases, move in close alignment. No offsetting is allowed between positions in different currencies. The separate legs of cross-currency swaps or forward foreign exchange contracts are treated as notional positions in the relevant instruments and included in the appropriate calculation for each currency.

              January 2015

          • Permissible Offsetting of Closely Matched Positions for General Market Risk Only

            • CA-9.8.3

              For the purpose of calculation of the general market risk, in addition to the permissible offsetting of fully matched positions as described in Paragraph CA-9.8.1, opposite positions giving rise to interest rate exposure can be offset if they relate to the same underlying instruments, are of the same nominal value and are denominated in the same currency and, in addition, fulfil the following conditions:

              (a) For futures:
              Offsetting positions in the notional or underlying instruments to which the futures contract relates must be for identical products and mature within seven days of each other;
              (b) For swaps and FRAs:
              The reference rate (for floating rate positions) must be identical and the coupons must be within 15 basis points of each other; and
              (c) For swaps, FRAs and forwards:
              The next interest fixing date or, for fixed coupon positions or forwards, the residual maturity must correspond within the following limits:
              •   Less than one month:
              same day;
              •   Between one month and one year:
              within 7 days;
              •   Over one year:
              within 30 days.
              January 2015

        • CA-9.9 CA-9.9 Calculation of Capital Charge for Derivatives

          • CA-9.9.1

            After calculating the derivatives positions, taking account of the permissible offsetting of matched positions, as explained in Section CA-9.8, the capital charges for specific and general market risk for interest rate derivatives are calculated in the same manner as for cash positions, as described earlier in this Chapter.

            January 2015

          • Summary of Treatment of Interest Rate Derivatives

            Instrument Specific risk charge* General market risk charge
            Exchange-traded futures    
            - Government** debt security
            No Yes, as two positions
            - Corporate debt security
            Yes Yes, as two positions
            - Index on interest rates (e.g. LIBOR)
            No Yes, as two positions
            - Index on basket of debt securities
            Yes Yes, as two positions
            OTC forwards    
            - Government** debt security
            No Yes, as two positions
            - Corporate debt security
            Yes Yes, as two positions
            - Index on interest rates
            No Yes, as two positions
            FRAs No Yes, as two positions
            Swaps    
            - Based on inter-bank rates
            No Yes, as two positions
            - Based on Government** bond yields
            No Yes, as two positions
            - Based on corporate bond yields
            Yes Yes, as two positions
            Forward foreign exchange
            No Yes, as one position in each currency
            Options   Either (a) or (b) as below (see chapter CA-13 for a detailed description):
            - Government** debt security
            - Corporate debt security
            - Index on interest rates
            - FRAs, swaps
            No

            Yes

            No

            No
            (a) Carve out together with the associated hedging positions, and use:
            -simplified approach; or
            -scenario analysis; or
            -internal models (see chapter CA-14).
            (b) General market risk charge according to the delta-plus method (gamma and vega should receive separate capital charges).
            * This is the specific risk charge relating to the issuer of the instrument. Under the credit risk rules, there remains a separate capital charge for the counterparty risk.

            ** As defined in Section CA-9.2.
            January 2015

      • CA-10 CA-10 Market Risk — Equity Position Risk — (STA)

        • CA-10.1 CA-10.1 Introduction

          • CA-10.1.1

            This Chapter sets out the minimum capital requirements to cover the risk of holding or taking positions in equities in the conventional bank licensee's trading book.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.2

            For the guidance of the conventional bank licensees, and without being exhaustive, the following list includes financial instruments in the trading book, including forward positions, to which equity position risk capital requirements apply:

            (a) Common stocks, whether voting or non-voting;
            (b) Depository receipts (which should be included in the measurement framework in terms of the underlying shares);
            (c) Convertible preference securities (non-convertible preference securities are treated as bonds);
            (d) Convertible debt securities which convert into equity instruments and are, therefore, treated as equities (see Paragraph CA-10.1.3 below);
            (e) Commitments to buy or sell equity securities; and
            (f) Derivatives based on the above instruments.
            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.3

            Convertible debt securities must be treated as equities where:

            (a) The first date at which the conversion may take place is less than three months ahead, or the next such date (where the first date has passed) is less than a year ahead; and
            (b) The convertible is trading at a premium of less than 10%, where the premium is defined as the current marked-to-market value of the convertible less the marked-to-market value of the underlying equity, expressed as a percentage of the latter.

            In other instances, convertibles must be treated as either equity or debt securities, based reasonably on their market behaviour.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.4

            For instruments that deviate from the structures described in Paragraphs CA-10.1.2 and CA-10.1.3, or which could be considered complex, each conventional bank licensees must agree on a written policy statement with the CBB about the intended treatment, on a case-by-case basis. In some circumstances, the treatment of an instrument may be uncertain, for example bonds whose coupon payments are linked to equity indices. The position risk of such instruments must be broken down into its components and allocated appropriately between the equity, interest rate and foreign exchange risk categories. Advice must be sought from the CBB in cases of doubt, particularly when a conventional bank licensee is trading an instrument for the first time.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.5

            Where equities are part of a forward contract, a future or an option (i.e. a quantity of equities to be received or delivered), any interest rate or foreign currency exposure from the other leg of the contract must be included in the measurement framework as described in Chapters CA-9 and CA-11, respectively.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.6

            As with interest rate related instruments, the minimum capital requirement for equities is expressed in terms of two separately calculated charges, one applying to the "specific risk" of holding a long or short position in an individual equity, and the other to the "general market risk" of holding a long or short position in the market as a whole.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.1.7

            Conventional bank licensees must follow the standardised approach to calculate the equity position risk capital requirement, as set out in detail in this Chapter.

            January 2015

        • CA-10.2 CA-10.2 Calculation of Equity Positions

          • CA-10.2.1

            A conventional bank licensee may net long and short positions in the same equity instrument, arising either directly or through derivatives, to generate the individual net position in that instrument. For example, a future in a given equity may be offset against an opposite cash position in the same equity, albeit the interest rate risk arising out of the future must be calculated separately in accordance with the rules set out in Chapter CA-9.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.2.2

            A conventional bank licensee may net long and short positions in one tranche of an equity instrument against another tranche only where the relevant tranches:

            (a) Rank pari passu in all respects; and
            (b) Become fungible within 180 days, and thereafter the equity instruments of one tranche can be delivered in settlement of the other tranche.
            January 2015

          • CA-10.2.3

            Positions in depository receipts may only be netted against positions in the underlying stock if the stock is freely deliverable against the depository receipt. If a conventional bank licensee takes a position in depository receipts against an opposite position in the underlying equity in different markets (i.e. arbitrage), it may offset the position provided that any costs on conversion are fully taken into account. Furthermore, the foreign exchange risk arising out of these positions must be included in the measurement framework as set out in Chapter CA-11.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.2.4

            More detailed guidance on the treatment of equity derivatives is set out in Section CA-10.5.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.2.5

            Equity positions, arising either directly or through derivatives, must be allocated to the country in which each equity is listed. Where an equity is listed in more than one country, the conventional bank licensee must discuss the appropriate country allocation with the CBB.

            January 2015

        • CA-10.3 CA-10.3 Specific Risk Calculation

          • CA-10.3.1

            Specific risk is defined as the conventional bank licensee's gross equity positions (i.e. the sum of all long equity positions and of all short equity positions), and is calculated for each country or equity market. For each national market in which the conventional bank licensee holds equities, it must sum the market values of its individual net positions as determined in accordance with Section CA-10.2, irrespective of whether they are long or short positions, to produce the overall gross equity position for that market.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.3.2

            The capital charge for specific risk is 8%.

            January 2015

        • CA-10.4 CA-10.4 General Risk Calculation

          • CA-10.4.1

            The general market risk is the difference between the sum of the long positions and the sum of the short positions (i.e. the overall net position) in each national equity market. In other words, to calculate the general market risk, the conventional bank licensee must sum the market value of its individual net positions for each national market, as determined in accordance with Section CA-10.2, taking into account whether the positions are long or short.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.4.2

            The general market equity risk measure is 8% of the overall net position in each national market.

            January 2015

        • CA-10.5 CA-10.5 Equity Derivatives

          • CA-10.5.1

            For the purpose of calculating the specific and general market risk by the standardised approach, equity derivative positions must be converted into notional underlying equity positions, whether long or short. All equity derivatives and off-balance-sheet positions which are affected by changes in equity prices must be included in the measurement framework. This includes futures and swaps on both individual equities and on stock indices.

            January 2015

          • CA-10.5.2

            The following guidelines apply to the calculation of positions in different categories of equity derivatives. Conventional bank licensees which need further assistance in the calculation, particularly in relation to complex instruments, must contact the CBB:

            (a) Futures and forward contracts relating to individual equities must be included in the calculation at current market prices;
            (b) Futures relating to stock indices must be included in the calculation, at the marked-to-market value of the notional underlying equity portfolio, i.e. as a single position based on the sum of the current market values of the underlying instruments;
            (c) Equity swaps are treated as two notional positions. For example, an equity swap in which a conventional bank licensee is receiving an amount based on the change in value of one particular equity or stock index, and paying a different index is treated as a long position in the former and a short position in the latter. Where one of the swap legs involves receiving/paying a fixed or floating interest rate, that exposure must be slotted into the appropriate time-band for interest rate related instruments as set out in Chapter CA-9. The stock index leg must be covered by the equity treatment as set out in this Chapter; and
            (d) Equity options and stock index options are either "carved out" together with the associated underlying instruments, or are incorporated in the general market risk measurement framework, described in this Chapter, based on the delta-plus method. The treatment of options, being a complex issue, is dealt with in detail in Chapter CA-13.
            January 2015

          • CA-10.5.3

            A summary of the treatment of equity derivatives is set out in Paragraph CA-10.5.8.

            January 2015

          • Specific Risk on Positions in Equity Indices

            • CA-10.5.4

              Positions in highly liquid equity indices whether they arise directly or through derivatives, attract a 2% capital charge in addition to the general market risk, to cover factors such as execution risk.

              January 2015

            • CA-10.5.5

              For positions in equity indices not regarded as highly liquid, the specific risk capital charge is the highest specific risk charge that would apply to any of its components, as set out in Section CA-10.3.

              January 2015

            • CA-10.5.6

              In the case of the futures-related arbitrage strategies set out below, the specific risk capital charge described above may be applied to only one index with the opposite position exempt from a specific risk capital charge. The strategies are as follows:

              (a) Where a conventional bank licensee takes an opposite position in exactly the same index, at different dates or in different market centres; and
              (b) Where a conventional bank licensee takes opposite positions in contracts at the same date in different but similar indices, provided the two indices contain at least 90% common components.
              January 2015

            • CA-10.5.7

              Where a conventional bank licensee engages in a deliberate arbitrage strategy, in which a futures contract on a broad-based index matches a basket of stocks, it is allowed to carve out both positions from the standardised methodology on the following conditions:

              (a) The trade has been deliberately entered into, and separately controlled; and
              (b) The composition of the basket of stocks represents at least 90% of the index when broken down into its notional components.

              In such a case, the minimum capital requirement is limited to 4% (i.e. 2% of the gross value of the positions on each side) to reflect divergence and execution risks. This applies even if all of the stocks comprising the index are held in identical proportions. Any excess value of the stocks comprising the basket over the value of the futures contract or vice versa is treated as an open long or short position.

              January 2015

          • Counterparty Risk

            • CA-10.5.8

              Derivative positions may also generate counterparty risk exposure related to the counterparty in the trade, in addition to position risk requirements (specific and general) related to the underlying instrument, e.g. counterparty risk related to OTC trades through margin payments, fees payable or settlement exposures. The credit risk capital requirements apply to such counterparty risk exposure.

              January 2015

          • Summary of Treatment of Equity Derivatives

            Instrument Specific risk charge* General market risk charge
            Exchange-traded or OTC futures    
            - Individual equity Yes Yes, as underlying
            - Index Yes
            (see CA-10.5)
            Yes, as underlying
            Options    
            - Individual equity

            - Index
            Yes

            Yes
            Either (a) or (b) as below (Chapter CA-13 for a detailed description):
            (a) Carve out together with the associated hedging positions, and use:
            - simplified approach; or
            - scenario analysis; or
            - internal models (Chapter CA-15).
            (b) General market risk charge according to the delta-plus method (gamma and vega should receive separate capital charges).
            * This is the specific risk charge relating to the issuer of the instrument. Under the credit risk rules, there remains a separate capital charge for the counterparty risk.
            January 2015

      • CA-11 CA-11 Market Risk — Foreign Exchange Risk — (STA)

        • CA-11.1 CA-11.1 Introduction

          • CA-11.1.1

            A conventional bank licensee which holds net open positions (whether long or short) in foreign currencies is exposed to the risk that exchange rates may move against it. The open positions may be either trading positions or, simply, exposures caused by the conventional bank licensee's overall assets and liabilities.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.2

            This Chapter describes the standardised method for calculation of the conventional bank licensee's foreign exchange risk, and the capital required against that risk. The measurement of the foreign exchange risk involves, as a first step, the calculation of the net open position in each individual currency including gold48 and, as a second step, the measurement of the risks inherent in the conventional bank licensee's mix of long and short positions in different currencies.


            48 Positions in gold must be treated as if they were foreign currency positions, rather than as commodity positions, because the volatility of gold is more in line with that of foreign currencies and most banks manage it in similar manner to foreign currencies.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.3

            The open positions and the capital requirements are calculated with reference to the entire business, i.e. the banking and trading books combined.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.4

            The open positions are calculated with reference to the conventional bank licensee's base currency, which will be either BD or US$.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.5

            Conventional bank licensees which have the intention and capability to use internal models for the measurement of their foreign exchange risk and, hence, for the calculation of the capital requirement, must obtain the prior written approval of the CBB for those models. The CBB's detailed rules for the recognition and use of internal models are included in chapter CA-14. Conventional bank licensees which do not use internal models must follow the standardised approach, as set out in detail in this Chapter.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.6

            In addition to foreign exchange risk, positions in foreign currencies may be subject to interest rate risk and credit risk which must be treated separately.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.1.7

            For the purposes of calculating "Foreign Exchange Risk" only, positions in those GCC currencies which are pegged to US$, are treated as positions in US$.

            January 2015

        • CA-11.2 CA-11.2 De Minimis Exemptions

          • CA-11.2.1

            A conventional bank licensee doing negligible business in foreign currencies and which does not take foreign exchange positions for its own account may, at the discretion of the CBB evidenced by the CBB's prior written approval, be exempted from calculating the capital requirements on these positions.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.2.1A

            The CBB is likely to be guided by the following criteria in deciding to grant exemption to any conventional bank licensee under Paragraph CA-11.2.1:

            (a) The conventional bank licensee's holdings or taking of positions in foreign currencies, including gold, defined as the greater of the sum of the gross long positions and the sum of the gross short positions in all foreign currencies and gold, does not exceed 100% of its Total Capital; and
            (b) The conventional bank licensee's overall net open position, as defined in Paragraph CA-11.3.1, does not exceed 2% of its Total Capital as defined in Chapter CA-2.
            January 2015

          • CA-11.2.2

            The criteria listed in Paragraph CA-11.2.1A are only intended to be guidelines, and a conventional bank licensee will not automatically qualify for exemptions upon meeting them. The CBB may also, in its discretion, fix a minimum capital requirement for a conventional bank licensee which is exempted from calculating its foreign exchange risk capital requirement, to cover the risks inherent in its foreign currency business.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.2.3

            The CBB may, at a future date, revoke an exemption previously granted to a conventional bank licensee, if the CBB is convinced that the conditions on which the exemption was granted no longer exist.

            January 2015

        • CA-11.3 CA-11.3 Calculation of Net Open Positions

          • CA-11.3.1

            A conventional bank licensee's exposure to foreign exchange risk in any currency is its net open position in that currency, which is calculated by summing the following items:

            (a) The net spot position in the currency (i.e. all asset items less all liability items, including accrued interest, other income and expenses, denominated in the currency in question, assets are included gross of provisions for bad and doubtful debts, except in cases where the provisions are maintained in the same currency as the underlying assets);
            (b) The net forward position in the currency (i.e. all amounts to be received less all amounts to be paid under forward foreign exchange contracts, in the concerned currency, including currency futures and the principal on currency swaps not included in the spot position);
            (c) Guarantees and similar off-balance-sheet contingent items that are certain to be called and are likely to be irrecoverable where the provisions, if any, are not maintained in the same currency;
            (d) Net future income/expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged by forward foreign exchange contracts may be included provided that such anticipatory hedging is part of the conventional bank licensee's formal written policy and the items are included on a consistent basis;
            (e) Profits (i.e. the net value of income and expense accounts) held in the currency in question;
            (f) Specific provisions held in the currency in question where the underlying asset is in a different currency, net of assets held in the currency in question where a specific provision is held in a different currency; and
            (g) The net delta-based equivalent of the total book of foreign currency options (subject to a separately calculated capital charge for gamma and vega as described in Chapter CA-13, alternatively, options and their associated underlying positions are dealt with by one of the other methods described in Chapter CA-13).
            January 2015

          • CA-11.3.2

            All assets and liabilities, as described in Paragraph CA-11.3.1, must be included at closing mid-market spot exchange rates. Marked-to-market items must be included on the basis of the current market value of the positions. However, conventional bank licensees which base their normal management accounting on net present values must use the net present values of each position, discounted using current interest rates and valued at current spot rates, for measuring their forward currency and gold positions.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.3.3

            Net positions in composite currencies, such as the SDR, may either be broken down into the component currencies according to the quotas in force and included in the net open position calculations for the individual currencies, or treated as a separate currency. In any case, the mechanism for treating composite currencies must be consistently applied.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.3.4

            For calculating the net open position in gold, the conventional bank licensee must first express the net position (spot plus forward) in terms of the standard unit of measurement (i.e. ounces or grams) and, then, convert it at the current spot rate into the base currency.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.3.5

            Forward currency and gold positions must be valued at current spot market exchange rates. Applying forward exchange rates is inappropriate as it will result in the measured positions reflecting current interest rate differentials, to some extent.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.3.6

            Where gold is part of a forward contract (i.e. quantity of gold to be received or to be delivered), any interest rate or foreign currency exposure from the other leg of the contract must be reported as set out in Chapter CA-9 or Section CA-11.1, respectively.

            January 2015

          • Structural Positions

            • CA-11.3.7

              Positions of a structural, i.e. non-dealing, nature as set out below, may be excluded from the calculation of the net open currency positions:

              (a) Positions are taken deliberately in order to hedge, partially or totally, against the adverse effects of exchange rate movements on the conventional bank licensee's CAR;
              (b) Positions related to items that are deducted from the conventional bank licensee's capital when calculating its capital base in accordance with the rules and guidelines in this Module, such as investments in non-consolidated subsidiaries; and
              (c) Retained profits held for payout to parent.
              January 2015

            • CA-11.3.7A

              The CBB will consider approving the exclusion of the above positions for the purpose of calculating the capital requirement, only if the following conditions are met:

              (a) The conventional bank licensee provides adequate documentary evidence to the CBB which establishes the fact that the positions proposed to be excluded are, indeed, of a structural, i.e. non-dealing, nature and are merely intended to protect the conventional bank licensee's CAR. For this purpose, the CBB may ask for written representations from the conventional bank licensee's management or directors; and
              (b) Any exclusion of a position is consistently applied, with the treatment of the hedge remaining the same for the life of the associated assets or other items.
              January 2015

          • Derivatives

            • CA-11.3.8

              A currency swap is treated as a combination of a long position in one currency and a short position in the second currency.

              January 2015

            • CA-11.3.9

              There are a number of alternative approaches to the calculation of the foreign exchange risk in options. As stated in Section CA-11.1, with the CBB's prior written approval, a conventional bank licensee may choose to use internal models to measure the options risk. Extra capital charges will apply to those option risks that the conventional bank licensee's internal model does not capture. The standardised framework for the calculation of options risks and the resultant capital charges is described, in detail, in Chapter CA-13. Where, as explained in Paragraph CA-11.3.1, the option delta value is incorporated in the net open position, the capital charges for the other option risks are calculated separately.

              January 2015

        • CA-11.4 CA-11.4 Calculation of the Overall Net Open Positions

          • CA-11.4.1

            The net long or short position in each currency is converted, at the spot rate, into the reporting currency. The overall net open position is measured by aggregating the following:

            (a) The sum of the net short positions or the sum of the net long positions, whichever is greater; plus
            (b) The net position (short or long) in gold, regardless of sign.
            January 2015

          • CA-11.4.2

            Where the conventional bank licensee is assessing its foreign exchange risk on a consolidated basis, it may be technically impractical in the case of some marginal operations to include the currency positions of a foreign branch or subsidiary of the conventional bank licensee. In such cases, the internal limit for that branch/subsidiary, in each currency, may be used as a proxy for the positions. The branch/subsidiary limits must be added, without regard to sign, to the net open position in each currency involved. When this simplified approach to the treatment of currencies with marginal operations is adopted, the conventional bank licensee must adequately monitor the actual positions of the branch/subsidiary against the limits, and revise the limits, if necessary, based on the results of the ex-post monitoring.

            January 2015

        • CA-11.5 CA-11.5 Calculation of the Capital Charge

          • CA-11.5.1

            The capital charge is 8% of the overall net open position.

            January 2015

          • CA-11.5.2

            The table below illustrates the calculation of the overall net open position and the capital charge:

            January 2015

          • Example of the Calculation of the Foreign Exchange Overall Net Open Position and the Capital Charge

            • CA-11.5.3

              GBP EURO CA$ US$ JPY Gold
              +100 +150 +50 -180 -20 -20
              +300 -200 20
              The capital charge is 8% of the higher of either the sum of the net long currency positions or the sum of the net short positions (i.e. 300) and of the net position in gold (i.e. 20) = 320 x 8% = 25.6
              January 2015

      • CA-12 CA-12 Market Risk — Commodities Risk — (STA)

        • CA-12.1 CA-12.1 Introduction

          • CA-12.1.1

            This Chapter sets out the minimum capital requirements to cover the risk of holding or taking positions in commodities, including precious metals, but excluding gold (which is treated as a foreign currency according to the methodology explained in Chapter CA-11).

            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.2

            The commodities position risk and the capital charges are calculated with reference to the entire business of a conventional bank licensee, i.e., the banking and trading books combined.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.3

            The price risk in commodities is often more complex and volatile than that associated with currencies and interest rates. Commodity markets may also be less liquid than those for interest rates and currencies and, as a result, changes in supply and demand can have a more dramatic effect on price and volatility. Conventional bank licensees need also to guard against the risk that arises when a short position falls due before the long position. Owing to a shortage of liquidity in some markets, it might be difficult to close the short position and the conventional bank licensee might be "squeezed by the market". All these market characteristics, of commodities, can make price transparency and the effective hedging of risks more difficult.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.4

            For spot or physical trading, the directional risk arising from a change in the spot price is the most important risk. However, conventional bank licensees applying portfolio strategies involving forward and derivative contracts are exposed to a variety of additional risks, which may well be larger than the risk of a change in spot prices (directional risk). These include:

            (a) 'Basis risk', i.e., the risk that the relationship between the prices of similar commodities alters through time;
            (b) 'Interest rate risk', i.e., the risk of a change in the cost of carry for forward positions and options; and
            (c) 'Forward gap risk', i.e., the risk that the forward price may change for reasons other than a change in interest rates.
            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.5

            The capital charges for commodities risk envisaged by the rules within this Chapter are intended to cover the risks identified in Paragraph CA-12.1.4. In addition, however, conventional bank licensees face credit counterparty risk on over-the-counter derivatives, which must be incorporated into their credit risk capital requirements. Furthermore, the funding of commodities positions may well open a conventional bank licensee to interest rate or foreign exchange risk which is captured within the measurement framework set out in Chapters CA-9 and CA-11, respectively.49


            49 Where a commodity is part of a forward contract (i.e.. a quantity of commodity to be received or to be delivered), any interest rate or foreign exchange risk from the other leg of the contract must be captured, within the measurement framework set out in Chapters CA-9 and CA-11, respectively. However, positions which are purely of a stock financing nature (i.e., a physical stock has been sold forward and the cost of funding has been locked in until the date of the forward sale) may be omitted from the commodities risk-calculation although they will be subject to the interest rate and counterparty risk capital requirements.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.6

            Conventional bank licensees which have the intention and capability to use internal models for the measurement of their commodities risks and, hence, for the calculation of the capital requirement, must seek the prior written approval of the CBB for those models. The CBB's detailed rules for the recognition and use of internal models are included in Chapter CA-14. It is essential that the internal models methodology captures the directional risk, forward gap and interest rate risks, and the basis risk which are defined in Paragraph CA-12.1.4. It is also particularly important that models take proper account of market characteristics, notably the delivery dates and the scope provided to traders to close out positions.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.1.7

            Conventional bank licensees which do not propose to use internal models must adopt either the maturity ladder approach or the simplified approach to calculate their commodities risk and the resultant capital charges. Both these approaches are described in Sections CA-12.3 and CA-12.4, respectively.

            January 2015

        • CA-12.2 CA-12.2 Calculation of Commodities Positions

          • Netting

            • CA-12.2.1

              Conventional bank licensees must first express each commodity position (spot plus forward) in terms of the standard unit of measurement (i.e., barrels, kilograms, grams etc.). Long and short positions in a commodity are reported on a net basis for the purpose of calculating the net open position in that commodity. For markets which have daily delivery dates, any contracts maturing within ten days of one another may be offset. The net position in each commodity is then converted, at spot rates, into the conventional bank licensee's reporting currency.

              January 2015

            • CA-12.2.2

              Positions in different commodities cannot be offset for the purpose of calculating the open positions as described in Paragraph CA-12.2.1 above. However, where two or more sub-categories50 of the same category are, in effect, deliverable against each other, netting between those sub-categories is permitted. Furthermore, if two or more sub-categories of the same category are considered as close substitutes for each other, and minimum correlation of 0.9 between their price movements is clearly established over a minimum period of one year, the conventional bank licensee may, with the prior written approval of the CBB, net positions in those sub-categories. Conventional bank licensees which wish to net positions based on correlations, in the manner discussed above, must satisfy the CBB of the accuracy of the method which it proposes to adopt.


              50 Commodities can be grouped into clans, families, sub-groups and individual commodities. For example, a clan might be Energy Commodities, within which Hydro-Carbons is a family with Crude Oil being a sub-group and West Texas Intermediate, Arabian Light and Brent being individual commodities.

              January 2015

          • Derivatives

            • CA-12.2.3

              All commodity derivatives and off-balance-sheet positions which are affected by changes in commodity prices must be included in the measurement framework for commodities risks. This includes commodity futures, commodity swaps, and options where the "delta plus" method is used51. In order to calculate the risks, commodity derivatives are converted into notional commodities positions and assigned to maturities as follows:

              (a) Futures and forward contracts relating to individual commodities must be incorporated in the measurement framework as notional amounts of barrels, kilograms etc., and must be assigned a maturity with reference to their expiry date;
              (b) Commodity swaps where one leg is a fixed price and the other one is the current market price, must be incorporated as a series of positions equal to the notional amount of the contract, with one position corresponding to each payment on the swap and slotted into the maturity time-bands accordingly. The positions would be long positions if the conventional bank licensee is paying fixed and receiving floating, and short positions if vice versa. (If one of the legs involves receiving/paying a fixed or floating interest rate, that exposure must be slotted into the appropriate repricing maturity band for the calculation of the interest rate risk, as described in Chapter CA-9); and
              (c) Commodity swaps where the legs are in different commodities must be incorporated in the measurement framework of the respective commodities separately, without any offsetting. Offsetting will only be permitted if the conditions set out in Paragraphs CA-12.2.1 and CA-12.2.2 are met.

              51 For banks applying other approaches to measure options risks, all Options and the associated underlying instruments must be excluded from both the maturity ladder approach and the simplified approach. The treatment of options is described, in detail, in Chapter CA-13.

              January 2015

        • CA-12.3 CA-12.3 Maturity Ladder Approach

          • CA-12.3.1

            A worked example of the maturity ladder approach is set out in Appendix CA-13 and the table in Paragraph CA-12.3.2 illustrates the maturity time-bands of the maturity ladder for each commodity.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.3.2

            The steps in the calculation of the commodities risk by the maturity ladder approach are:

            (a) The net positions in individual commodities, expressed in terms of the standard unit of measurement, are first slotted into the maturity ladder. Physical stocks are allocated to the first time-band. A separate maturity ladder is used for each commodity as defined in Section CA-12.2 earlier in this Chapter. The net positions in commodities are calculated as explained in Section CA-12.2;
            (b) Long and short positions in each time-band are matched. The sum of the matched long and short positions is multiplied first by the spot price of the commodity, and then by a spread rate of 1.5% for each time-band as set out in the table below. This represents the capital charge in order to capture forward gap and interest rate risk within a time-band (which, together, are sometimes referred to as curvature/spread risk);

            Time-bands52
            0 – 1 months
            1 – 3 months
            3 – 6 months

            6 – 12 months
            1 – 2 years
            2 – 3 years
            over 3 years
            (c) The residual (unmatched) net positions from nearer time-bands are then carried forward to offset opposite positions (i.e. long against short, and vice versa) in time-bands that are further out. However, a surcharge of 0.6% of the net position carried forward is added in respect of each time-band that the net position is carried forward, to recognise that such hedging of positions between different time-bands is imprecise. The surcharge is in addition to the capital charge for each matched amount created by carrying net positions forward, and is calculated as explained in step (b) above; and
            (d) At the end of step (c) above, there will be either only long or only short positions, to which a capital charge of 15% applies. The CBB recognises that there are differences in volatility between different commodities, but has, nevertheless, decided that one uniform capital charge for open positions in all commodities apply in the interest of simplicity of the measurement, and given the fact that conventional bank licensees normally run rather small open positions in commodities. Conventional bank licensees must submit, in writing, details of their commodities business, to enable the CBB to evaluate whether the models approach should be adopted by the conventional bank licensee, to capture the market risk on this business.

            52 For instruments, the maturity of which is on the boundary of two maturity time-bands, the instrument must be placed into the earlier maturity band. For example, instruments with a maturity of exactly one year are placed into the 6 to 12 months time-band.

            January 2015

        • CA-12.4 CA-12.4 Simplified Approach

          • CA-12.4.1

            By the simplified approach, the capital charge of 15% of the net position, long or short, in each commodity is applied to capture directional risk. Net positions in commodities are calculated as explained in Section CA-12.2.

            January 2015

          • CA-12.4.2

            An additional capital charge equivalent to 3% of the conventional bank licensee's gross positions, long plus short, in each commodity is applied to protect the conventional bank licensee against basis risk, interest rate risk and forward gap risk. In valuing the gross positions in commodity derivatives for this purpose, conventional bank licensees must use the current spot price.

            January 2015

      • CA-13 CA-13 Market Risk — Treatment of Options — (STA)

        • CA-13.1 CA-13.1 Introduction

          • CA-13.1.1

            It is recognised that the measurement of the price risk of options is inherently a difficult task, which is further complicated by the wide diversity of conventional bank licensees' activities in options. The CBB has decided that the following approaches must be adopted to the measurement of options risks:

            (a) Conventional bank licensees which solely use purchased options are permitted to use the simplified (carve-out) approach described later in this Chapter; and
            (b) Conventional bank licensees which also write options must use either the delta-plus (buffer) approach or the scenario approach, or alternatively use a comprehensive risk management model. The CBB's detailed rules for the recognition and use of internal models are included in Chapter CA-14.
            January 2015

          • CA-13.1.2

            The scenario approach and the internal models approach are generally regarded as more satisfactory for managing and measuring options risk, as they assess risk over a range of outcomes rather than focusing on the point estimate of the 'Greek' risk parameters as in the delta-plus approach. The more significant the level and/or complexity of the conventional bank licensee's options trading activities, the more the conventional bank licensee will be expected to use a sophisticated approach to the measurement of options risks. The CBB will monitor the conventional bank licensees' options trading activities, and the adequacy of the risk measurement framework adopted.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.1.3

            Where written option positions are hedged by perfectly matched long positions in exactly the same options, no capital charge for market risk is required in respect of those matched positions.

            January 2015

        • CA-13.2 CA-13.2 Simplified Approach (Carve-Out)

          • CA-13.2.1

            In the simplified approach, positions for the options and the associated underlying (hedges), cash or forward, are entirely omitted from the calculation of capital charges by the standardised methodology and are, instead, "carved out" and subject to separately calculated capital charges that incorporate both general market risk and specific risk. The capital charges thus generated are then added to the capital charges for the relevant risk category, i.e., interest rate related instruments, equities, foreign exchange and commodities as described in Chapters CA-9, CA-10, CA-11 and CA-12 respectively.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.2.2

            The capital charges for the carved out positions are as set out in the table below. As an example of how the calculation would work, if a conventional bank licensee holds 100 shares currently valued at $ 10 each, and also holds an equivalent put option with a strike price of $11, the capital charge would be as follows:
            [$ 1,000 x 16%53] minus [($ 11 – $ 10)54 x 100] = $ 60

            A similar methodology applies to options whose underlying is a foreign currency, an interest rate related instrument or a commodity.


            53 8% specific risk plus 8% general market risk.

            54 The amount the option is "in the money".

            January 2015

          • Simplified Approach: Capital Charges

            Position Treatment
            Long cash and long put

            or


            Short cash and long call (i.e., hedged positions)
            The capital charge is:

            [Market value of underlying instrument55 x Sum of specific and general market risk charges56 for the underlying] minus [Amount, if any, the option is in the money57]

            The capital charge calculated as above is bounded at zero, i.e., it cannot be a negative number.
            Long call

            or


            Long put
            (i.e., naked option positions)
            The capital charge is the lesser of:
            i) Market value of the underlying instrument x Sum of specific and general market risk charges for the underlying; and
            ii) Market value of the option58.

            55 In some cases such as foreign exchange, it may be unclear which side is the "underlying instrument"; this must be taken to be the asset which would be received if the option were exercised. In addition, the nominal value must be used for items where the market value of the underlying instrument could be zero, e.g., caps and floors, swaptions etc.

            56 Some options (e.g., where the underlying is an interest rate, a currency or a commodity) bear no specific risk, but specific risk is present in the case of options on certain interest rate related instruments (e.g., options on a corporate debt security or a corporate bond index — see Chapter CA-9 for the relevant capital charges), and in the case of options on equities and stock indices (see Chapter CA-10 for the relevant capital charges). The capital charge for currency options is 8% and for options on commodities is 15%.

            57 For options with a residual maturity of more than six months, the strike price must be compared with the forward, not the current, price. A bank unable to do this must take the "in the money" amount to be zero.

            58 Where the position does not fall within the trading book options on certain foreign exchange and commodities positions not belonging to the trading book), it is acceptable to use the book value instead of the market value.

            January 2015

        • CA-13.3 CA-13.3 Delta-Plus Method (Buffer Approach)

          • CA-13.3.1

            Conventional bank licensees which write options are allowed to include delta-weighted option positions within the standardised methodology set out in Chapters CA-9 through CA-12. Each option must be reported as a position equal to the market value of the underlying multiplied by the delta. The delta must be calculated by an adequate model with appropriate documentation of the process and controls, to enable the CBB to review such models, if considered necessary. A worked example of the delta-plus method is set out in Appendix CA-14.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.3.2

            Since delta does not sufficiently cover the risks associated with options positions, there will be additional capital buffers to cover gamma (which measures the rate of change of delta) and vega (which measures the sensitivity of the value of an option with respect to a change in volatility), in order to calculate the total capital charge. The gamma and vega buffers must be calculated by an adequate exchange model or the conventional bank licensee's proprietary options pricing model, with appropriate documentation of the process and controls, to enable the CBB to review such models, if considered necessary.

            January 2015

          • Treatment of Delta

            • CA-13.3.3

              The treatment of the delta-weighted positions, for the calculation of the capital charges arising from delta risk, is summarised in Paragraphs CA-13.3.4 to CA-13.3.9.

              January 2015

          • Where the Underlying is a Debt Security or an Interest Rate

            • CA-13.3.4

              The delta-weighted option positions are slotted into the interest rate time-bands as set out in Chapter CA-9. A two-legged approach must be used as for other derivatives, as explained in Chapter CA-9, requiring one entry at the time the underlying contract takes effect and a second at the time the underlying contract matures. A few examples to elucidate the two-legged treatment are set out below:

              (a) A bought call option on a June three-month interest rate future will, in April, be considered, on the basis of its delta-equivalent value, to be a long position with a maturity of five months and a short position with a maturity of two months;
              (b) A written option with the same underlying as in (a) above, will be included in the measurement framework as a long position with a maturity of two months and a short position with a maturity of five months; and
              (c) A two months call option on a bond future where delivery of the bond takes place in September will be considered in April, as being long the bond and short a five months deposit, both positions being delta-weighted.
              January 2015

            • CA-13.3.5

              Floating rate instruments with caps or floors are treated as a combination of floating rate securities and a series of European-style options. For example, the holder of a three-year floating rate bond indexed to six-month LIBOR with a cap of 10% must treat it as:

              (a) A debt security that reprices in six months; and
              (b) A series of five written call options on an FRA with a reference rate of 10%, each with a negative sign at the time the underlying FRA takes effect and a positive sign at the time the underlying FRA matures.
              January 2015

            • CA-13.3.6

              The rules applying to closely matched positions, set out in Paragraph CA-9.8.2, also apply in this respect.

              January 2015

          • Where the Underlying is an Equity Instrument

            • CA-13.3.7

              The delta-weighted positions are incorporated in the measure of market risk described in Chapter CA-10. For purposes of this calculation, each national market is treated as a separate underlying.

              January 2015

          • Options on Foreign Exchange and Gold Positions

            • CA-13.3.8

              The net delta-based equivalent of the foreign currency and gold options are incorporated in the measurement of the exposure for the respective currency or gold position, as described in Chapter CA-11.

              January 2015

          • Options on Commodities

            • CA-13.3.9

              The delta-weighted positions are incorporated in the measurement of the commodities risk by the simplified approach or the maturity ladder approach, as described in Chapter CA-12.

              January 2015

          • Calculation of the Gamma and Vega Buffers

            • CA-13.3.10

              As explained in Paragraph CA-13.3.2, in addition to the above capital charges to cover delta risk, conventional bank licensees are required to calculate additional capital charges to cover the gamma and vega risks. The additional capital charges are calculated as follows:

              Gamma

              (a) For each individual option position (including hedge positions), a gamma impact is calculated according to the following formula derived from the Taylor series expansion:

              Gamma impact = 0.5 x Gamma x VU

              where VU = variation of the underlying of the option, calculated as in (b) below;
              (b) VU is calculated as follows:
              (i) For interest rate options59, where the underlying is a bond, the market value of the underlying is multiplied by the risk weights set out in Section CA-9.4. An equivalent calculation is carried out where the underlying is an interest rate, based on the assumed changes in yield as set out in the table in Section CA-9.5;
              (ii) For options on equities and equity indices, the market value of the underlying is multiplied by 8%;
              (iii) For foreign exchange and gold options, the market value of the underlying is multiplied by 8%; and
              (iv) For commodities options, the market value of the underlying is multiplied by 15%;
              (c) For the purpose of the calculation of the gamma buffer, the following positions are treated as the same underlying:
              (i) For interest rates, each time-band as set out in the table in Section CA-9.4. Positions must be slotted into separate maturity ladders by currency. Conventional bank licensees using the duration method must use the time-bands as set out in the table in Section CA-9.5;
              (ii) For equities and stock indices, each individual national market;
              (iii) For foreign currencies and gold, each currency pair and gold; and
              (iv) For commodities, each individual commodity as defined in Section CA-12.2;
              (d) Each option on the same underlying will have a gamma impact that is either positive or negative. These individual gamma impacts are summed, resulting in a net gamma impact for each underlying that is either positive or negative. Only those net gamma impacts that are negative are included in the capital calculation;
              (e) The total gamma capital charge is the sum of the absolute value of the net negative gamma impacts calculated for each underlying as explained in (d) above;

              Vega

              (f) For volatility risk (vega), conventional bank licensees are required to calculate the capital charges by multiplying the sum of the vegas for all options on the same underlying, as defined above, by a proportional shift in volatility of ±25%; and
              (g) The total vega capital charge is the sum of the absolute value of the individual vega capital charges calculated for each underlying.
              January 2015

              59 For interest rate and equity options, the present set of rules do not attempt to capture specific risk when calculating gamma capital Charges. See Section CA-13.4 for an explanation of the CBB's views on this subject.

            • CA-13.3.11

              The capital charges for delta, gamma and vega risks described in Paragraphs CA-13.3.1 through CA-13.3.10 are in addition to the specific risk capital charges which are determined separately by multiplying the delta-equivalent of each option position by the specific risk weights set out in Chapters CA-9 through CA-12.

              January 2015

            • CA-13.3.12

              To summarise, capital requirements for, say OTC options, applying the delta-plus method are as follows:

              (a) Counterparty risk capital charges (on purchased options only), calculated in accordance with the credit risk rules (see also Appendix CA-2); PLUS
              (b) Specific risk capital charges (calculated as explained in Paragraph CA-13.3.11); PLUS
              (c) Delta risk capital charges (calculated as explained in Paragraphs CA-13.3.3 through CA-13.3.9); PLUS
              (d) Gamma and vega capital buffers (calculated as explained in Paragraph CA-13.3.10).
              January 2015

        • CA-13.4 CA-13.4 Scenario Approach

          • CA-13.4.1

            As stated in Section CA-13.1, conventional bank licensees which have a significant level of options trading activities, or have complex options trading strategies, must use more sophisticated methods for measuring and monitoring the options risks. Conventional bank licensees with the appropriate capability will be permitted, with the prior approval of the CBB, to base the market risk capital charge for options portfolios and associated hedging positions on scenario matrix analysis. Before giving its approval, the CBB will closely review the accuracy of the analysis that is constructed. Furthermore, like in the case of internal models, the conventional bank licensees' use of scenario analysis as part of the standardised methodology will also be subject to external validation, and to those of the qualitative standards listed in Chapter CA-14 which are appropriate given the nature of the business.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.2

            The scenario matrix analysis involves specifying a fixed range of changes in the option portfolio's risk factors and calculating changes in the value of the option portfolio at various points along this "grid" or "matrix". For the purpose of calculating the capital charge, the conventional bank licensee must revalue the option portfolio using matrices for simultaneous changes in the option's underlying rate or price and in the volatility of that rate or price. A different matrix is set up for each individual underlying as defined in Section CA-13.3. As an alternative, in respect of interest rate options, conventional bank licensees which are significant traders in such options are permitted to base the calculation on a minimum of six sets of time- bands. When applying this alternative method, not more than three of the time-bands as defined in Chapter CA-9 must be combined into any one set.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.3

            The first dimension of the matrix involves a specified range of changes in the option's underlying rate or price. The CBB has set the range, for each risk category, as follows:

            (a) Interest rate related instruments — The range for interest rates is consistent with the assumed changes in yield set out in Section CA-9.5. Those conventional bank licensees applying the alternative method of grouping time-bands into sets, as explained in Paragraph CA-13.4.2, must use, for each set of time-bands, the highest of the assumed changes in yield applicable to the individual time-bands in that group. If, for example, the time-bands 3 to 4 years, 4 to 5 years and 5 to 7 years are combined, the highest assumed change in yield of these three bands would be 0.75 which would be applicable to that set;
            (b) For equity instruments, the range is ±8%;
            (c) For foreign exchange and gold, the range is ±8%; and
            (d) For commodities, the range is ±15%.

            For all risk categories, at least seven observations (including the current observation) must be used to divide the range into equally spaced intervals.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.4

            The second dimension of the matrix entails a change in the volatility of the underlying rate or price. A single change in the volatility of the underlying rate or price equal to a shift in volatility of ±25% is applied.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.5

            The CBB will closely monitor the need to reset the parameters for the amounts by which the price of the underlying instrument and volatility must be shifted to form the rows and columns of the scenario matrix. The parameters set, as above, only reflect general market risk (see Paragraphs CA-13.4.10 to CA-13.4.12).

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.6

            After calculating the matrix, each cell contains the net profit or loss of the option and the underlying hedge instrument. The general market risk capital charge for each underlying is then calculated as the largest loss contained in the matrix.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.7

            In addition to the capital charge calculated as above, the specific risk capital charge is determined separately by multiplying the delta-equivalent of each option position by the specific risk weights set out in Chapters CA-9 through CA-12.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.8

            To summarise, capital requirements for, say OTC options, applying the scenario approach are as follows:

            (a) Counterparty risk capital charges (on purchased options only), calculated in accordance with the credit risk rules (see also Appendix CA-2); PLUS
            (b) Specific risk capital charges (calculated as explained in Paragraph CA-13.4.7); PLUS
            (c) Directional and volatility risk capital charges (i.e., the worst case loss from a given scenario matrix analysis).
            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.9

            Conventional bank licensees doing business in certain classes of complex exotic options (e.g. barrier options involving discontinuities in deltas etc.), or in options at the money that are close to expiry, are required to use either the scenario approach or the internal models approach, both of which can accommodate more detailed revaluation approaches. The CBB expects the concerned conventional bank licensees to work with it closely to produce an agreed method, within the framework of these rules. If a conventional bank licensee uses scenario matrix analysis, it must be able to demonstrate that no substantially larger loss could fall between the nodes.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.10

            In drawing up the delta-plus and the scenario approaches, the CBB's present set of rules do not attempt to capture specific risk other than the delta-related elements (which are captured as explained in Paragraphs CA-13.4.7 and CA-13.4.11). The CBB recognises that introduction of those other specific risk elements will make the measurement framework much more complex. On the other hand, the simplifying assumptions used in these rules will result in a relatively conservative treatment of certain options positions.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.11

            In addition to the options risks described earlier in this Chapter, the CBB is conscious of the other risks also associated with options, e.g., rho or interest rate risk (the rate of change of the value of the option with respect to the interest rate) and theta (the rate of change of the value of the option with respect to time). While not proposing a measurement system for those risks at present, the CBB expects conventional bank licensees undertaking significant options business, at the very least, to monitor such risks closely. Additionally, conventional bank licensees are permitted to incorporate rho into their capital calculations for interest rate risk, if they wish to do so.

            January 2015

          • CA-13.4.12

            The CBB will closely review the treatment of options for the calculation of market risk capital charges, particularly in the light of the aspects described in Paragraphs CA-13.4.10 and CA-13.4.11.

            January 2015

      • CA-14 CA-14 Market Risk — Use of Internal Models

        • CA-14.1 CA-14.1 Introduction

          • CA-14.1.1

            As stated in Chapter CA-1, as an alternative to the standardised approach to the measurement of market risks (which is described in Chapters CA-9 through CA-13), and subject to the explicit prior approval of the CBB, conventional bank licensees will be allowed to use risk measures derived from their own internal models.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.1.2

            This Chapter describes the seven sets of conditions that should be met before a conventional bank licensee is allowed to-use the internal models approach, namely:

            (a) General criteria regarding the adequacy of the risk management system;
            (b) Qualitative standards for internal oversight of the use of models, notably by senior management;
            (c) Guidelines for specifying an appropriate set of market risk factors (i.e., the market rates and prices that affect the value of a conventional bank licensee's positions);
            (d) Quantitative standards setting out the use of common minimum statistical parameters for measuring risk;
            (e) Guidelines for stress testing;
            (f) Validation procedures for external oversight of the use of models; and
            (g) Rules for conventional bank licensees which use a mixture of the internal models approach and the standardised approach.
            January 2015

          • CA-14.1.3

            The standardised methodology, described in Chapters CA-9 through CA-13, uses a "building-block" approach in which the specific risk and the general market risk arising from debt and equity positions are calculated separately. The focus of most internal models is a conventional bank licensee's general market risk exposure, typically leaving specific risk (i.e., exposures to specific issuers of debt securities and equities) to be measured largely through separate credit risk measurement systems. Conventional bank licensees applying models are subject to separate capital charges for the specific risk not captured by their models, which must be calculated by the standardised methodology.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.1.4

            While the models recognition criteria described in this chapter are primarily intended for comprehensive Value-at-Risk (VaR) models, nevertheless, the same set of criteria will be applied, to the extent that it is appropriate, to other pre-processing or valuation models the output of which is fed into the standardised measurement system, e.g., interest rate sensitivity models (from which the residual positions are fed into the duration ladders) and option pricing models (for the calculation of the delta, gamma and vega sensitivities).

            January 2015

          • CA-14.1.5

            As a number of strict conditions are required to be met before internal models can be recognised by the CBB, including external validation. Conventional bank licensees that are contemplating applying internal models must submit their detailed written proposals for the CBB's approval.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.1.6

            As the model approval process will encompass a review of both the model and its operating environment, it is not the case that a commercially produced model which is recognised for one conventional bank licensee will automatically be recognised for another bank.

            January 2015

        • CA-14.2 CA-14.2 General Criteria

          • CA-14.2.1

            The CBB will give its approval for the use of internal models to measure market risks only if, in addition to the detailed requirements described later in this chapter, it is satisfied that the following general criteria are met:

            (a) That the conventional bank licensee's risk management system is conceptually sound and is implemented with integrity;
            (b) That the conventional bank licensee has, in the CBB's view, sufficient numbers of staff skilled in the use of sophisticated models not only in the trading area but also in the risk control, audit and the back office areas;
            (c) That the conventional bank licensee's models have, in the CBB's judgement, a proven track record of reasonable accuracy in measuring risk. The CBB recognises that the use of internal models is, for most banks in Bahrain, a relatively new development and, therefore, it is difficult to establish a track record of reasonable accuracy. The CBB, therefore, will require a period of initial monitoring and live testing of a conventional bank licensee's internal model before it is used for supervisory capital purposes; and
            (d) That the conventional bank licensee regularly conducts stress tests as outlined in Section CA-14.7 and conducts back-testing as described in Section CA-14.6.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.3 CA-14.3 Qualitative Standards

          • CA-14.3.1

            In order to ensure that conventional bank licensees using models have market risk management systems that are conceptually sound and implemented with integrity, the CBB has set the following qualitative criteria that conventional bank licensees are required to meet before they are permitted to use the models-based approach for calculating capital charge. Apart from influencing the CBB's decision to permit a conventional bank licensee to use internal models, where such permission is granted, the extent to which the conventional bank licensee meets the qualitative criteria will further influence the level at which the CBB will set the multiplication factor for that conventional bank licensee, referred to in Section CA-14.5. Only those conventional bank licensees whose models, in the CBB's judgement, are in full compliance with the qualitative criteria will be eligible for application of the minimum multiplication factor of 3. The qualitative criteria include the following:

            (a) The conventional bank licensee must have an independent risk management unit that is responsible for the design and implementation of the conventional bank licensee's risk management system. The unit must produce and analyse daily reports on the output of the conventional bank licensee's risk measurement model, including an evaluation of the relationship between the measures of risk exposure and the trading limits. This unit must be independent from the business trading units and must report directly to the senior management of the conventional bank licensee;
            (b) The independent risk management unit must conduct a regular back-testing programme, i.e. an ex-post comparison of the risk measure generated by the model against the actual daily changes in portfolio value over longer periods of time, as well as hypothetical changes based on static positions. See CA-14.5.1 (j);
            (c) The unit must also conduct the initial and on-going validation of the internal model. Further guidance on validation of internal models is given in Section CA-14.12;
            (d) The board of directors and senior management of the conventional bank licensee must be actively involved in the risk management process and must regard such process as an essential aspect of the business to which significant resources need to be devoted. In this regard, the daily reports prepared by the independent risk management unit must be reviewed by a level of management with sufficient seniority and authority to enforce both reductions of positions taken by individual traders and reductions in the conventional bank licensee's overall risk exposure;
            (e) The conventional bank licensee's internal model must be closely integrated into the day-to-day risk management process of the conventional bank licensee. Its output must, accordingly, be an integral part of the process of planning, monitoring and controlling the conventional bank licensee's market risk profile;
            (f) The risk measurement system must be used in conjunction with the internal trading and exposure limits. In this regard, the trading limits must be related to the conventional bank licensee's risk measurement model in a manner that is consistent over time and that is well-understood by both traders and senior management;
            (g) A routine and rigorous programme of stress testing, along the general lines set out in Section CA-14.6, must be in place as a supplement to the risk analysis based on the day-to-day output of the conventional bank licensee's s risk measurement model. The results of stress testing must be reviewed periodically by senior management and must be reflected in the policies and limits set by management and the board of directors. Where stress tests reveal particular vulnerability to a given set of circumstances, prompt steps must be taken to manage those risks appropriately (e.g., by hedging against that outcome or reducing the size of the conventional bank licensee's exposures);
            (h) The conventional bank licensee must have a routine in place for ensuring compliance with a documented set of internal policies, controls and procedures concerning the operation of the risk measurement system. The conventional bank licensee's risk measurement system must be well documented, for example, through a risk management manual that describes the basic principles of the risk management system and that provides an explanation of the empirical techniques used to measure market risk; and
            (i) An independent review of the risk measurement system must be carried out regularly in the conventional bank licensee's own internal auditing process. This review must include both the activities of the business trading units and of the independent risk management unit. A review, by the internal auditor, of the overall risk management process must take place at regular intervals (ideally not less than once every six months) and must specifically address, at a minimum:
            (i) The adequacy of the documentation of the risk management system and process;
            (ii) The organisation of the risk management unit;
            (iii) The integration of market risk measures into daily risk management;
            (iv) The approval process for risk pricing models and valuation systems used by front- and back-office personnel;
            (v) The validation of any significant changes in the risk measurement process;
            (vi) The scope of market risks captured by the risk measurement model;
            (vii) The integrity of the management information system;
            (viii) The accuracy and completeness of position data;
            (ix) The verification of the consistency, timeliness and reliability of data sources used to run internal models, including the independence of such data sources;
            (x) The accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions;
            (xi) The accuracy of valuation and risk transformation calculations; and
            (xii) The verification of the model's accuracy through frequent back-testing as described in (b) above and in Appendix CA-15.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.4 CA-14.4 Specification of Market Risk Factors

          • CA-14.4.1

            An important part of a conventional bank licensee's internal market risk measurement system is the specification of an appropriate set of market risk factors, i.e. the market rates and prices that affect the value of the conventional bank licensee's trading positions. The risk factors contained in a market risk measurement system must be sufficient to capture the risks inherent in the conventional bank licensee's portfolio of on- and off-balance-sheet trading positions. Conventional bank licensees must follow the CBB's guidelines, set out below, for specifying the risk factors for their internal models. Where a conventional bank licensee has difficulty in specifying the risk factors for any currency or market within a risk category, in accordance with the following guidelines, the conventional bank licensee must immediately contact the CBB. The CBB will review and discuss the specific circumstances of each such case with the concerned bank, and will decide alternative methods of calculating the risks which are not captured by the conventional bank licensee's model:

            (a) Factors that are deemed relevant for pricing must be included as risk factors in the value-at-risk model. Where a risk factor is incorporated in a pricing model but not in the value-at-risk model, the conventional bank licensees must justify this omission to the satisfaction of the CBB. In addition, the value-at-risk model must capture nonlinearities for options and other relevant products (e.g. mortgage backed securities, tranched exposures or n-th-to-default credit derivatives), as well as correlation risk and basis risk (e.g. between credit default swaps and bonds). Moreover, the CBB has to be satisfied that proxies are used which show a good track record for the actual position held (i.e. an equity index for a position in an individual stock).
            (b) For interest rates:
            (i) There must be a set of risk factors corresponding to interest rates in each currency in which the conventional bank licensee has interest-rate-sensitive on- or off-balance-sheet positions;
            (ii) The risk measurement system must model the yield curve using one of a number of generally accepted approaches, for example, by estimating forward rates of zero coupon yields. The yield curve must be divided into various maturity segments in order to capture variation in the volatility of rates along the yield curve; there will typically be one risk factor corresponding to each maturity segment. For material exposures to interest rate movements in the major currencies and markets, conventional bank licensees must model the yield curve using a minimum of six factors. However, the number of risk factors used must ultimately be driven by the nature of the conventional bank licensee's trading strategies. For instance, a conventional bank licensee which has a portfolio of various types of securities across many points of the yield curve and which engages in complex arbitrage strategies would require a greater number of risk factors to capture interest rate risk accurately;
            (iii) The risk measurement system must incorporate separate risk factors to capture spread risk (e.g. between bonds and swaps). A variety of approaches may be used to capture the spread risk arising from less than perfectly correlated movements between government and other fixed-income interest rates, such as specifying a completely separate yield curve for non-government fixed-income instruments (for instance, swaps or municipal securities) or estimating the spread over government rates at various points along the yield curve;
            (c) For exchange rates (which includes gold):
            (i) The risk measurement system should incorporate risk factors corresponding to the individual foreign currencies in which the conventional bank licensee's positions are denominated. Since the value-at-risk figure calculated by the risk measurement system will be expressed in the conventional bank licensee's reporting currency, any net position denominated in a currency other than the reporting currency will introduce a foreign exchange risk. Thus, there must be risk factors corresponding to the exchange rate between the reporting currency and each other currency in which the conventional bank licensee has a significant exposure;
            (d) For equity prices:
            (i) There must be risk factors corresponding to each of the equity markets in which the conventional bank licensee holds significant positions;
            (ii) At a minimum, there must be a risk factor that is designed to capture market-wide movements in equity prices (e.g., a market index). Positions in individual securities or in sector indices may be expressed in "beta-equivalents" relative to this market-wide index;
            (iii) A somewhat more detailed approach would be to have risk factors corresponding to various sectors of the overall equity market (for instance, industry sectors or cyclical and non-cyclical sectors). As above, positions in individual stocks within each sector could be expressed in "beta-equivalents" relative to the sector index;
            (iv) The most extensive approach would be to have risk factors corresponding to the volatility of individual equity issues; and
            (v) The sophistication and nature of the modelling technique for a given market must correspond to the conventional bank licensee's exposure to the overall market as well as its concentration in individual equity issues in that market; and
            (e) For commodity prices:
            (i) There must be risk factors corresponding to each of the commodity markets in which the conventional bank licensee holds significant positions (also see Section CA-12.1);
            (ii) For conventional bank licensees with relatively limited positions in commodity-based instruments, a straightforward specification of risk factors is acceptable. Such a specification would likely entail one risk factor for each commodity price to which the conventional bank licensee is exposed. In cases where the aggregate positions are reasonably small, it may be acceptable to use a single risk factor for a relatively broad sub-category of commodities (for instance, a single risk factor for all types of oil). However, conventional bank licensees which propose to use this simplified approach must obtain the prior written approval of the CBB; and
            (iii) For more active trading, the model must also take account of variation in the "convenience yield" between derivatives positions such as forwards and swaps and cash positions in the commodity.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.5 CA-14.5 Quantitative Standards

          • CA-14.5.1

            The following minimum quantitative standards apply for the purpose of calculating the capital charge:

            (a) "Value-at-risk" must be computed on a daily basis;
            (b) In calculating the value-at-risk, a 99th percentile, one-tailed confidence interval must be used;
            (c) In calculating the value-at-risk, an instantaneous price shock equivalent to a 10-day movement in prices must be used, i.e., the minimum "holding period" is ten trading days. Conventional bank licensees may use value-at-risk numbers calculated according to shorter holding periods scaled up to ten days, for example, by the square root of time (for the treatment of options, also see (h) below). A conventional bank licensee using this approach must justify the reasonableness of its approach to the satisfaction of the CBB during the annual model review process performed by the external auditor;
            (d) The minimum historical observation period (sample period) for calculating value-at-risk is one year. For conventional bank licensees which use a weighting scheme or other methods for the historical observation period, the "effective" observation period must be at least one year (i.e., the weighted average time lag of the individual observations cannot be less than 6 months), and the method results in a capital charge at least equivalent to a one year observation period.

            The CBB may, as an exceptional case, require a conventional bank licensee to calculate its value-at-risk applying a shorter observation period if, in the CBB's judgement, this is justified by a significant upsurge in price volatility;
            (e) Conventional bank licensees must update their data sets no less frequently than once every week and must also reassess them whenever market prices are subject to material changes. The updating process must be flexible enough to allow for more frequent updates;
            (f) No particular type of model is prescribed by the CBB. So long as each model used captures all the material risks run by the conventional bank licensee, as set out in Section CA-14.4, conventional bank licensees is free to use models based, for example, on variance-covariance matrices, historical simulations, or Monte Carlo simulations;
            (g) Conventional bank licensees must have discretion to recognise empirical correlations within broad risk categories (i.e., interest rates, exchange rates, equity prices and commodity prices, including related options volatilities in each risk factor category). Conventional bank licensees are not permitted to recognise empirical correlations across broad risk categories without the prior approval of the CBB. Conventional bank licensees may apply, on a case-by-case basis, for empirical correlations across broad risk categories to be recognised by the CBB, subject to its satisfaction with the soundness and integrity of the conventional bank licensee's system for measuring those correlations;
            (h) Conventional bank licensees' models must accurately capture the unique risks associated with options within each of the broad risk categories. The following criteria apply to the measurement of options risk:
            (i) Conventional bank licensees' models must capture the non-linear price characteristics of options positions;
            (ii) Conventional bank licensees must ultimately move towards the application of a full 10-day price shock to options positions or positions that display option-like characteristics. In the interim period, conventional bank licensees may adjust their capital measure for options risk through other methods, e.g., periodic simulations or stress testing;
            (iii) Each conventional bank licensee's risk measurement system must have a set of risk factors that captures the volatilities of the rates and prices underlying the option positions, i.e., vega risk. Conventional bank licensees with relatively large and/or complex options portfolios must have detailed specifications of the relevant volatilities. This means that conventional bank licensees must measure the volatilities of options positions broken down by different maturities;
            (i) In addition, a conventional bank licensee must calculate a 'stressed value-at-risk' measure. This measure is intended to replicate a value-at-risk calculation that would be generated on the conventional bank licensee's current portfolio if the relevant market factors were experiencing a period of stress; and must therefore be based on the 10-day, 99th percentile, one-tailed confidence interval value-at-risk measure of the current portfolio, with model inputs calibrated to historical data from a continuous 12-month period of significant financial stress relevant to the conventional bank licensee's portfolio. The period used must be approved by the CBB and regularly reviewed. As an example, for many portfolios, a 12-month period relating to significant losses in 2007/2008 would adequately reflect a period of such stress, although other periods relevant to the current portfolio must be considered by the conventional bank licensee;
            (j) As no particular model is prescribed under Subparagraph (f), different techniques might need to be used to translate the model used for value-at-risk into one that delivers a stressed value-at-risk. For example, conventional bank licensees must consider applying anti-thetic data, or applying absolute rather than relative volatilities to deliver an appropriate stressed value-at-risk. The stressed value-at-risk must be calculated at least weekly;
            (k) Each conventional bank licensee must meet, on a daily basis, a capital requirement expressed as the sum of:
            (i) The higher of (1) its previous day's value-at-risk number measured according to the parameters specified in this Section (VaRt-1); and (2) an average of the daily value-at-risk measures on each of the preceding sixty business days (VaR avg), multiplied by a multiplication factor (mc); plus.
            (ii) The higher of (1) its latest available stressed-value-at-risk number calculated according to (i) above (sVaRt-1); and (2) an average of the stressed value-at-risk numbers calculated according to (i) above over the preceding sixty business days (sVaRavg), multiplied by a multiplication factor (ms).

            Therefore, the capital requirement (c) is calculated according to the following formula:

            c =max {VaRt-1; mc · VaRavg} + max { sVaRt-1; ms · sVaRavg};
            (l) The multiplication factors mc and ms is set by the CBB, separately for each individual conventional bank licensee, on the basis of the CBB's assessment of the quality of the conventional bank licensee's risk management system, subject to an absolute minimum of 3 for mc and an absolute minimum of 3 for ms. Conventional bank licensees must add to these factors set by the CBB, a "plus" directly related to the ex-post performance of the model, thereby introducing a built-in positive incentive to maintain the predictive quality of the model. The plus will range from 0 to 1 based on the outcome of the conventional bank licensee's back-testing. The back-testing results applicable for calculating the plus are based on value-at-risk only and not stressed value-at-risk. If the back-testing results are satisfactory and the conventional bank licensee meets all of the qualitative standards referred in Section CA-14.3 above, the plus factor could be zero. Appendix 15 presents in detail the approach to be followed for back-testing and the plus factor. Conventional bank licensees must strictly comply with this approach; and
            (m) As stated earlier in Section CA-14.1, conventional bank licensees applying models are also subject to a capital charge to cover specific risk (as defined under the standardised approach) of interest rate related instruments and equity instruments. The manner in which the specific risk capital charge is to be calculated is set out in Section CA-14.10.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.6 CA-14.6 Back-Testing

          • CA-14.6.1

            The contents of this Section outline the key requirements as set out in Appendix 15. The appendix presents in detail the approach to be followed for back-testing by the conventional bank licensees.

            January 2015

          • Key Requirements

            • CA-14.6.2

              The contents of this Section lay down recommendations for carrying out back-testing procedures in order to determine the accuracy and robustness of conventional bank licensee's internal models for measuring market risk capital requirements. These back-testing procedures typically consist of a periodic comparison of the conventional bank licensee's daily value-at-risk measures with the subsequent daily profit or loss ("trading outcome"). The procedure involves calculating and identifying the number of times over the prior 250 business days that observed daily trading losses exceed the conventional bank licensee's one-day, 99% confidence level VaR estimate (so-called "exceptions").

              January 2015

            • CA-14.6.3

              Based on the number of exceptions identified from the back-testing procedures, the conventional bank licensees will be classified into three exception categories for the determination of the "scaling factor" to be applied to the conventional bank licensees' market risk measure generated by its internal models. The three categories, termed as zones and distinguished by colours into a hierarchy of responses, are listed below:

              (a) Green zone;
              (b) Yellow zone; and
              (c) Red zone.
              January 2015

            • CA-14.6.4

              The green zone corresponds to back-testing results that do not themselves suggest a problem with the quality or accuracy of a conventional bank licensee's internal model. The yellow zone encompasses results that do raise questions in this regard, but where such a conclusion is not definitive. The red zone indicates a back-testing result that almost certainly indicates a problem with a conventional bank licensee's risk model.

              January 2015

            • CA-14.6.5

              The corresponding "scaling factors" applicable to conventional bank licensees falling into respective zones based on their back-testing results are shown in Table 2 of Appendix CA-15.

              January 2015

        • CA-14.7 CA-14.7 Stress Testing

          • CA-14.7.1

            Conventional bank licensees that use the internal models approach for calculating market risk capital requirements must have in place a rigorous and comprehensive stress testing programme. Stress testing to identify events or influences that could greatly impact the conventional bank licensee is a key component of a conventional bank licensee's assessment of its capital position.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.2

            Conventional bank licensees' stress scenarios must cover a range of factors that can create extraordinary losses or gains in trading portfolios, or make the control of risk in those portfolios very difficult. These factors include low-probability events in all major types of risks, including the various components of market, credit and operational risks. Stress scenarios must shed light on the impact of such events on positions that display both linear and non-linear characteristics (i.e., options and instruments that have option-like characteristics).

            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.3

            Conventional bank licensees' stress tests must be both of a quantitative and qualitative nature, incorporating both market risk and liquidity aspects of market disturbances. Quantitative criteria must identify plausible stress scenarios to which conventional bank licensees could be exposed. Qualitative criteria must emphasise that two major goals of stress testing are to evaluate the capacity of the conventional bank licensee's capital to absorb potential large losses and to identify steps the conventional bank licensee can take to reduce its risk and conserve capital. This assessment is integral to setting and evaluating the conventional bank licensee's management strategy and the results of stress testing must be routinely communicated to senior management and, periodically, to the conventional bank licensee's board of directors.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.4

            Conventional bank licensees must combine the use of stress scenarios as advised under Subparagraphs (a), (b) and (c) by the CBB, with stress tests developed by the conventional bank licensees themselves to reflect their specific risk characteristics. The CBB may ask conventional bank licensees to provide information on stress testing in three broad areas, as follows:

            (a) Scenarios requiring no simulation by the bank:

            Conventional bank licensees must have information on the largest losses experienced during the reporting period available for review by the CBB. This loss information will be compared with the level of capital that results from a conventional bank licensee's internal measurement system. For example, it could provide the CBB with a picture of how many days of peak day losses would have been covered by a given value-at-risk estimate;
            (b) Scenarios requiring simulation by the bank:

            Conventional bank licensees must subject their portfolios to a series of simulated stress scenarios and provide the CBB with the results. These scenarios could include testing the current portfolio against past periods of significant disturbance, for example, the 9/11 attacks on the USA, the 1987 equity market crash, the Exchange Rate Mechanism crises of 1992 and 1993 or the fall in the international bond markets in the first quarter of 1994, the 1998 Russian financial crisis, the 2000 bursting of the technology stock bubble or the 2007/2008 sub-prime crisis, incorporating both the large price movements and the sharp reduction in liquidity associated with these events. A second type of scenario would evaluate the sensitivity of the conventional bank licensee's market risk exposure to changes in the assumptions about volatilities and correlations. Applying this test would require an evaluation of the historical range of variation for volatilities and correlations and evaluation of the conventional bank licensee's current positions against the extreme values of the historical range. Due consideration must be given to the sharp variation that, at times, has occurred in a matter of days in periods of significant market disturbance. For example, the above-mentioned situations involved correlations within risk factors approaching the extreme values of 1 and -1 for several days at the height of the disturbance; and
            (c) Scenarios developed by the bank to capture the specific characteristics of its portfolio:

            In addition to the general scenarios prescribed by the CBB under Subparagraphs (a) and (b), each conventional bank licensee must also develop its own stress scenarios which it identifies as most adverse based on the characteristics of its portfolio (e.g., any significant political or economic developments that may result in a sharp move in oil prices). Conventional bank licensees must provide the CBB with a description of the methodology used to identify and carry out the scenarios as well as with a description of the results derived from these stress tests.
            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.5

            Once a stress scenario has been identified, it must be used for conducting stress tests at least once every quarter, as long as the scenario continues to be relevant to the conventional bank licensee's portfolio.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.6

            The results of all stress tests must be reviewed by senior management within 15 days from the time they are available, and must be promptly reflected in the policies and limits set by management and the board of directors. Moreover, if the testing reveals particular vulnerability to a given set of circumstances, the CBB requires the conventional bank licensee to take prompt steps to manage those risks appropriately (e.g., by hedging against that outcome or reducing the size of its exposures).

            January 2015

          • CA-14.7.7

            Conventional bank licensees must conduct, at least weekly, a set of pre-determined stress-tests for the correlation trading portfolio encompassing shocks to default rates, recovery rates, credit spreads, and correlations. Appendix CA-19 provides guidance on the stress testing that must be undertaken to satisfy this requirement.

            January 2015

        • CA-14.8 CA-14.8 External Validation of Models

          • CA-14.8.1

            Before granting its approval for the use of internal models by a conventional bank licensee, the CBB requires that the models be validated by both the internal and external auditors of the conventional bank licensee. The CBB will review the validation procedures performed by the internal and external auditors, and may independently carry out further validation procedures.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.8.2

            The internal validation procedures to be carried out by the internal auditor are set out in Section CA-14.3. As stated in that Section, the internal auditor's review of the overall risk management process must take place at regular intervals (not less than once every six months). The internal auditor must make a report to senior management and the board of directors, in writing, of the results of the validation procedures. The report must be made available to the CBB for its review.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.8.3

            The validation of the models by the external auditor must include, at a minimum, the following steps:

            (a) Verifying and ensuring that the internal validation processes described in Section CA-14.3 are operating satisfactorily;
            (b) Ensuring that the formulae used in the calculation process as well as for the pricing of options and other complex instruments are validated by a qualified unit, which in all cases must be independent from the trading area;
            (c) Checking and ensuring that the structure of the internal models is adequate with respect to the conventional bank licensee's activities and geographical coverage;
            (d) Checking the results of the conventional bank licensee's back-testing of its internal measurement system (i.e., comparing value-at-risk estimates with actual profits and losses) to ensure that the model provides a reliable measure of potential losses over time; and
            (e) Making sure that data flows and processes associated with the risk measurement system are transparent and accessible.
            January 2015

          • CA-14.8.4

            The external auditor must carry out their validation/review procedures, at a minimum, once every year. Based on the above procedures, the external auditor must make a report, in writing, on the accuracy of the conventional bank licensee's models, including all significant findings of their work. The report must be addressed to the senior management and/or the board of directors of the conventional bank licensee, and a copy of the report must be made available to the CBB. The mandatory annual review by the external auditor must be carried out during the third quarter of the calendar year, and the CBB expects to receive their final report by 30 September of each year. The results of additional validation procedures carried out by the external auditor at other times during the year must be made available to the CBB promptly.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.8.5

            Conventional bank licensees are required to ensure that external auditors and the CBB's representatives are in a position to have easy access, whenever they judge it necessary and under appropriate procedures, to the models' specifications and parameters as well as to the results of, and the underlying inputs to, their value-at-risk calculations.

            January 2015

        • CA-14.9 CA-14.9 Letter of Model Recognition

          • CA-14.9.1

            As stated in Section CA-14.1, conventional bank licensees which propose to use internal models for the calculation of their market risk capital requirements must submit their detailed proposals, in writing, to the CBB. The CBB will review these proposals, and upon ensuring that the conventional bank licensee's internal models meet all the criteria for recognition set out earlier in this Chapter, and after satisfying itself with the results of validation procedures carried out by the internal and external auditors and/or by itself, will issue a letter of model recognition to the conventional bank licensees.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.9.2

            The letter of model recognition is specific. It will set out the products covered, the method for calculating capital requirements on the products and the conditions of model recognition. In the case of preprocessing models, the conventional bank licensee will also be told how the output of recognised models must feed into the processing of other interest rate, equity, foreign exchange and commodities risk. The conditions of model recognition may include additional reporting requirements. The CBB's prior written approval must be obtained for any modifications proposed to be made to the models previously recognised by the CBB. In cases where a conventional bank licensee proposes to apply the model to new but similar products, it must obtain the CBB's prior approval. In some cases, the CBB may be able to give provisional approval for the model to be applied to a new class of products, in others it will be necessary to revisit the conventional bank licensee.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.9.3

            The CBB may withdraw its approval granted for any conventional bank licensee's model if it believes that the conditions based on which the approval was granted are no longer valid or have changed significantly.

            January 2015

        • CA-14.10 CA-14.10 Combination of Internal Models and the Standardised Methodology

          • CA-14.10.1

            Unless a conventional bank licensee's exposure to a particular risk factor is insignificant, the internal models approach, in principle, require conventional bank licensees to have an integrated risk measurement system that captures the broad risk factor categories (i.e., interest rates, exchange rates (which includes gold), equity prices and commodity prices, with related options volatilities being included in each risk factor category). Thus, conventional bank licensees which start to use models for one or more risk factor categories, over a reasonable period of time, must extend the models to all their market risks.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.10.2

            A conventional bank licensee which has obtained the CBB's approval for the use of one or more models is no longer able to revert to measuring the risk measured by those models according to the standardised methodology (unless the CBB withdraws its approval for the model(s), as explained in Section CA-14.9). However, what constitutes a reasonable period of time for an individual conventional bank licensee which uses a combination of internal models and the standardised methodology to move to a comprehensive model, will be decided by the CBB after taking into account the relevant circumstances of the conventional bank licensee.

            January 2015

          • CA-14.10.3

            Notwithstanding the goal of moving to comprehensive internal models as set out in Paragraph CA-14.10.1, for conventional bank licensees which, for the time being, will be applying a combination of internal models and the standardised methodology, the following conditions apply:

            (a) Each broad risk factor category must be assessed by applying a single approach (either internal models or the standardised approach), i.e., no combination of the two methods will, in principle, be permitted within a risk factor category or across a conventional bank licensee's different entities for the same type of risk;
            (b) All of the criteria laid down in this Chapter apply to the models being used;
            (c) Conventional bank licensees may not modify the combination of the two approaches which they are applying, without justifying to the CBB that they have a valid reason for doing so, and obtaining the CBB's prior written approval;
            (d) No element of market risk may escape measurement, i.e. the exposure for all the various risk factors, whether calculated according to the standardised approach or internal models, would have to be captured; and
            (e) The capital charges assessed under the standardised approach and under the models approach must be aggregated applying the simple sum method.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.11 CA-14.11 Treatment of Specific Risk

          • CA-14.11.1

            The conventional bank licensee is allowed to include its securitisation exposures and n-th-to-default credit derivatives in the trading book in its value-at-risk measure. Notwithstanding, it is still required to hold additional capital for these products according to the standardised measurement methodology.

            [Paragraphs CA-14.11.1A to CA-14.11.12 were deleted in January 2015.]

            January 2015

        • CA-14.12 CA-14.12 Model Validation Standards

          • CA-14.12.1

            It is important that conventional bank licensees have processes in place to ensure that their internal models have been adequately validated by suitably qualified parties independent of the development process to ensure that they are conceptually sound and adequately capture all material risks. This validation must be conducted when the model is initially developed and when any significant changes are made to the model. The validation must also be conducted on a periodic basis but especially where there have been any significant structural changes in the market or changes to the composition of the portfolio which might lead to the model no longer being adequate. More extensive model validation is particularly important where specific risk is also modelled and is required to meet the further specific risk criteria. As techniques and best practices evolve, conventional bank licensees must avail themselves of these advances. Model validation must not be limited to back-testing, but must, at a minimum, also include the following:

            (a) Tests to demonstrate that any assumptions made within the internal model are appropriate and do not underestimate risk. This may include the assumption of the normal distribution, the use of the square root of time to scale from a one day holding period to a 10 day holding period or where extrapolation or interpolation techniques are used, or pricing models;
            (b) Further to the regulatory back-testing programmes, testing for model validation must use hypothetical changes in portfolio value that would occur were end-of-day positions to remain unchanged. It therefore excludes fees, commissions, bid-ask spreads, net interest income and intra-day trading. Moreover, additional tests are required, which may include, for instance:
            (i) Testing carried out using hypothetical changes in portfolio value that would occur were end-of-day positions to remain unchanged. It therefore excludes fees, commissions, bid-ask spreads, net interest income and intra-day trading;
            (ii) Testing carried out for longer periods than required for the regular back-testing programme (e.g. 3 years). The longer time period generally improves the power of the back-testing. A longer time period may not be desirable if the VaR model or market conditions have changed to the extent that historical data is no longer relevant;
            (iii) Testing carried out using confidence intervals other than the 99 percent interval required under the quantitative standards; and
            (iv) Testing of portfolios below the overall bank level; and
            (c) The use of hypothetical portfolios to ensure that the model is able to account for particular structural features that may arise, for example:
            (i) Where data histories for a particular instrument do not meet the quantitative standards and where the conventional bank licensee has to map these positions to proxies, then the conventional bank licensee must ensure that the proxies produce conservative results under relevant market scenarios;
            (ii) Ensuring that material basis risks are adequately captured. This may include mismatches between long and short positions by maturity or by issuer; and
            (iii) Ensuring that the model captures concentration risk that may arise in an undiversified portfolio.
            January 2015

        • CA-14.13 Principles for Calculating the Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)

          This section was deleted with effect from January 2015 as it is no longer required.

          January 2015

      • CA-15 CA-15 Leverage Ratio and Gearing Requirements

        • CA-15.1 CA-15.1 Rationale and Objective

          • CA-15.1.1

            The requirements in this Chapter are applicable to Bahraini conventional bank licensees.

            Amended: October 2018
            January 2015

          • Scope and Factors Leading to Leverage

            • CA-15.1.2

              The use of non-equity funds to fund assets is referred to as financial leverage. It allows a financial institution to increase the potential returns on its equity capital, with an associated increase in the riskiness of the equity capital and its exposure to losses since the non-equity funds are either not, or only partially risk-absorbent. Consequently, leverage is commonly accomplished through the use of borrowed funds, debt capital or derivative instruments, etc. It is common for banks to engage in leverage by borrowing to fund asset growth, with the aim of increasing their return on equity.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.1.3

              The leverage ratio serves as a supplementary measure to the risk-based capital requirements of the rest of this Module. The leverage ratio is a simple, transparent ratio and is intended to achieve the following objectives:

              (a) To constrain the build-up of leverage in the banking sector, helping avoid destabilising deleveraging processes which can damage the broader financial system and the economy;
              (b) To reinforce the risk-based requirements with a simple, non-risk based "backstop" measure; and
              (c) To serve as a broad measure of both the on and off-balance sheet sources of bank leverage and, thus, its risk profile.
              Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.2 CA-15.2 Definition, Calculation and Scope of the Leverage Ratio

          • Leverage Ratio Requirement and Computational Details

            • CA-15.2.1

              Bahraini conventional bank licensees must meet a 3% leverage ratio minimum requirement at all times, calculated on a consolidated basis.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.2.2

              The leverage ratio is expressed as a percentage as follows:

              Tier One Capital
              Total Exposures

              The Numerator is Tier One Capital described in Paragraph CA-1.1.2. The Denominator is Total Exposures described in Section CA-15.3.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.2.3

              The leverage ratio framework follows the same scope of regulatory consolidation for Tier One Capital and Total Exposures as is used in CA-B.1.2A, except as described in CA-15.2.4 below.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.2.4

              Where a banking, financial, insurance or commercial entity is outside the scope of regulatory consolidation, only the investment in the capital of such entities (i.e. only the carrying value of the investment, as opposed to the underlying assets and other exposures of the investee) is to be included in the total exposures measure. However, investments in the capital of such entities that are deducted from Tier One Capital must also be deducted from the exposures measure for the purpose of the leverage ratio calculation.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.2.5

              Bahraini conventional bank licensees identified as DSIBs must also meet a leverage ratio buffer requirement of 50% of HLA buffer (currently set at 1.5%), consistent with the capital measure required to meet the requirements of Module DS.

              Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.3 CA-15.3 Exposure Measure

          • General Measurement Principles

            • CA-15.3.1

              Total Exposures for the purpose of CA-15.2.2 is the sum of the following exposures:

              (a) On-balance sheet exposures;
              (b) Derivative exposures;
              (c) Securities financing transactions; and
              (d) Off-balance sheet items as identified in this Section.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.2

              For purposes of Paragraph CA-15.3.1 the exposure measures should be consistent with financial statements where appropriate.

              Added: October 2018

          • On-balance Sheet Exposures

            • CA-15.3.3

              On-balance sheet exposures include all on-balance assets in their exposure measure, including on balance sheet derivatives' collateral and collateral for Securities Financing Transactions (SFTs), with the exception of SFT assets and on-balance sheet derivatives that are covered in Paragraphs CA-15.3.13 to CA-15.3.23 and CA-15.3.24 to CA-15.3.42 respectively.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.4

              On-balance sheet assets must be measured using their accounting balance sheet values (i.e. unweighted) less deductions for associated specific provisions. On-balance sheet, non-derivative exposures are net of specific provisions and valuation adjustments (e.g. credit valuation adjustments under IFRS).

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.5

              Items (such as goodwill) that are deducted completely from Tier One Capital must be deducted from Total Exposures.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.6

              According to the treatment outlined in Paragraphs CA-2.4.20 to CA-2.4.24, where a financial entity is not included in the regulatory scope of consolidation in CA-B.1.2A, only the investment in the capital of such entities (i.e. only the carrying value of the investment, as opposed to the underlying assets and other exposures of the investee) is to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure. The amount of any investment in the capital of that entity that is totally or partially deducted from CET1 or from AT1 capital of the Bahraini conventional bank licensee following the corresponding deduction approach in Paragraphs CA-2.4.20 to CA-2.4.26 must be excluded from the leverage ratio measure.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.7

              Unless specified differently below, Bahraini conventional bank licensees must not take into account physical guarantees or credit risk mitigation techniques to reduce the leverage ratio exposure measure, nor may banks net assets and liabilities.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.8

              Any item deducted from Tier 1 capital according to Module CA and regulatory adjustments other than those related to liabilities must be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure. Two examples follow:

              a) Where a banking, financial or insurance entity is not included in the regulatory scope of consolidation as set out in Section CA-2.4, the amount of any investment in the capital of that entity that is totally or partially deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital or from Additional Tier 1 capital of the bank following the corresponding deduction approach therein must also be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure; and
              b) Prudent valuation adjustments (PVAs) for exposures to less liquid positions, other than those related to liabilities, that are deducted from Tier 1 capital as per Paragraph CA-16.1.11A must be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.9

              Gains/losses on fair valued liabilities or accounting value adjustments on derivative liabilities due to changes in the bank's own credit risk are not deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.10

              Netting of loans and deposits is not allowed.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.11

              For the purpose of the leverage ratio exposure measure, Bahraini conventional bank licensees using trade date accounting must reverse out any offsetting between cash receivables for unsettled sales and cash payables for unsettled purchases of financial assets that may be recognised under the applicable accounting framework, but may offset between those cash receivables and cash payables (regardless of whether such offsetting is recognised under the applicable accounting framework) if the following conditions are met:

              a) The financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are fair valued through income and included in the bank's regulatory trading book (See CA-8.1.5); and
              b) The transactions of the financial assets are settled on a delivery-versus-payment (DVP) basis.

              Bahraini conventional bank licensees using settlement date accounting will be subject to the treatment set out in Paragraphs CA-15.3.43 to CA-15.3.45 and Paragraphs CA-15.5.7 to CA-15.5.16.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.12

              For purposes of the leverage ratio exposure measure, where a cash pooling arrangement entails a transfer at least on a daily basis of the credit and/or debit balances of the individual participating customer accounts into a single account balance, the individual participating customer accounts are deemed to be extinguished and transformed into a single account balance upon the transfer provided the bank is not liable for the balances on an individual basis upon the transfer. Thus, the basis of the leverage ratio exposure measure for such a cash pooling arrangement is the single account balance and not the individual participating customer accounts. When the transfer of credit and/or debit balances of the individual participating customer accounts does not occur daily, for purposes of the leverage ratio exposure measure, extinguishment and transformation into a single account balance is deemed to occur and this single account balance may serve as the basis of the leverage ratio exposure measure provided all of the following conditions are met:

              a) in addition to providing for the several individual participating customer accounts, the cash pooling arrangement provides for a single account, into which the balances of all individual participating customer accounts can be transferred and thus extinguished;
              b) the Bahraini conventional bank licensees: (i) has a legally enforceable right to transfer the balances of the individual participating customer accounts into a single account so that the bank is not liable for the balances on an individual basis, and (ii) at any point in time, the bank must have the discretion and be in a position to exercise this right;
              c) the Bahraini conventional bank licensee's supervisor does not deem as inadequate the frequency by which the balances of individual participating customer accounts are transferred to a single account;
              d) there are no maturity mismatches among the balances of the individual participating customer accounts included in the cash pooling arrangement or all balances are either overnight or on demand; and
              e) the Bahraini conventional bank licensee charges or pays interest and/or fees based on the combined balance of the individual participating customer accounts included in the cash pooling arrangement.

              In the event the abovementioned conditions are not met, the individual balances of the participating customer accounts must be reflected separately in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

          • Securities Financing Transaction Exposures (SFTs)

            • CA-15.3.13

              Traditional securitisations must be excluded by the originating bank if the securitisation meets the operational requirements for the recognition of risk transference set out in CA-6, Credit Risk Securitisation Framework. Banks meeting these conditions must include any retained securitisation exposure in the leverage ratio exposure.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.14

              SFTs included in the exposure measure must be according to the treatment described in CA-15.3.19 below.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.15

              For purpose of Paragraph CA-15.3.13, the treatment recognises that secured lending and borrowing in the form of SFTs is an important source of leverage, and ensures consistent international implementation by providing a common measure for dealing with the main differences in the operative accounting frameworks.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.16

              For SFT assets subject to novation and cleared through Qualifying Central Counterparties, "gross SFT assets recognised for accounting purposes" are replaced by the final contractual exposure, given that pre-existing contracts have been replaced by new legal obligations through the novation process.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.17

              Gross SFT assets must not recognise any accounting netting of cash payables against cash receivables.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.18

              Bahraini conventional bank licensees and supervisors should be particularly vigilant to transactions and structures that have the result of inadequately capturing banks' sources of leverage. Examples of concerns that might arise in such leverage ratio exposure measure minimising transactions and structures may include: securities financing transactions where exposure to the counterparty increases as the counterparty's credit quality decreases or securities financing transactions in which the credit quality of the counterparty is positively correlated with the value of the securities received in the transaction (i.e. the credit quality of the counterparty falls when the value of the securities falls); banks that normally act as principal but adopt an agency model to transact in derivatives and SFTs in order to benefit from the more favourable treatment permitted for agency transactions under the leverage ratio framework; collateral swap trades structured to mitigate inclusion in the leverage ratio exposure measure; or use of structures to move assets off the balance sheet. This list of examples is by no means exhaustive. Where supervisors are concerned that such transactions are not adequately captured in the leverage ratio exposure measure or may lead to a potentially destabilising deleveraging process, they should carefully scrutinise these transactions and consider a range of actions to address such concerns. Supervisory actions may include requiring enhancements in banks' management of leverage, imposing operational requirements (e.g. additional reporting to supervisors) and/or requiring that the relevant exposure is adequately capitalised through a Pillar 2 capital charge. These examples of supervisory actions are merely indicative and by no means exhaustive.

              Added: October 2018

          • General Treatment (Bank Acting as Principal)

            • CA-15.3.19

              The sum of the amounts in subparagraphs (a) and (b) are to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure:

              (a) Gross SFT assets recognized for accounting purposes (i.e. with no recognition of accounting netting), adjusted as follows:
              (i) Excluding from the exposure measure the value of any securities received under an SFT, where the Bahraini conventional bank licensee has recognised the securities as an asset on its balance sheet; and
              (ii) Cash payables and cash receivables in SFTs with the same counterparty may be measured net if the following criteria are met:
              (A) Transactions have the same explicit final settlement date but which can be unwound at any time by either party to the transaction are not eligible;
              (B) The right to set off the amount owed to the counterparty with the amount owed by the counterparty is legally enforceable both currently in the normal course of business and in the event of: (i) default; (ii) insolvency; and (iii) bankruptcy; and
              (C) The counterparties intend to settle net, settle simultaneously, or the transactions are subject to a settlement mechanism that results in the functional equivalent of net settlement, that is, the cash flows of the transactions are equivalent, in effect, to a single net amount on the settlement date. To achieve such equivalence, both transactions are settled through the same settlement system and the settlement arrangements are supported by cash and/or intraday credit facilities intended to ensure that settlement of both transactions will occur by the end of the business day any issues arising from securities legs of the SFTs do not result in the unwinding of net cash settlement24; and
              (b) A measure of Counterparty Credit Risk calculated as the current exposure without an add-on for Potential Future Exposure (PFE), calculated as follows:
              (i) Where a qualifying Master Netting Agreement25(MNA) is in place, the current exposure (E*) is the greater of zero and the total fair value of securities and cash lent to a counterparty for all transactions included in the qualifying MNA (SEi), less the total fair value of cash and securities received from the counterparty for those transactions (SCi). This is illustrated in the following formula:
              E* = max {0, [SEi – SCi]}; and
              (ii) Where no qualifying MNA is in place, the current exposure for transactions with a counterparty must be calculated on a transaction by transaction basis; that is, each transaction is treated as its own netting set, as shown in the following formula:
              Ei* = max {0, [Ei – Ci]}
              (ii) Ei* may be set to zero if (i) Ei is the cash lent to a counterparty, (ii) this transaction is treated as its own netting set and (iii) the associated cash receivable is not eligible for the netting treatment in Paragraph CA-15.3.20.
              (iii) For the purposes of the above, the term "counterparty" includes not only the counterparty of the bilateral repo transactions but also triparty repo agents that receive collateral in deposit and manage the collateral in the case of triparty repo transactions. Therefore, securities deposited at triparty repo agents are included in "total value of securities and cash lent to a counterparty" (E) up to the amount effectively lent to the counterparty in a repo transaction. However, excess collateral that has been deposited at triparty agents but that has not been lent out may be excluded.
              Added: October 2018

              24 This latter condition ensures that any issues arising from the securities leg of the SFTs do not interfere with the completion of the net settlement of the cash receivables and payables. If there is a failure of the securities leg of a transaction in such a mechanism at the end of the settlement window for settlement in the settlement mechanism, then this transaction and its matching cash leg must be split out from the netting set and treated gross.

              25 A "qualifying" MNA is one that meets the requirements under Paragraphs CA-15.6.14 and 15.

          • Sale Accounting Transactions

            • CA-15.3.20

              Leverage may remain with the lender of the security in a SFT whether or not sale accounting is achieved under IFRS. As such, where sale accounting is achieved for a SFT under IFRS, the Bahraini conventional bank licensee must reverse all sales-related accounting entries, and then calculate its exposure as if the SFT had been treated as a financing transaction (i.e. the Bahraini conventional bank licensee must include the sum of amounts in Subparagraphs CA-15.3.19 (a) and (b) for such a SFT) for the purposes of determining its exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

          • Bank Acting as Agent

            • CA-15.3.21

              A Bahraini conventional bank licensee acting as agent in a SFT generally provides an indemnity or guarantee to only one of the two parties involved, and only for the difference between the value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided. In this situation, the bank is exposed to the counterparty of its customer for the difference in values rather than to the full exposure to the underlying security or cash of the transaction (as is the case where the bank is one of the principals in the transaction).

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.22

              Where a Bahraini conventional bank licensee acting as agent in a SFT provides an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty for any difference between the value of the security or cash the customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided, then the Bahraini conventional bank licensee will be required to calculate its exposure measure by applying only Subparagraph 15.3.19(b).26

              Added: October 2018

              26 Where, in addition to the conditions in Paragraphs CA-15.3.21 to 15.3.23, a bank acting as an agent in a SFT does not provide an indemnity or guarantee to any of the involved parties, the bank is not exposed to the SFT and therefore need not recognise those SFTs in its exposure measure.

            • CA-15.3.23

              A Bahraini conventional bank licensee acting as agent in a SFT and providing an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty will be considered eligible for the exceptional treatment set out in paragraph CA-15.3.22 only if the Bahraini conventional bank licensee's exposure to the transaction is limited to the guaranteed difference between the value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the value of the collateral the borrower has provided. In situations where the Bahraini conventional bank licensees is further economically exposed (i.e. beyond the guarantee for the difference) to the underlying security or cash in the transaction,27 a further exposure equal to the full amount of the security or cash must be included in the exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

              27 For example, due to the bank managing collateral received in the bank's name or on its own account rather than on the customer's or borrower's account (e.g. by on-lending or managing unsegregated collateral, cash or securities).

          • Derivative Exposures

            • CA-15.3.24

              Exposures to derivatives are included in the leverage ratio exposure by means of two components:

              (a) Replacement cost (RC); and
              (b) Potential Future Exposure (PFE).
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.25

              Bahraini conventional bank licensees must calculate their exposures associated with all derivative transactions including where a Bahraini conventional bank licensee sells protection using a credit derivative, as the replacement cost (RC)28 for the current exposure plus an add-on for PFE, as described in Paragraph CA-15.3.26. If the derivative exposure is covered by an eligible bilateral netting contract as specified in this Section 15.4, the treatment in Chapter CA-4 may be applied29. Written credit derivatives are subject to an additional treatment, as set out in Paragraphs CA-15.3.37 to CA-15.3.39.

              Added: October 2018

              28 If there is no accounting measure of exposure for certain derivative instruments because they are held (completely) off-balance sheet, the bank must use the sum of positive fair values of these derivatives as the replacement cost.

              29 Cross-product netting is not permitted in determining the leverage ratio exposure.

            • CA-15.3.26

              For derivative transactions not covered by an eligible bilateral netting contract as specified in Paragraphs CA-15.4.1 to CA-15.4.3, the amount to be included in the exposure measure is determined as follows:

              Exposure measure = alpha * (RC+PFE)
              where
              alpha = 1.4
              RC = the replacement cost of the contract (obtained by marking to market), where the contract has a positive value. RC is determined in accordance with CA-15.3.27
              PFE = an amount for PFE calculated in accordance with CA-15.3.28.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.27

              The replacement cost of a transaction or netting set is measured as follows:

              RC = max {V - CVMr, + CVMp, 0}

              where (i) V is the market value of the individual derivative transaction or of the derivative transactions in a netting set; (ii) CVMr is the cash variation margin received that meets the conditions set out in Paragraph CA-15.3.33 and for which the amount has not already reduced the market value of the derivative transaction V under the bank's operative accounting standard; and (iii) CVMp is the cash variation margin provided by the bank and that meets the same conditions.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.28

              The potential future exposure (PFE) for derivative exposures must be calculated mathematically as follows:

              PFE = multiplier*AddOn aggregate

              For the purposes of the leverage ratio framework, the multiplier is fixed at one. Moreover, when calculating the add-on component, for all margined transactions the maturity factor set out in CA-15.3.29 below may be used. Further, as written options create an exposure to the underlying, they must be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure by applying the treatment described herein, even if certain written options are permitted the zero exposure at default (EAD) treatment allowed in the risk-based framework.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.29

              The minimum time risk horizons include:

              a) The lesser of one year and remaining maturity of the derivative contract for unmargined transactions, floored at ten business days. Therefore, the adjusted notional at the trade level of an unmargined transaction must be multiplied by:



              where Mi is the transaction i remaining maturity floored by 10 business days
              b) For margined transactions, the minimum margin period of risk is determined as follows:
              — At least ten business days for non-centrally-cleared derivative transactions subject to daily margin agreements.
              — Five business days for centrally cleared derivative transactions subject to daily margin agreements that clearing members have with their clients.
              — 20 business days for netting sets consisting of 5,000 transactions that are not with a central counterparty.
              — Doubling the margin period of risk for netting sets with outstanding disputes. Therefore, the adjusted notional at the trade level of a margined transaction should be multiplied by:



              where i MPOR is the margin period of risk appropriate for the margin agreement containing the transaction i.
              Added: October 2018

          • Bilateral Netting

            • CA-15.3.30

              When an eligible bilateral netting contract is in place (see Paragraphs CA-15.4.1 to CA-15.4.3), the RC for the set of derivative exposures covered by the contract will be the net replacement cost and the add-on will be ANet as calculated in Paragraphs CA-15.3.27 and CA-15.3.28.

              Added: October 2018

          • Treatment of Related Collateral

            • CA-15.3.31

              Collateral received in connection with derivative contracts has two countervailing effects on leverage:

              (a) It reduces counterparty exposure; but
              (b) It can also increase the economic resources at the disposal of the Bahraini conventional bank licensees, as the bank can use the collateral to leverage itself.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.32

              Collateral received in connection with derivative contracts does not necessarily reduce the leverage inherent in a Bahraini conventional bank licensee's derivatives position, which is generally the case if the settlement exposure arising from the underlying derivative contract is not reduced. As a general rule, collateral received may not be netted against derivative exposures whether or not netting is permitted under IFRS or in Chapter CA-4. Hence, when calculating the exposure amount by applying Paragraphs CA-15.3.25 to CA-15.3.27, a Bahraini conventional bank licensee must not reduce the exposure amount by any collateral received from the counterparty.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.33

              With regard to collateral provided, Bahraini conventional bank licensees must gross up their exposure measure by the amount of any derivatives collateral provided where the provision of that collateral has reduced the value of their balance sheet assets under IFRS.

              Added: October 2018

          • Treatment of Cash Variation Margin

            • CA-15.3.34

              In the treatment of derivative exposures for the purpose of the leverage ratio, the cash portion of variation margin exchanged between counterparties may be viewed as a form of pre-settlement payment, if the following conditions are met:

              (a) For trades not cleared through a qualifying central counterparty (QCCP) the cash received by the recipient counterparty is not segregated;
              (b) Variation margin is calculated and exchanged on a daily basis based on mark-to-market valuation of derivatives positions;
              (c) The cash variation margin is received in the same currency as the currency of settlement of the derivative contract;
              (d) Variation margin exchanged is the full amount that would be necessary to fully extinguish the mark-to-market exposure of the derivative subject to the threshold and minimum transfer amounts applicable to the counterparty; and
              (e) Derivatives transactions and variation margins are covered by a single master netting agreement (MNA)30, 31 between the legal entities that are the counterparties in the derivatives transaction. The MNA must explicitly stipulate that the counterparties agree to settle net any payment obligations covered by such a netting agreement, taking into account any variation margin received or provided if a credit event occurs involving either counterparty. The MNA must be legally enforceable and effective in all relevant jurisdictions, including in the event of default and bankruptcy or insolvency.
              Added: October 2018

              30 A Master MNA may be deemed to be a single MNA for this purpose.

              31 To the extent that the criteria in this paragraph include the term "master netting agreement", this term should be read as including any "netting agreement" that provides legally enforceable rights of offsets. This is to take account of the fact that for netting agreements employed by CCPs, no standardisation has currently emerged that would be comparable with respect to OTC netting agreements for bilateral trading.

            • CA-15.3.35

              If the conditions in Paragraph CA-15.3.34 are met, the cash portion of variation margin received may be used to reduce the replacement cost portion of the leverage ratio exposure measure, and the receivables assets from cash variation margin provided may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure as follows:

              (a) In the case of cash variation margin received, the receiving bank may reduce the replacement cost (but not the PFE component) of the exposure amount of the derivative asset by the amount of cash received if the positive mark-to-market value of the derivative contract(s) has not already been reduced by the same amount of cash variation margin received under the Bahraini conventional bank licensee's operative accounting standard; and
              (b) In the case of cash variation margin provided to a counterparty, the posting Bahraini conventional bank licensee may deduct the resulting receivable from its leverage ratio exposure measure, where the cash variation margin has been recognised as an asset under the Bahraini conventional bank licensee's operative accounting framework and instead include the cash variation margin in the calculation of derivative replacement cost.
              Added: October 2018

          • Add-on Factors for Determining PFE

            • CA-15.3.36

              The following add-on factors apply to financial derivatives, based on residual maturity:

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.37

              Add-ons must be based on effective rather than apparent notional amounts. In the event that the stated notional amount is leveraged or enhanced by the structure of the transaction, Bahraini conventional bank licensees must use the effective notional amount when determining PFE.

              Added: October 2018

          • Treatment of Clearing Services

            • CA-15.3.38

              Where a Bahraini conventional bank licensee acting as clearing member (CM)32 offers clearing services to clients, the clearing member's trade exposures33 to the central counterparty (CCP) that arise when the clearing member is obligated to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of its transactions in the event that the CCP defaults, must be captured by applying the same treatment that applies to any other type of derivatives transactions. However, if the clearing member, based on the contractual arrangements with the client, is not obligated to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of its transactions in the event that a QCCP defaults, the clearing member need not recognise the resulting trade exposures to the QCCP in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

              32 For the purposes of this Paragraph, a clearing member (CM) is defined as a member of, or a direct participant in, a CCP that is entitled to enter into a transaction with the CCP, regardless of whether it enters into trades with a CCP for its own hedging, investment or speculative purposes or whether it also enters into trades as a financial intermediary between the CCP and other market participants.

              33 "Trade exposure" includes initial margin irrespective of whether or not it is posted in a manner that makes it remote from the insolvency of the CCP.

            • CA-15.3.39

              Where a client enters directly into a derivatives transaction with the CCP and the CM guarantees the performance of its clients' derivative trade exposures to the CCP, the Bahraini conventional bank licensee acting as the clearing member for the client to the CCP must calculate its related leverage ratio exposure resulting from the guarantee as a derivative exposure as set out in Paragraphs CA-15.3.24 to CA-15.3.36, as if it had entered directly into the transaction with the client, including with regard to the receipt or provision of cash variation margin.

              Added: October 2018

          • Additional Treatment for Written Credit Derivatives

            • CA-15.3.40

              In addition to the CCR exposure arising from the fair value of the contracts, written credit derivatives create a notional credit exposure arising from the creditworthiness of the reference entity. Written credit derivatives must be treated consistently with cash instruments (e.g. loans, bonds) for the purposes of the exposure measure.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.41

              In order to capture the credit exposure to the underlying reference entity, in addition to the above CCR treatment for derivatives and related collateral, the effective notional amount referenced by a written credit derivative is to be included in the exposure measure. The effective notional amount of a written credit derivative may be reduced by any negative change in fair value amount that has been incorporated into the calculation of Tier 1 capital with respect to the written credit derivative. The resulting amount may be further reduced by the effective notional amount of a purchased credit derivative on the same reference name,34, 35provided:

              (a) The credit protection purchased is on a reference obligation which ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying reference obligation of the written credit derivative in the case of single name credit derivatives;36
              (c) The remaining maturity of the credit protection purchased is equal to or greater than the remaining maturity of the written credit derivative;
              (d) the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is not from a counterparty whose credit quality is highly correlated with the value of the reference obligation; in the event that the effective notional amount of a written credit derivative is reduced by any negative change in fair value reflected in the bank's Tier 1 capital, the effective notional amount of the offsetting credit protection purchased through credit derivatives must also be reduced by any resulting positive change in fair value reflected in Tier 1 capital; and
              (e) the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is not included in a transaction that has been cleared on behalf of a client (or that has been cleared by the bank in its role as a clearing services provider in a multi-level client services structure as referenced in CA-15.3.38 and for which the effective notional amount referenced by the corresponding written credit derivative is excluded from the leverage ratio exposure measure according to this paragraph.
              Added: October 2018

              34 Two reference names are considered identical only if they refer to the same legal entity. For single-name credit derivatives, protection purchased that references a subordinated position may offset protection sold on a more senior position of the same reference entity as long as a credit event on the senior reference asset would result in a credit event on the subordinated reference asset. Protection purchased on a pool of reference entities may offset protection sold on individual reference names if the protection purchased is economically equivalent to buying protection separately on each of the individual names in the pool (this would, for example, be the case if a bank were to purchase protection on an entire securitisation structure). If a bank purchases protection on a pool of reference names, but the credit protection does not cover the entire pool (i.e. the protection covers only a subset of the pool, as in the case of an nth-to-default credit derivative or a securitisation tranche), then offsetting is not permitted for the protection sold on individual reference names. However, such purchased protections may offset sold protections on a pool provided the purchased protection covers the entirety of the subset of the pool on which protection has been sold. In other words, offsetting may only be recognised when the pool of reference entities and the level of subordination in both transactions are identical.

              35 The effective notional amount of a written credit derivative may be reduced by any negative change in fair value reflected in the bank's Tier 1 capital provided the effective notional amount of the offsetting purchased credit protection is also reduced by any resulting positive change in fair value reflected in Tier 1 capital. Where a bank buys credit protection through a total return swap (TRS) and records the net payments received as net income, but does not record offsetting deterioration in the value of the written credit derivative (either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves) reflected in Tier 1 capital, the credit protection will not be recognised for the purpose of offsetting the effective notional amounts related to written credit derivatives.

              36 For tranched products, the purchased protection must be on a reference obligation with the same level of seniority.

            • CA-15.3.42

              For the purposes of CA-15.3.40, the term "written credit derivative" refers to a broad range of credit derivatives through which a bank effectively provides credit protection and is not limited solely to credit default swaps and total return swaps. For example, all options where the bank has the obligation to provide credit protection under certain conditions qualify as "written credit derivatives". The effective notional amount of such options sold by the bank may be offset by the effective notional amount of options by which the bank has the right to purchase credit protection which fulfils the conditions of CA-15.3.41. For example, the condition of same or more conservative material terms as those in the corresponding written credit derivatives can be considered met only when the strike price of the underlying purchased credit protection is equal to or lower than the strike price of the underlying sold credit protection.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.43

              Since written credit derivatives are included in the exposure measure at their effective notional amounts, and are also subject to add-on amounts for PFE, the exposure measure for written credit derivatives may be overstated. Bahraini conventional bank licensees must deduct the individual PFE add-on amount relating to a written credit derivative (which is not offset according to Paragraph CA-15.3.41 and whose effective notional amount is included in the exposure measure) from their gross add-on in Paragraphs CA-15.3.25 to CA-15.3.27.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.44

              Where a bank buys credit protection through a total return swap (TRS) and records the net payments received as net income, but does not record offsetting deterioration in the value of the written credit derivative (either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves) reflected in Tier 1 capital, the credit protection will not be recognised for the purpose of offsetting the effective notional amounts related to written credit derivatives.

              Added: October 2018

          • Off-balance Sheet Items (OBS)

            • CA-15.3.45

              OBS items include commitments (including liquidity facilities), whether or not unconditionally cancellable, direct credit substitutes, acceptances, standby letters of credit and trade letters of credit. If the OBS item is treated as a derivative exposure for the purpose of the accounting, then the item must be measured as a derivative exposure for the purpose of leverage ratio exposure.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.46

              In the risk-based capital framework, OBS items are converted under the standardised approach into credit exposure equivalents through the use of credit conversion factors (CCFs). For the purpose of determining the exposure amount of OBS items for the leverage ratio, the CCFs set out in CA-15.4 must be applied to the notional amount.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.3.47

              In addition, specific and general provisions set aside against OBS exposures that have decreased Tier 1 capital may be deducted from the credit exposure equivalent amount of those exposures (i.e. the exposure amount after the application of the relevant CCF). However, the resulting total off-balance sheet equivalent amount for OBS exposures cannot be less than zero.

              Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.4 CA-15.4 Additional Detail for Computation Purposes

          • Bilateral Netting

            • CA-15.4.1

              For the purpose of the leverage ratio measure, bilateral netting is allowed subject to the following conditions:

              (a) Bahraini conventional bank licensees may net transactions subject to novation under which any obligation between a bank and its counterparty to deliver a given currency on a given value date is automatically amalgamated with all other obligations for the same currency and value date, legally substituting one single amount for the previous gross obligations; or
              (b) Bahraini conventional bank licensees may also net transactions subject to any legally valid form of bilateral netting not covered in (a), including other forms of novation.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.2

              In both cases in CA-15.5.1 (a) and (b), a Bahraini conventional bank licensee will need to satisfy the CBB that it has:

              (a) A netting contract or agreement with the counterparty that creates a single legal obligation, covering all included transactions, such that the Bahraini conventional bank licensee would have either a claim to receive or obligation to pay only the net sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values of included individual transactions in the event a counterparty fails to perform due to any of the following: default, bankruptcy, liquidation or similar circumstances;
              (b) Written and reasoned legal opinions that, in the event of a legal challenge, the relevant courts and administrative authorities would find the Bahraini conventional bank licensee's exposure to be such a net amount under:
              (i) The law of the home jurisdiction in which the counterparty is incorporated and, if the foreign branch of a counterparty is involved, then also under the law of jurisdiction in which the branch is located;
              (ii) The law that governs the individual transactions; and
              (iii) The law that governs any contract or agreement necessary to effect the netting.
              The CBB must be satisfied that the netting is enforceable under the laws of each of the relevant jurisdictions; and
              (c) Procedures in place to ensure that the legal characteristics of netting arrangements are kept under review in the light of possible changes in relevant law.
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.3

              Contracts containing walkaway clauses are not eligible for netting for the purpose of calculating the leverage ratio requirements. A walkaway clause is a provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make only limited payments, or no payment at all, to the estate of a defaulter, even if the defaulter is a net creditor.

              Added: October 2018

          • Securities Financing Transaction Exposures 37

            • CA-15.4.4

              Where a qualifying master netting agreement is in place, the effects of bilateral netting agreements for SFTs are recognised on a counterparty by counterparty basis if the agreements are legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt. In addition, netting agreements must:

              (a) Provide the non-defaulting party with the right to terminate and close out in a timely manner all transactions under the agreement upon an event of default, including in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy of the counterparty;
              (b) Provide for the netting of gains and losses on transactions (including the value of any collateral) terminated and closed out under it so that a single net amount is owed by one party to the other;
              (c) Allow for the prompt liquidation or setoff of collateral upon the event of default; and
              (d) Be, together with the rights arising from provisions required in (a) and (c) above, legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default regardless of the counterparty's insolvency or bankruptcy.
              Added: October 2018

              37 The provisions related to qualifying master netting agreements (MNAs) for SFTs are intended for the calculation of the counterparty add-on of the exposure measure of SFTs.

            • CA-15.4.5

              Netting across positions held in the banking book and trading book can only be recognised when the netted transactions fulfil the following conditions:

              (a) All transactions are marked to market daily; and
              (b) The collateral instruments used in the transactions are recognised as eligible financial collateral in the banking book.
              Added: October 2018

          • Off-balance Sheet Items

            • CA-15.4.6

              For the purpose of the leverage ratio, OBS items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents through the use of credit conversion factors (CCFs).

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.7

              For the purpose of Paragraph CA-15.4.6, commitments include any contractual arrangement that has been offered by the bank and accepted by the client to extend credit, purchase assets or issue credit substitutes.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.8

              Direct credit substitutes, e.g. general guarantees of indebtedness (including standby letters of credit serving as financial guarantees for loans and securities) and acceptances (including endorsements with the character of acceptances) receive a CCF of 100%.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.9

              The exposure amount associated with unsettled financial asset purchases where regular-way unsettled trades are accounted for at settlement date, a 100% CCF applies.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.10

              Forward asset purchases, forward deposits and partly paid shares and securities, which represent commitments with certain drawdown, will receive a CCF of 100%.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.11

              The following transaction-related contingent items — performance bonds, bid bonds, warranties and standby letters of credit related to particular transactions, receive a CCF of 50%.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.12

              Note issuance facilities (NIFs), and revolving underwriting facilities (RUFs) receive a CCF of 50%.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.13

              A 40% CCF will be applied to commitments, regardless of the maturity of the underlying facility, unless they qualify for a lower CCF.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.14

              A 20% CCF will be applied to both the issuing and confirming banks of short-term38 self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods (e.g. documentary credits collateralised by the underlying shipment).

              Added: October 2018

              38 That is, with a maturity below one year. For further details see Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, Treatment of trade finance under the Basel capital framework, October 2011, www.bis.org/publ/bcbs205.pdf.

            • CA-15.4.15

              A 10% CCF will be applied to commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower's creditworthiness.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.16

              The CBB shall evaluate various factors in the jurisdiction, which may constrain banks' ability to cancel the commitment in practice, and consider applying a higher CCF to certain commitments as appropriate.

              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.4.17

              Where there is an undertaking to provide a commitment on an off-balance sheet item, banks are to apply the lower of the two applicable CCFs.39

              Added: October 2018

              39 For example, if a bank has a commitment to open short-term self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods, a 20% CCF will be applied (instead of a 40% CCF); and if a bank has an unconditionally cancellable commitment to issue direct credit substitutes, a 10% CCF will be applied (instead of a 100% CCF).

            • CA-15.4.18

              All off-balance sheet securitisation exposures, except an eligible liquidity facility or an eligible servicer cash advance facility as set out in Paragraphs CA-6.4.18 and CA-6.4.20 of this Module, receive a CCF of 100% conversion factor. All eligible liquidity facilities receive a CCF of 50%. Undrawn servicer cash advances or facilities that are unconditionally cancellable without prior notice are eligible for a 10% CCF.

              Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.5 CA-15.5 Effective Date and Transitional Arrangements

          • CA-15.5.1

            Bahraini Conventional Bank Licensees shall implement the requirements of this Module with effect from 30th June 2019. Quarterly reporting of leverage ratio to the CBB and in public disclosures shall commence with reference to the quarter ending on 30th June 2019.

            Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.6 CA-15.6 Additional Requirements

          • CA-15.6.1

            A higher ratio may be required for any Bahraini conventional bank licensee if warranted by its risk profile or circumstances. The CBB may use stress testing as a complementing tool to adjust the leverage ratio requirement at the macro- and/or individual Bahraini conventional bank licensee-level.

            Added: October 2018

          • CA-15.6.2

            The leverage ratio can be used for both micro- and macro prudential surveillance; for example, as a macro prudential tool, a consistent leverage ratio can be applied for all Bahraini conventional bank licensees as an indicator for monitoring vulnerability. As a micro prudential tool, it can be used as a trigger for increased surveillance or capital requirements for specific licensees under the supervisory review process.

            Added: October 2018

        • CA-15.7 CA-15.7 Gearing

          • CA-15.7.1

            The content of this Section is applicable to all retail branches of foreign banks.

            Amended: October 2022
            Added: October 2018

          • Measurement

            • CA-15.7.2

              The gearing ratio is measured as the ratio of deposit liabilities against the bank's capital and reserves. Deposit liabilities includes ‘deposits from banks’ (excluding deposits from head office) and ‘deposits from non-banks’ as reported in Section A Balance Sheet of the PIR. Capital and reserves refers to the aggregate amount of the capital items reported in Section A Balance Sheet of the PIR i.e. ‘total capital items’.

              Amended: October 2022
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.7.3

              [This Paragraph was deleted in October 2022].

              Deleted: October 2022
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.7.4

              [This Paragraph was deleted in October 2022]

              Deleted: October 2022
              Added: October 2018

            • CA-15.7.5

              [This Paragraph was deleted in October 2022]

              Deleted: October 2022
              Added: October 2018

          • Gearing Limit

            • CA-15.7.6

              Deposit liabilities must not exceed 20 times the respective bank's capital and reserves at all times (i.e. capital and reserves must be 5% or above of the deposit liabilities).

              Amended: October 2022
              Added: October 2018

      • CA-16 CA-16 Prudent Valuation Guidance

        • CA-16.1 CA-16.1 Prudent Valuation Guidance

          • CA-16.1.1

            This Section provides conventional bank licensees with guidance on prudent valuation for positions that are accounted for at fair value, whether they are in the trading book or in the banking book. This guidance is especially important for positions without actual market prices or observable inputs to valuation, as well as less liquid positions which, although they will not be excluded from the trading book solely on grounds of lesser liquidity, raise supervisory concerns about prudent valuation. The valuation guidance set forth below is not intended to require conventional bank licensees to change valuation procedures for financial reporting purposes. The CBB will assess a conventional bank licensee's valuation procedures for consistency with this guidance. One factor in the CBB's assessment of whether a conventional bank licensee must take a valuation adjustment for regulatory purposes under Paragraphs CA-16.1.11A to CA-16.1.13 is the degree of consistency between the conventional bank licensee's valuation procedures and these guidelines.

            January 2015

          • CA-16.1.2

            A framework for prudent valuation practices must at a minimum include the following:

            January 2015

          • Systems and Controls

            • CA-16.1.3

              Conventional bank licensees must establish and maintain adequate systems and controls sufficient to give management and CBB the confidence that their valuation estimates are prudent and reliable. These systems must be integrated with other risk management systems within the organisation (such as credit analysis). Such systems must include:

              (a) Documented policies and procedures for the process of valuation. This includes clearly defined responsibilities of the various areas involved in the determination of the valuation, sources of market information and review of their appropriateness, guidelines for the use of unobservable inputs reflecting the conventional bank licensee's assumptions of what market participants would use in pricing position, frequency of independent valuation, timing of closing prices, procedures for adjusting valuations, end of the month and ad-hoc verification procedures; and
              (b) Clear and independent (i.e. independent of front office) reporting lines for the department accountable for the valuation process. The reporting line must ultimately be to a main board executive director.
              January 2015

          • Valuation Methodologies

            • Marking to Market

              • CA-16.1.4

                Marking-to-market is at least the daily valuation of positions at readily available close out prices that are sourced independently. Examples of readily available close out prices include exchange prices, screen prices, or quotes from several independent reputable brokers.

                January 2015

              • CA-16.1.5

                Conventional bank licensees must mark-to-market as much as possible. The more prudent side of bid/offer must be used unless the institution is a significant market maker in a particular position type and it can close out at mid-market. Conventional bank licensees must maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise the use of unobservable inputs when estimating fair value using a valuation technique. However, observable inputs or transactions may not be relevant, such as in a forced liquidation or distressed sale, or transactions may not be observable, such as when markets are inactive. In such cases, the observable data must be considered, but may not be determinative.

                January 2015

            • Marking to Model

              • CA-16.1.6

                Only where marking-to-market is not possible must conventional bank licensees mark-to-model, but this must be demonstrated to be prudent. Marking-to-model is defined as any valuation which has to be benchmarked, extrapolated or otherwise calculated from a market input.

                January 2015

              • CA-16.1.7

                When marking to model, an extra degree of conservatism is appropriate. The CBB will consider the following in assessing whether a mark-to-model valuation is prudent:

                (a) Senior management should be aware of the elements of the trading book or of other fair-valued positions which are subject to mark to model and should understand the materiality of the uncertainty this creates in the reporting of the risk/performance of the business;
                (b) Market inputs should be sourced, to the extent possible, in line with market prices (as discussed above). The appropriateness of the market inputs for the particular position being valued should be reviewed regularly;
                (c) Where available, generally accepted valuation methodologies for particular products should be used as far as possible;
                (d) Where the model is developed by the institution itself, it should be based on appropriate assumptions, which have been assessed and challenged by suitably qualified parties independent of the development process. The model should be developed or approved independently of the front office. It should be independently tested. This includes validating the mathematics, the assumptions and the software implementation;
                (e) There should be formal change control procedures in place and a secure copy of the model should be held and periodically used to check valuations;
                (f) Risk management should be aware of the weaknesses of the models used and how best to reflect those in the valuation output;
                (g) The model should be subject to periodic review to determine the accuracy of its performance (e.g. assessing continued appropriateness of the assumptions, analysis of P&L versus risk factors, comparison of actual close out values to model outputs); and
                (h) Valuation adjustments should be made as appropriate, for example, to cover the uncertainty of the model valuation (see also valuation adjustments in Paragraphs CA-16.1.10 to CA-16.1.13).
                January 2015

            • Independent Price Verification

              • CA-16.1.8

                Independent price verification is distinct from daily mark-to-market. It is the process by which market prices or model inputs are regularly verified for accuracy. While daily marking-to-market may be performed by dealers, verification of market prices or model inputs must be performed by a unit independent of the dealing room, at least monthly (or, depending on the nature of the market/trading activity, more frequently). It need not be performed as frequently as daily mark-to-market, since the objective, i.e. independent, marking of positions, should reveal any error or bias in pricing, which should result in the elimination of inaccurate daily marks.

                January 2015

              • CA-16.1.9

                Independent price verification entails a higher standard of accuracy in that the market prices or model inputs are used to determine profit and loss figures, whereas daily marks are used primarily for management reporting in between reporting dates. For independent price verification, where pricing sources are more subjective, e.g. only one available broker quote, prudent measures such as valuation adjustments may be appropriate.

                January 2015

            • Valuation Adjustments

              • CA-16.1.10

                As part of their procedures for marking to market, conventional bank licensees must establish and maintain procedures for considering valuation adjustments. Conventional bank licensees using third-party valuations must consider whether valuation adjustments are necessary. Such considerations are also necessary when marking to model.

                January 2015

              • CA-16.1.11

                The CBB requires the following valuation adjustments/reserves to be formally considered at a minimum: unearned credit spreads, close-out costs, operational risks, early termination, investing and funding costs, and future administrative costs and, where appropriate, model risk.

                January 2015

            • Adjustment to the Current Valuation of Less Liquid Positions for Regulatory Capital Purposes

              • CA-16.1.11A

                Conventional bank licensees must establish and maintain procedures for judging the necessity of and calculating an adjustment to the current valuation of less liquid positions for regulatory capital purposes. This adjustment may be in addition to any changes to the value of the position required for financial reporting purposes and must be designed to reflect the illiquidity of the position. The CBB requires conventional bank licensees to consider the need for an adjustment to a position's valuation to reflect current illiquidity whether the position is marked to market using market prices or observable inputs, third-party valuations or marked to model.

                January 2015

              • CA-16.1.11B

                'Less liquid positions' would generally involve positions in OTC financial instruments or commodities which are not listed or which are not traded through a central counterparties (such as NYSE Euronext or Chicago Mercantile Exchange) or which do not have readily available secondary market prices or observable inputs to valuation.

                January 2015

          • CA-16.1.12

            Bearing in mind that the assumptions made about liquidity in the market risk capital charge may not be consistent with the conventional bank licensee's ability to sell or hedge out less liquid positions, where appropriate, conventional bank licensees must take an adjustment to the current valuation of these positions, and review their continued appropriateness on an on-going basis. Reduced liquidity may have arisen from market events. Additionally, close-out prices for concentrated positions and/or stale positions must be considered in establishing the adjustment. Conventional bank licensees must consider all relevant factors when determining the appropriateness of the adjustment for less liquid positions. These factors may include, but are not limited to, the amount of time it would take to hedge out the position/risks within the position, the average volatility of bid/offer spreads, the availability of independent market quotes (number and identity of market makers), the average and volatility of trading volumes (including trading volumes during periods of market stress), market concentrations, the aging of positions, the extent to which valuation relies on marking-to-model, and the impact of other model risks not included in Paragraph CA-16.1.11A.

            January 2015

          • CA-16.1.12A

            For complex products including, but not limited to, securitisation exposures and n-th-to-default credit derivatives, conventional bank licensees must explicitly assess the need for valuation adjustments to reflect two forms of model risk: the model risk associated with using a possibly incorrect valuation methodology; and the risk associated with using unobservable (and possibly incorrect) calibration parameters in the valuation model.

            January 2015

          • CA-16.1.13

            The adjustment to the current valuation of less liquid positions made under Paragraph CA-16.1.12 must impact Tier 1 regulatory capital and may exceed those valuation adjustments made under financial reporting standards and Paragraphs CA-16.1.10 and CA-16.1.11.

            January 2015